CS-1650/2050

SERVICE MANUAL
Published in Aug 04 2DA70941 Revision 1

CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.

ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER DEXPLOSION SIL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MME TYPE OU DUN TYPE RECOMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RBUT LES BATTERIES USAGES CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.

Revision history
Revision 1 Date June 25, 2004 Replaced pages Overall revised Remarks

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. Symbols The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol. General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock. Warning of high temperature. indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol. General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited. indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol. General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet. Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................ Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. .............................................................................................................................

CAUTION: Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....

Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .............. Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................

Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........

Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .............................................. Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury.................................................. Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. .............................................................................................................................. Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copiers instruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................

2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............

Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures. .........................................................................................................................................

Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................

Always use parts having the correct specifications. .......................................................................... Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ...............................................................................................................................

When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................

Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............ Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................

Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. .............................................................................................................................. Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................

CAUTION Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................

Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......

Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................

Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................

Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................

 Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................

Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................

Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........ Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ................................... After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing screws. .................................................................................. Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................

Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: .................................... Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely. Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents. Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main switch on. Always wash hands afterwards. Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc........................................................................................................................... Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately. ......................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous
WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................

2DA/2DB-1

CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-2 Parts names and their functions ........................................................................................................... (1) MFP ................................................................................................................................................ (2) Operation panel .............................................................................................................................. 1-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-1 1-1-3 1-1-3 1-1-4 1-1-5 1-1-6

1-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1 1-2-2 Toner .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1 1-2-3 Installation environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-2-2

1-3 Installation
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................................................................... 1-3-1 (1) Installation procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-1 1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .................................................................................................................... 1-3-6 1-3-3 Installing the paper feeder (option) ...................................................................................................... 1-3-7 1-3-4 Installing the DP (option) ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-9 1-3-5 Installing the duplex unit (option) ....................................................................................................... 1-3-13 1-3-6 Installing the drawer heater (option) ................................................................................................... 1-3-16 1-3-7 Installing the key counter (option) ...................................................................................................... 1-3-19 1-3-8 Installing the finisher (option) ............................................................................................................. 1-3-22 1-3-9 Installing the job separator (option) .................................................................................................... 1-3-30 1-3-10 Installing the fax system (option) ........................................................................................................ 1-3-35 1-3-11 Installing the scan system (option) ..................................................................................................... 1-3-43 1-3-12 Installing the hard disk (option) .......................................................................................................... 1-3-45

1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-4-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ....................................................................................................... 1-4-1 (2) Maintenance modes item list .......................................................................................................... 1-4-2 (3) Contents of maintenance mode items ............................................................................................ 1-4-5 1-4-2 Management mode ............................................................................................................................ 1-4-54 (1) Using the management mode ...................................................................................................... 1-4-54 (2) Setting the job accounting ............................................................................................................ 1-4-55 (3) Copy default ................................................................................................................................. 1-4-56 (4) Machine default ............................................................................................................................ 1-4-58 (5) Bypass setting .............................................................................................................................. 1-4-60 (6) Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report ..................................................... 1-4-60 (7) Status report print out ................................................................................................................... 1-4-60 (8) Language selection function ......................................................................................................... 1-4-60

1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1 (1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1 (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-5-2 (3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-7 1-1-1 1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-17 (1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................ 1-5-17 (2) Self-diagnostic codes ................................................................................................................... 1-5-18 1-5-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................................. 1-5-26 (1) No image appears (entirely white). ............................................................................................... 1-5-27 (2) No image appears (entirely black). ............................................................................................... 1-5-27 (3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-28

2DA/2DB-1 (4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... (5) A white line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. (6) A black line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. (7) A black line appears laterally. ....................................................................................................... (8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ................................................................... (9) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................................. (10) Image is blurred. ........................................................................................................................... (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................ (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................ (13) Paper creases. ............................................................................................................................. (14) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................................... (15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................ (16) Fixing is poor. ............................................................................................................................... (17) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................................... (18) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................................... 1-5-4 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................. (1) The machine does not operate when the power switch is turned on. ........................................... (2) The drive motor does not operate (C2000). ................................................................................. (3) The registration motor does not operate. ..................................................................................... (4) The exit motor does not operate. .................................................................................................. (5) The scanner motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... (6) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate. ......................................................................................... (7) Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate. ......................................................................................... (8) Cooling fan motor 3 does not operate. ......................................................................................... (9) The drawer drive motor* does not operate. .................................................................................. (10) The paper feed clutch does not operate. ...................................................................................... (11) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. ......................................................................... (12) The drawer paper feed clutch* does not operate. ........................................................................ (13) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................ (14) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ........................................................................................... (15) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ........................................................................................... (16) The fixing heater does not turn on (C6000). ................................................................................. (17) The fixing heater does not turn off. ............................................................................................... (18) Main charging is not performed. ................................................................................................... (19) Transfer charging is not performed. ............................................................................................. (20) No developing bias is output. ....................................................................................................... (21) The original size is not detected. .................................................................................................. (22) The original size is not detected correctly. ................................................................................... (23) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the drawer 1. .. (24) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the drawer 2*. (25) The size of paper in the drawer 1 is not displayed correctly. ........................................................ (26) The size of paper in the drawer 2* is not displayed correctly. ...................................................... (27) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated when the power switch is turned on. ...................................................................................................... (28) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover and left cover are closed. .................................................................................................................... (29) Others. .......................................................................................................................................... 1-5-5 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... (1) No primary paper feed. ................................................................................................................. (2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................ (3) Skewed paper feed. ...................................................................................................................... (4) The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................ 1-1-2 (5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ................................................................................. (6) Paper jams. .................................................................................................................................. (7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ................................................................................... (8) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-5-28 1-5-28 1-5-29 1-5-29 1-5-29 1-5-30 1-5-30 1-5-30 1-5-31 1-5-31 1-5-31 1-5-32 1-5-32 1-5-32 1-5-33 1-5-34 1-5-34 1-5-34 1-5-34 1-5-34 1-5-35 1-5-35 1-5-35 1-5-35 1-5-35 1-5-35 1-5-35 1-5-36 1-5-36 1-5-36 1-5-36 1-5-36 1-5-36 1-5-36 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-37 1-5-38 1-5-38 1-5-38 1-5-39 1-5-39 1-5-39 1-5-39 1-5-39 1-5-39 1-5-39 1-5-40 1-5-40

2DA/2DB-1

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1 (1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1 (2) Running a maintenance item .......................................................................................................... 1-6-2 1-6-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-6-3 (1) Detaching and refitting the separation pulley ................................................................................. 1-6-3 (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley .............................................. 1-6-5 (3) Detaching and refitting the feed roller (20 ppm model only) ........................................................... 1-6-7 (4) Detaching and refitting the drawer separation pulley (20 ppm model only) .................................... 1-6-8 (5) Detaching and refitting the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley (20 ppm model only) ....................................................................................................................... 1-6-9 (6) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit ......................................................................... 1-6-11 (7) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad ...................... 1-6-13 (8) Detaching and refitting the registration left roller .......................................................................... 1-6-15 (9) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner ............................................................................ 1-6-15 (10) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................ 1-6-16 (10-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing .................................................... 1-6-16 (10-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing ..................................... 1-6-17 (10-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ........................................................................... 1-6-18 (10-4) Adjusting the trailing edge margin of image printing ............................................................ 1-6-19 (10-5) Adjusting the margins for printing ........................................................................................ 1-6-20 (10-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper .......................................................................... 1-6-21 1-6-3 Optical section .................................................................................................................................... 1-6-22 (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ................................................................................... 1-6-22 (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .................................................................................... 1-6-23 (2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ............................................................................................... 1-6-23 (2-2) Fitting the scanner wires ...................................................................................................... 1-6-25 (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) .................................................................................. 1-6-28 (4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .............................................................................. 1-6-29 (5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ....................................................................... 1-6-32 (6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ........................................ 1-6-33 (7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction ................................... 1-6-34 (8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ........................................................................... 1-6-35 (9) Adjusting the scanner center line ................................................................................................. 1-6-36 (10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................ 1-6-37 1-6-4 Drum section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-6-38 (1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit ............................................................................................ 1-6-38 (2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws ....................................................................... 1-6-39 (3) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit ............................................................................... 1-6-40 1-6-5 Developing section .............................................................................................................................. 1-6-41 (1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit .................................................................................. 1-6-41 1-6-6 Transfer section .................................................................................................................................. 1-6-42 (1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller ..................................................................................... 1-6-42 1-6-7 Fixing section ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-43 (1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ........................................................................................... 1-6-43 (2) Detaching and refitting the press roller ......................................................................................... 1-6-45 (3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S ......................................................................... 1-6-46 (4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws ............................................................... 1-6-47 (5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ........................................................................................... 1-6-48 (6) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermostat ................................................................................ 1-6-49 (7) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermistor ................................................................................. 1-6-49 (8) Adjusting the fixing unit height (adjusting lateral squareness) ...................................................... 1-6-50 1-1-3

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

1-7-1 1-7-2 1-7-3 1-7-4 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................ Upgrading the printer board firmware .................................................................................................. Adjustment-free variable resisters (VR) ............................................................................................... Remarks on engine PCB or main PCB replacement ........................................................................... 1-7-1 1-7-2 1-7-3 1-7-3

2DA/2DB-1

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 2-1-1 2-1-2 Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-4 (1) Original scanning ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-5 (2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-6 2-1-3 Drum section ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1-8 2-1-4 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 2-1-10 (1) Formation of magnetic brush ........................................................................................................ 2-1-11 (2) Single component developing system .......................................................................................... 2-1-12 2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections ....................................................................................................... 2-1-13 2-1-6 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-15 (1) Fixing temperature system ........................................................................................................... 2-1-16 (2) Fixing temperature control based on ambient temperature .......................................................... 2-1-16 2-1-7 Exit and switchback sections ............................................................................................................. 2-1-17 2-1-8 Duplex section .................................................................................................................................... 2-1-18 (1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying .............................................................................. 2-1-19

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ........................................................................................................................... (1) PCBs .............................................................................................................................................. (2) Switches and sensors ..................................................................................................................... (3) Motors ............................................................................................................................................. (4) Other electrical components ........................................................................................................... 2-2-1 2-2-1 2-2-2 2-2-4 2-2-5

2-3 Operation of the PCBs

2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-3 2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-6 Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-1 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-4 Engine PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 2-3-8 Printer board PCB .............................................................................................................................. 2-3-14 Operation unit PCB ............................................................................................................................ 2-3-18 CCD PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3-21

2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1 Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2 Timing chart No. 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3 Timing chart No. 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4 Chart of image adjustment procedures .......................................................................................................... 2-4-5 Maintenance parts list .................................................................................................................................... 2-4-8 Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................................................. 2-4-9 General wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-4-11

1-1-4

2DA/2DB

1-1-1 Specifications
Type ............................................... Desktop Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system Originals ......................................... Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: A3/11" 17") Original feed system ...................... Fixed Copy paper ..................................... Paper weights Drawer: 60 105 g/m2 Bypass table: 45 160 g/m2 Paper type Drawer: Plain paper, recycled paper and colored paper Bypass table: Plain paper, recycled paper, thin paper, thick paper and colored paper Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" 17" Minimum: A6R /51/2" 81/2" Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 200%, 1% increments Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode: 16 ppm model 20 ppm model A4: 16 copies/min. A4: 20 copies/min. A4R: 13 copies/min. A4R: 13 copies/min. A3: 8 copies/min. A3: 10 copies/min. A5R: 10 copies/min. A5R: 10 copies/min. A6R: 10 copies/min. A6R: 10 copies/min. B5: 16 copies/min. B5: 20 copies/min. B5R: 13 copies/min. B5R: 13 copies/min. B4 (257 364 mm): 8 copies/min. B4 (257 364 mm): 11 copies/min. 11" 81/2": 16 copies/min. 11" 81/2": 20 copies/min. 1 8 /2" 11": 13 copies/min. 81/2" 11": 13 copies/min. 11" 17": 8 copies/min. 11" 17": 10 copies/min. 81/2" 14": 8 copies/min. 81/2" 14": 11 copies/min. First copy time ................................ 5.9 s or less (A4/11" 81/2") Warm-up time ................................. Less then 20 s (room temperature 23C/73.4F, 50% RH) Time for recovery from low power mode: 10 s Time for recovery from sleep mode: 20 s Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed Capacity: Drawers: 300 sheets (80 g/m2) 100 sheets (90 105 g/m2) Manual feed Capacity: Bypass: 50 sheets (A4/11" 81/2" or less) 25 sheets (A3, B4, 11" 17", 81/2" 14") Paper ejection system .................... In-machine ejection (face down) Capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m2) Continuous copying ........................ 1 999 sheets Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 30 mm) Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging Recording system .......................... Semiconductor laser Developing system ......................... Single component developing system Toner: magnetism toner Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner container Transfer system ............................. Transfer roller Separation system ......................... Curvature separation and separation electrode Fixing system ................................. Heat roller Heat source: halogen heaters (120 V specifications:main 550 W, sub 400W/ 220-240 V specifications: main 590 W, sub 430 W) Control temperature: 170C/338F (180C/356F on and after 6th sheet) Abnormally high temperature protection device: 180C/356F thermostat Fixing pressure: 44.1 N Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp Cleaning system ............................. Cleaning blade Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Bitmap memory .............................. 35 MB (standard) Image storage memory .................. 29 MB (standard)

1-1-1

2DA/2DB-1 Additional memory ......................... 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB and 128 MB Resolution ...................................... 600 600 dpi Light source .................................... Inert gas lamp Dimensions .................................... 16 ppm model: 574 (W) 593 (D) 545 (H) mm 225/8" (W) 233/8" (D) 217/16" (H) 20 ppm model: 574 (W) 593 (D) 650 (H) mm 225/8" (W) 233/8" (D) 259/16" (H) Weight ............................................ 16 ppm model: Approx. 42 kg/92.4 lbs 20 ppm model: Approx. 49 kg/107.8 lbs Floor requirements ......................... 827 (W) 593 (D) mm 325/8" (W) 233/8" (D) Functions ........................................ Automatic paper selection, Image quality selection, Automatic sizing selection function, zoom function, Duplex copy, Divided copy, Binding margin, Border width, Aggregate copy, Sort copy, Eco-copy, Copy program and Section management mode Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 9.0 A 220 240 V AC, 50 Hz, 5.0 A Options ........................................... Document processer, paper feeder, duplex unit, finisher, job separator, key counter, fax system, network scanner, hard disk and additional memory

Printer functions Printing speed ................................ Same as copying speed First print time ................................ Approx. 5.5 s (A4/11" 81/2") Resolution ...................................... 300 dpi, 600 dpi, Fast 1200 mode Memory .......................................... 64 MB (standard) Additional memory: 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB and 256 MB Hard disk: 340 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB Applicable OS ................................ Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.x/2000/XP Apple Macintosh OS 9.x/OS X 10.x UNIX/Linux Interface ......................................... Parallel interface (based on IEEE1284) Network interface USB 2.0 (USB Hi-Speed) Network interface card (option)

Duplex unit Type ............................................... Internal type Copy paper ..................................... Paper weights: 64 90 g/m2 Paper type: Plain paper, recycled paper and colored paper Paper sizes .................................... A3 A5R/11" 17" 51/2" 81/2" Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the MFP Dimensions .................................... 368 (W) 53 (D) 180 (H) mm 141/2" (W) 21/16" (D) 71/16" (H) Weight ............................................ Approx. 0.65 kg/1.43 lbs

1-1-2

2DA/2DB

1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

(1) MFP

Figure 1-1-1

1 Original cover 2 Copy storage section 3 Operation panel 4 Drawer 1 5 Drawer 2 (20 ppm model only) 6 Width guide 7 Length guide 8 Left cover handle 9 Bypass tray

0 Support guide ! Slider @ Contact glass # Original size indicator plates $ Left cover % Waste toner box ^ Toner container release lever & Toner container * Cleaner rod

( Front cover ) Power switch Power switch cover Handles for transport Network interface connector USB interface connector Parallel interface connector Memory card slot

1-1-3

2DA/2DB (2) Operation panel

Figure 1-1-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( )

System Menu/Counter key and indicator Copier key and indicator Printer key and indicator Scanner key and indicator Fax key and indicator Combine key and indicator Border Erase key and indicator Duplex/Split Page key and indicator Offset key and indicator Function key Scanner Function key Auto Selection key and indicator Margin key and indicator Sort key and indicator Staple key and indicator Program key Zoom key / Left cursor key Auto%/100% key / Down cursor key Original Size key / Up cursor key

Paper Select key / Right cursor key Enter key Image quality mode select key Auto Exposure key Lighter key / Darker key / exposure display Message display Ready indicator Data indicator Attention indicator Job Accounting key Interrupt key and indicator Energy Saver key and indicator Power key and indicator Numeric keys Reset key Stop/Clear key Start key and indicator Main power indicator

1-1-4

2DA/2DB

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Light path Paper path

Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Paper feed section Optical section Drum section Developing section Transfer and separation section Fixing section Exit and switchback section Duplex section

1-1-5

2DA/2DB

1-1-4 Drive system

Figure 1-1-4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # $

Drive motor gear Gear 122 Registration gear 51 Registration motor gear Gear 32 Gear 25 Gear 25 Gear 20 Paper feed clutch gear Gear 30 Gear 31 Gear 25 Gear 49 Gear 30/23

% ^ & * ( )

Developing gear 25 Developing gear 26 Fixing joint gear 29 Gear 40 Gear 40 Gear 88/34 Gear 40 Fixing joint gear 40 Coupling gear Gear 50 Gear 60 Exit motor gear Gear 43/20

1-1-6

2DA/2DB

1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum. When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light. Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 20C/4F and 55C/131F and at a relative humidity not higher than 90% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity. Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum. Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

1-2-2 Toner
Store the toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.

1-2-1

2DA/2DB-1

1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 32.5C/50 - 90.5F 2. Humidity: 15 - 80%RH 3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 9.0 A 220 - 240 V AC, 5.0 A 4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz 0.3%/60 Hz 0.3% 5. Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams. Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine. Avoid dust and vibration. Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine. Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1 ). Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents. Select a room with good ventilation. 6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine. Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/315/16" Machine right: 300 mm/1113/16" Machine left: 300 mm/1113/16"

d a

f c g

b e
a: 571 mm/221/2" b: 593 mm/233/8" c: 500 mm/1911/16" d: 1371.5 mm/54" e: 1323 mm/521/16" f: 952.5 mm/371/2" g: 605 mm/2313/16" Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions

1-2-2

2DA/2DB

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure

Start

Unpack.

Install the optional paper feeder. Installing the toner (maintenance item U130).

Remove the tapes and pins.

Install the original cover or the optional DP.

Load paper.

Install the optional duplex unit.

Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).

Install the optional finisher or job separator.

Exit maintenance mode.

Install the toner container.

Make test copies.

Connect the power cord.

End of installation.

1-3-1

2DA/2DB Unpack. 16 ppm model

Figure 1-3-1a Unpacking

1 MFP 2 Power cord 3 Toner container 4 Outer case 5 Lower left pad 6 Lower right pad 7 Upper left pad 8 Upper right pad 9 Inner frame * Place the machine on a level surface.

0 Left spacer ! Rear spacer @ Rear pad # Skid $ Belt % Eject sheet ^ Machine cover & Bar code labels * Top sheet

( Original holder (Asia and Oceania) ) Operation guide Cassette size sheet Paper protection bag Error code label Inspection report

1-3-2

2DA/2DB 20 ppm model

Figure 1-3-1b Unpacking 1 MFP 2 Power cord 3 Toner container 4 Outer case 5 Lower left pad 6 Lower right pad 7 Upper left pad 8 Upper right pad 9 Inner frame 0 Left spacer ! Rear spacer @ Rear pad # Skid $ Belt % Eject sheet ^ Machine cover & Bar code labels * Top sheet ( Original holder (Asia and Oceania) ) Front pad Operation guide Cassette size sheet Paper protection bag Error code label Inspection report

* Place the machine on a level surface.

1-3-3

2DA/2DB Install the optional paper feeder. 1. Install the optional paper feeder as necessary (see page 1-3-7 to 1-3-8). Remove the tapes and pins. 1. Remove the ten tapes (16 ppm model). Remove the fifteen tapes (20 ppm model).
16 ppm model Tape

Tapes Tape Tapes

Tape Tapes

20 ppm model

Tape

Tapes

Tapes Tape

Tapes Tapes Tapes

Figure 1-3-2 2. Remove the two pins for light source unit.
Pins

Figure 1-3-3

1-3-4

2DA/2DB-1 Install the original cover or optional DP. 1. Install the original cover or optional DP (see pages 1-3-9 to 1-3-12 when installing the DP).

Install the optional duplex unit. 1. Install the optional duplex unit as necessary (see pages 1-3-13 to 1-3-15).

Install the optional finisher or job separator. 1. Install the optional finisher or job separator as necessary (see pages 1-3-22 to 1-3-34).

Install the toner container. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Tap the top of the toner container five to six times. 3. Shake the toner container approximately 10 times in the horizontal direction to stir toner. 4. Turn the toner container release lever and gently push the toner container into the MFP. * Push the container all the way into the MFP until it locks in place. 5. Restore the toner container release lever. 6. Close the front cover.
Toner container release lever

Toner container

Figure 1-3-4

Connect the power cord. 1. Connect the power cord to the connector on the MFP. 2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet and turn the power switch on. Installing the toner (maintenance item U130). 1. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. 2. Enter 130 using the numeric keys and press the start key. 3. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. 4. Press the start key to execute the maintenance item. Installation of toner starts and time (minutes) is indicated until the installation ends. 5. When the installation is complete, FINISHED will be displayed if the installation is successful or NG will be displayed if it has failed. If NG is displayed, check to see if the toner container contains toner and to see if the toner container sensor malfunctions and then try again. 6. Press the stop/clear key. Load paper. 1. Load paper in the drawer.

1-3-5

2DA/2DB Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000). 1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key. 2. Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items. 3. Press the stop/clear key.

Exit maintenance mode. 1. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key. The machine exits the maintenance mode.

Make test copies. 1. Place an original and make test copies.

End of installation.

1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:

Maintenance item No. U253 U254 U258 U260 U264 U277 U326 U342 U343 U344

Contents Switching between double and single counts Turning auto start function on/off Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Changing the copy count timing Setting the display order of the date Setting auto aplication change time Setting the black line cleaning indication Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Setting preheat/energy saver mode

Factory setting Double count ON SINGLE MODE After ejection Month/Day/Year (Inch specifications) Day/Month/Year (Inch specifications) 30 ON ON OFF ENERGY STAR

1-3-6

2DA/2DB-1

1-3-3 Installing the paper feeder (option)

<Procedure> 1. Place the MFP on the paper feeder by aligning the positioning insertion sections of the MFP with the positioning pins at the rear part of the paper feeder. * When placing the MFP, take care not to hit the MFP against the drawer, the pins or ground plate of the paper feeder.
Positioning pins

Paper feeder

Figure 1-3-5 For stacking paper feeders for use: Stack a paper feeder on another paper feeder by aligning the positioning insertion sections of the first paper feeder with the positioning pins at the rear part of the second paper feeder. (For 16 ppm model, three paper feeders can be added. For 20 ppm model, two paper feeders can be added.)

Positioning pins

Positioning pins

Figure 1-3-6

2. If a type of paper that is not included in the specifications for the standard sheet cassette size is used, replace the cassette size sheet indication with the supplied one. 3. Insert the MFP power plug into the wall outlet and turn the power switch on. Load paper in the drawer and make test copies to check the operation.

Cassette size sheet indication

Figure 1-3-7

1-3-7

2DA/2DB-1 Adjusting the leading edge timing 1. Run maintenance mode 034. Select ADJ, RCL ON TIMING and press the start key. First optional cassette: Select RCL T1. Second optional cassette: Select RCL T2. Third optional cassette: Select RCL T3. For models equipped with two standard cassettes, adjust only RCL T2 and RCL T3. Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern and check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the adjustment value. If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the adjustment value. Setting range: -5.0 - +10.0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm. 3. Output the test pattern again. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained.

Adequate image

Test pattern a

Test pattern b

Figure 1-3-8-1

Adjusting the center line 1. Run maintenance mode 034. Select ADJ, LSU OUT TIMING and press the start key. First optional cassette: Select LSU T1. Second optional cassette: Select LSU T2. Third optional cassette: Select LSU T3. For models equipped with two standard cassettes, adjust only LSU T2 and LSU T3. Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern and check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the adjustment value. If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the adjustment value. Setting range: -7.0 - +10.0 Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0.1 mm. 3. Output the test pattern again. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained.

Adequate image

Test pattern a

Test pattern b

Figure 1-3-8-2

1-3-8

2DA/2DB-1 Installing the drawer heater (option) Drawer heater installation requires the following parts: Drawer heater (P/N 120 V specifications: 2A727480, 220-240 V specifications: 2A727490) Ground plate (P/N 3BG02060) Drawer heater mounting plate (P/N 3HW02030) One (1) M3 6 tap-tight S binding screw (P/N B3023060)

<Procedure> 1. Remove the rear cover of the paper feeder. 2. Pull out the drawer. 3. Fit the drawer heater to the hook on the drawer heater mounting plate. Mount the heater so that the projection of the drawer heater mounting plate is inserted into the hole of the drawer heater. * After mounting, check that the projection is securely inserted into the hole and that the drawer heater does not move forward/ backward or right/left. 4. Fit the ground plate to the drawer heater mounting plate using the M3 6 taptite S binding screw.

M3 6 taptite S binding screw Drawer heater Ground plate

Drawer heater mounting plate

Projection

Hook

Hook

Figure 1-3-9-1

5. Insert the drawer heater mounting plate from the front side of the machine, pass the drawer heater wire through the hole on the frame at the rear side of the machine, and pull the wire out from the rear side of the machine. 6. Fit the two holes at the rear of the drawer heater mounting plate to the fitting portions at the rear side of the machine.

Fitting portion

Fitting portion

Hole

Drawer heater mounting plate

Drawer heater wire

Figure 1-3-9-2

1-3-8-1 1-3-9

2DA/2DB-1 7. Fit the three holes on the front of the drawer heater mounting plate to the positioning portion and the fitting portions on the front side of the machine.

Fitting portion

Positioning portion

Fitting portion

Drawer heater mounting plate

Figure 1-3-9-3

8. Connect the connector of the drawer heater wire to YC3 on the drawer heater PCB. Put the drawer heater wire inside the paper feeder cover by bending. 9. Refit all the removed parts.

YC3 Drawer heater PCB

Drawer heater wire

Figure 1-3-9-4

1-3-10 1-3-8-2

2DA/2DB

1-3-4 Installing the DP (option)

<Procedure> 1. Remove the original holder and remove the two screws from the rear top cover. 2. Pass the two pins through the screw holes of the rear top cover and attach them to the lower frame.
Pin Screw Pin Screw

Figure 1-3-10

3. Place the DP on the MFP by fitting the pins into the holes at the hinge sections of the DP and sliding them toward the front side.

DP Pin Pin

Hole

Hole

Figure 1-3-11

4. Secure the DP with the two TP Taptite chromate screws M4 10 and the two screws that have been removed in step 1.

TP Taptite TP Taptite chromate chromate screw M4 10 Screw screw M4 10 Screw

DP

Figure 1-3-12

1-3-9

2DA/2DB 5. Close the DP, fit the fixing fitting from the rear side of the right hinge, and secure it with the two bronze TP screws M3 x 06. 6. Connect the cable of the DP to the MFP. * Be sure to tighten the fixing screws on both side of the connector.

Cable

Fixing fitting Bronze TP screws M3 x 06

Figure 1-3-13 7. Clean the pasting position for the caution label with alcohol. Paste the caution label that corresponds to the language according to the destination to the DP.
Caution label

Figure 1-3-14

[Operation check] 1. Prepare an original on which 4 lines are drawn 15 mm from the edges and the center line is drawn. 2. Set the original on the DP and make a test copy to check the copy image. At this time, set the paper guide for the original table and drawer to the paper size to be used. 3. If the copy image does not match the original image, carry out the following adjustments in maintenance mode. Maintenance mode 070 (sub-scan line adjustment) Maintenance mode 071 (leading edge timing adjustment) Maintenance mode 072 (center line adjustment)

15mm 15mm

15mm Center line

Lines

Lines

15mm Original

Figure 1-3-15

1-3-10

2DA/2DB Maintenance mode 070 (sub-scan line adjustment) 1. Run maintenance mode 070. Select CONVEY SPEED1. (For adjustment of the back side in duplex copying, select CONVEY SPEED2.) Set originals in the original tray and press the interrupt key. Make a test copy to check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. For copy example a: decrease the value. For copy example b: increase the value. Setting range: -25 - +25 Changing the value by one changes the sub-scan line by 0.1%. A smaller setting value makes the copy image shorter. A larger value makes the image longer.

Original

Copy example a

Copy example b

Figure 1-3-16 Maintenance mode 071 (leading edge timing adjustment) 1. Run maintenance mode 071. Select LEAD1. (For adjustment of the back side in duplex copying, select LEAD2.) Set originals in the original tray and press the interrupt key. Make a test copy to check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. For copy example a: increase the value. For copy example b: decrease the value. Setting range: -32 - +32 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0.2 mm. The larger the value, the later the image scan start timing. The smaller the value, the earlier the image scan start timing.

Original

Copy example a

Copy example b

Figure 1-3-17

1-3-11

2DA/2DB Maintenance mode 072 (center line adjustment) 1. Run maintenance mode 072. Select 1sided. (For adjustment of the front side in duplex copying, select 2sided front. For adjustment of the back side, select 2sided back.) Set originals in the original tray and press the Interrupt key. Make a test copy to check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. For copy example a: increase the value. For copy example b: decrease the value. Setting range: -39 - +39 Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0.1 mm. The larger the value, the center of the image moves toward the right. The smaller the value, the center of the image moves toward the left.

Original

Copy example a

Copy example b

Figure 1-3-18

1-3-12

2DA/2DB

1-3-5 Installing the duplex unit (option)

<Procedure> 1. Open the left cover. 2. Remove the stop ring and the strap from the rear side. 3. Restore the conveyor section. 4. Remove the fitting projection and pin, and then remove the stopper from the front side. 5. Open the left cover until it is put horizontally.
Stop ring

Fitting projection

Stopper

Strap

Pin

Left cover

Figure 1-3-19 6. Turn the wire guide section of the duplex unit in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Wire guide section

Figure 1-3-20 7. Insert the axis sections of the duplex unit into the Ushape grooves of the conveyer unit.

Axis section

Axis section

Duplex unit

Figure 1-3-21

1-3-13

2DA/2DB-1 8. Press the duplex unit in the direction indicated by the arrow to fit the claws into the conveyer unit.

Duplex unit

Claws

Claw

Figure 1-3-22-1

9. Hang the hook of the plate lock on the conveying unit and then turn the plate lock to fit the hole to the claw of the duplex unit.
Plate lock Hook

Hole

Claw

Figure 1-3-22-2

10. Secure the duplex unit with the two S tite screws M3 06.

Duplex unit

S tite screws M3 06

Figure 1-3-23

1-3-14

2DA/2DB-1 11. Open the conveyer unit and connect the connector of the duplex unit to the MFP. 12. Reattach the removed parts to their original positions. 13. Connect the MFP power plug to the wall outlet and turn the power switch on.

Duplex unit

Connector

Figure 1-3-24 Adjusting the leading edge timing 1. Run maintenance mode 034. Select ADJ, RCL ON TIMING and press the start key. Select RCL DUP. Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in the duplex mode and check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the adjustment value. If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the adjustment value. Setting range: -5.0 - +10.0 Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm. 3. Output the test pattern again. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained.

Adequate image

Test pattern a

Test pattern b

Figure 1-3-25

Adjusting the center line 1. Run maintenance mode 034. Select ADJ, LSU OUT TIMING and press the start key. Select LSU DUP. Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in the duplex mode and check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment. 2. a: Adequate image 2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the adjustment value. If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the adjustment value. Setting range: -7.0 - +10.0 Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0.1 mm. 3. Output the test pattern again. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained.

Adequate image

Test pattern a

Test pattern b

Figure 1-3-26

1-3-15

2DA/2DB-1

1-3-6 Installing the drawer heater (option)

Drawer heater installation requires the following parts: Drawer heater (P/N 120 V specifications: 2C960030, 220-240 V specifications: 2C960040) One (1) M4 10 tap-tight S binding screw (P/N B3024100) <Procedure> 1. Remove the main body from the paper feeder (see page 1-6-7). 2. Remove the right cover. Pull out the drawer. 3. Remove the three screws and then the front right cover.

Front right cover

Figure 1-3-27

1-3-16

2DA/2DB 4. Insert the cassette heater from the bottom of the machine and attach it to the MFP. 1) Pass the connector of the cassette heater through the hole located in the right frame of the machine to pull it out. 2) Insert the projections at the rear side of the cassette heater mounting plate into the two holes in the rear frame of the machine. 3) Position the screw hole of the drawer heater to the screw hole of the front frame of the machine and secure the heater using the M4 10 Taptite S binding screw.

Holes in the rear frame

Projections Drawer heater Hole in the right frame

Screw hole Connector

M4 10 tap tight S binding screw

Figure 1-3-28

1-3-17

2DA/2DB 5. Remove the two screws and open the power source PCB in the direction indicated by the arrow. * Take care not to open the power source PCB too much. 6. Fit the wire of the drawer heater into the groove of the frame and put it inside the power source PCB. * Fit the wire into the groove so that the band mounted to the wire is located above the frame.
Wire of the drawer heater

Power source PCB

Band

Figure 1-3-29

7. Reattach the power source PCB to its original position and connect the connector of the drawer heater to YC8 of the power source PCB. 8. Refit all the removed parts.

Connector

YC8

Figure 1-3-30

1-3-18

2DA/2DB

1-3-7 Installing the key counter (option)

Key counter installation requires the following parts: Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010) Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030) Key counter mount (P/N 66060040) Key counter assembly (P/N 41529210) Four (4) M4 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060) One (1) M4 35 round head screw (P/N B0004350) Two (2) M3 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060) One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000) Key counter mounting plate (P/N 2C960100) Key counter wire (P/N 2C960110)

Procedure 1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using the two screws and nut. 2. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws, and attach the key counter retainer to the mount using the two screws.

M4 6 screws (B4304060) Key counter retainer (66060030) Key counter mount (66060040) M3 nut (C2303000) Key counter cover (2A360010)

M4 6 screws (B4304060)

Key counter socket assembly (41529210) M3 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)

Figure 1-3-31

1-3-19

2DA/2DB 3. Remove the rear cover. 4. Cut out the aperture plate on the right cover using nippers. 5. Connect the 4-pin connector of the key counter wire (located at a longer distance from the tube) to YC13 on the engine PCB, pass the wire through the two clamps, and pull the other 4-pin connector out from the aperture of the right cover. * Arrange the key counter wire behind the optical system wire as shown in the illustration. 6. Fold the 7-pin connector of the key counter wire back, pass the wire through the clamp at the upper part of the controller box, and hang it.

Aperture 4-pin connector 7-pin connector Clamp

YC13 Key counter wire Clamp 4-pin connector

Figure 1-3-32

7. Pass the connector of the key counter through the aperture of the key counter mounting plate, and engage the projection of key counter mounting plate with the square hole of the key counter cover.
Aperture

4-pin connector

Key counter mounting plate (2C960100)

Key counter cover

Projection Square hole

Figure 1-3-33

1-3-20

2DA/2DB 8. Connect the 4-pin connector of the key counter to the key counter wire. 9. Engage the projection of the key counter mounting plate with the aperture of the right cover. 10. Secure the key counter cover and the key counter mounting plate together with the MFP using a M4 x 35 screw. 11. Refit the rear cover.

Aperture Key counter wire 4-pin connector Projection Key counter cover

M435 screw (B0004350) Key counter mounting plate (2C960100)

Figure 1-3-34

12. Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly. 13. Turn the power switch on and enter the maintenance mode. 14. Run maintenance item U204 and select KEYCOUNTER. 15. Exit the maintenance mode. 16. Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the message display when the key counter is pulled out. 17. Check that the counter counts up as copies are made.

1-3-21

2DA/2DB

1-3-8 Installing the finisher (option)

<Note> When placing the transfer unit on the floor or the like, be sure to place it upside down. If not, the staple mounting plate may be deformed, resulting in a malfunction.

Transfer unit

Figure 1-3-35 Be sure to remove the tape for the intermediate tray at Procedure 16 not removing before mounting.

Intermediate tray

Figure 1-3-36 <Procedure> Remove the covers. 1. Remove the two screws to remove the upper left cover.

Upper left cover

Screws

Figure 1-3-37

1-3-22

2DA/2DB 2. Open the front cover. 3. Remove the inner cover.

Inner cover

Figure 1-3-38

4. Release the fitting parts using a small screw driver or the like and remove the front side cover.

Fitting parts Front side cover

Figure 1-3-39 5. Remove the screw and the fitting part located on the right side and then remove the left front cover. 6. Open the front cover.

Left front cover

Screw

Fitting part

Figure 1-3-40

1-3-23

2DA/2DB 7. Remove the three screws and then remove the ejection cover and inner ejection cover.

Ejection cover

Inner ejection cover

Screw

Screws

Figure 1-3-41

8. Remove the two screws and then remove the cover.

Screws Cover

Figure 1-3-42

1-3-24

2DA/2DB Attach the transfer unit. 9. Insert the transfer unit from the MFP front side and slide it to the left to install to the ejection part. 10. Place the transfer unit closer to the ejection side and then secure the front side using the TP bind screw M3 06 and the rear side using the pin.

Pin

Transfer unit

TP bind screw M3 06

Figure 1-3-43

Release the lever securing fitting. 11. Loosen the screw located at the rear side of the transfer unit and release the lever securing fitting in the direction of an arrow, and then retighten the screw.

Lever securing fitting Screw

Figure 1-3-44

1-3-25

2DA/2DB Attach the intermediate tray. 12. Loosen the screw located inside of the MFP by about 3 turns. * Do not turn the screw too much, otherwise it may drop in the machine. 13. Hang the hook of the hook holder onto the screw and then retighten the screw.

3 Screw

Screw

Hook holder

Screw

Hook holder

Figure 1-3-45

14. Insert the intermediate tray from the front side of the MFP while pushing the hook to the back and then push the pin located at the right rear side of the intermediate tray into the hook holder until the fitting sound is heard.

Intermediate tray Pin

Hook holder

Hook

Figure 1-3-46

1-3-26

2DA/2DB 15. Fit the pin located at the left rear side of the intermediate tray from the rear side of the MFP onto the hook of the transfer unit. 16. Remove the tape and pull out the 13-pin connector and 24-pin connector.
13-pin connector 24-pin connector Pin

Tape

Hook

Figure 1-3-47 17. Connect the 24-pin connector of the intermediate tray to the connector of the transfer unit. 18. Connect the 13-pin connector of the intermediate tray to YC5 on the engine circuit board.
YC5

13-pin connector

24-pin connector

Connector

Figure 1-3-48 Attach the covers. 19. Attach the cover that has been removed by Procedure 8 to its original position using the two screws. 20. Attach the large ejection cover with the two screws that have been removed by Procedure 1.
Large ejection cover

Screws

Figure 1-3-49

1-3-27

2DA/2DB 21. Attach the front ejection cover and rear ejection cover using the TP bind screw M3 06 each.
Rear ejection cover Front ejection cover

TP bind screw M3 06 TP bind screw M3 06

Figure 1-3-50

22. Open the front cover. 23. Attach the staple cover as it is fitted to the staple unit from the ejection side and then secure it using the TP bind screw M3 06. 24. Attach the inner cover that has been removed by Procedure 3 to its original position. 25. Close the front cover.

TP bind screw M3 06

Staple cover

Figure 1-3-51

1-3-28

2DA/2DB 26. Insert the front and rear hooks of the copy tray into the front ejection cover and rear ejection cover each and then attach the copy tray.

Rear ejection cover

Copy tray Front ejection cover

Figure 1-3-52

27. Open the staple cover and then insert the staple cartridge into the staple unit. 28. Close the staple cover.

Staple cover

Staple cartridge

Figure 1-3-53

Operation check 1. Insert the MFP power plug into an outlet and then turn the power switch on. 2. Select the staple mode and check the staple operation.

1-3-29

2DA/2DB

1-3-9 Installing the job separator (option)

<Procedure> Remove the covers. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove the inner cover.

Inner cover

Figure 1-3-54 3. Release the fitting parts using a small screw driver or the like and remove the front side cover.

Fitting parts Front side cover

Figure 1-3-55 4. Remove the screw and the fitting part located on the right side and then remove the left front cover.
Left front cover

Screw

Fitting part

Figure 1-3-56

1-3-30

2DA/2DB 5. Remove the three screws and then remove the ejection cover and inner ejection cover.

Ejection cover

Inner ejection cover

Screw

Screws

Figure 1-3-57

6. Remove the two screws and then remove the cover.

Screws Cover

Figure 1-3-58

1-3-31

2DA/2DB-1 Attach the job separator. 7. Insert the job separator from the MFP front side and slide it to the left to install to the ejection part. 8. Place the job separator closer to the ejection side and then secure the front side (left tapped hole) with the large pin and the rear side with the small pin.

Small pin

Job separator

Large pin

Figure 1-3-59 9. Loosen the screw that secures the drive unit located at the rear side of the job separator to make it ready for starting to drive and then retighten the screw. 10. Connect the connector of the job separator to YC5 on the engine circuit board. 11. Attach the cover that has been removed by Procedure 6 to its original position using the two screws.
YC5 Drive unit

Connector

Screw

Figure 1-3-60

1-3-32

2DA/2DB Attach the copy tray. 12. Insert the left part of the copy tray into the groove of the job separator. Fit the right hook into the hole located inside of MFP while pushing the copy tray to the back along the groove.

Hole

Groove Copy tray

Right hook

Figure 1-3-61

Attach the left front cover JS. 13. Pull out the connector of the job separator from the hole of the left front cover that has been removed by Procedure 4 and then attach the left front cover to its original position using the screw.

Left front cover

Connector

Screw

Figure 1-3-62

1-3-33

2DA/2DB 14. Connect the pulled out connector of the job separator to the LED PCB of the left front cover JS and then pass the wire through the two positions of the groove of the left front cover JS.
LED PCB Connector

Left front cover JS

Grooves

Figure 1-3-63 15. Fit the pawl of the left front cover JS into the hole of the left front cover to attach the left front cover JS. * In this time, take care that the routed wire in the groove does not come off. 16. Attach the inner cover that has been removed by Procedure 2 to its original position. 17. Close the front cover.

Holes

Left front cover JS

Figure 1-3-64

Operation check 1. Insert the power plug of the MFP into an outlet and then turn the power switch on. 2. Set the copy ejection location of the machine default settings to job separator. 3. Make a test copy to check that a copy is ejected to the job separator tray.

1-3-34

2DA/2DB

1-3-10 Installing the fax system (option)

<Procedure> Install the optional Memory module DIMM (32MB). 1.Remove the two connectors of the fax control PCB assembly. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the mounting plate and the ground wire.

Screws Fax control PCB assembly

Ground wire Mounting plate

Connectors

Figure 1-3-65

3. Insert the memory module DIMM at an angle into the memory slot so that the notch of the memory DIMM is positioned to the projection of the memory slot on the fax control PCB assembly. (1) 4. Push the free end of the module down toward the board. (2) 5. Attach the mounting plate and the ground wire that have been removed by Procedure 2 with the three screws to their original positions. 6. Connect the two connectors that have been removed by Procedure 1.

Projection Memory slot

Memory slot

Memory module DIMM Memory slot

Notch Memory module DIMM Fax control PCB assembly

Memory module DIMM

Figure 1-3-66

1-3-35

2DA/2DB Remove the shield cover. 7. Remove the six screws, lift the shield cover and then remove the cover.

Shield cover

Screws

Screws

Figure 1-3-67

Remove the modular cover. 8. Remove the screw and take off the modular cover.

Screw Modular cover

Figure 1-3-68 Attach the fax control PCB assembly. 9. Loosen the screw on the printer board. 10. While taking care that the mounting surface of the board does not contact the frame section of the rear cover, insert the U terminal of the ground wire of the fax control PCB assembly and secure it with the screw.
Screw Ground wire

Fax control PCB assembly

Frame section

Figure 1-3-69

1-3-36

2DA/2DB 11. Connect the YC1 connector on the fax control PCB assembly to the YC15 connector on the engine PCB. 12. Insert the fax control PCB assembly to the shield box so that the projection of the fax control PCB assembly is positioned to the slit of the shield box. 13. Secure the fax control PCB assembly using the three TP tap tight screws M3 6. Take care that the ground wire is not put on the frame section of the rear cover.
Connector Connector
YC1

YC15

TP tap tight screw M3 6

Slit Projection Shield box Fax control PCB assembly TP tap tight screws M3 6

Figure 1-3-70

Attach the NCU PCB assembly. 14. Connect the NCU wire connector on the NCU PCB assembly to the YC2 connector on the fax control PCB assembly.

Connector

NCU wire connector

YC2

NCU PCB assembly

Figure 1-3-71 15. Secure the NCU PCB assembly using the four TP tap tight screws M3 6, paying attention so that the tape section of the shield box does not contact with the PCB.

Tape section

TP tap tight screws M3 6 NCU PCB assembly

TP tap tight screws M3 6

Figure 1-3-72

1-3-37

2DA/2DB Attach the modular cover. 16. Attach the modular cover that has been removed by Procedure 8 with the screw to the position shown in the illustration.

Screw Modular cover

Figure 1-3-73 Install the shield cover. 17. Insert the lower part of the shield cover that has been removed by Procedure 7 into the shield box and then attach it with the six screws and TP tap tight screw M4 6 to its original position.
Screw Shield cover Lower part Screw Screw Shield box TP tap tight screw M4 6

Screws

Figure 1-3-74

Connect the telephone line to the line terminal. 18. Insert the modular connector cable to the line terminal to connect it to the telephone line. For 120 V specifications, use supplied modular cord B.

Line terminal Modular connector cable

Figure 1-3-75

1-3-38

2DA/2DB Attach the operation section sheet for fax. 19. Insert the small screw driver into the two points of the opening and remove the left cover of the operation section.

Opening Left cover of the operation section

Figure 1-3-76

20. Lift the two pawls and remove the operation section sheet cover.

Pawls

Operation section sheet cover

Figure 1-3-77

21. Remove the operation section sheet and replace it with the operation section sheet for fax of the corresponding language.

Operation section sheet for fax

Operation section sheet

Figure 1-3-78

1-3-39

2DA/2DB 22. Fit in the right-side two pawls of the operation section sheet cover that has been removed by Procedure 20 and then attach the operation section sheet cover to its original position.

Operation section sheet cover Pawl

Pawl

Figure 1-3-79 Attach the one-touch securing sheet. 23. Remove the release paper from the one-touch securing sheet. 24. Adhere the one-touch securing sheet on the base frame of the one-touch key so that it sticks fast to the surface while matching the top surface to the top left corner and firmly pressing the whole area down as shown in the illustration. 25. Push all the one-touch keys to check that the onetouch securing sheet does not block any one-touch key.
One-touch securing sheet

Figure 1-3-80 Attach the fax label (220-240 V specifications only). 26. Adhere the fax labels (1) to (4) of the fax label sheet of the corresponding language at the positions for the cover plate shown in the illustration.
Fax label sheet Cover plate

Figure 1-3-81

1-3-40

2DA/2DB Attach the cover plate. 27. Incurvate the cover plate a little and then insert the upper and lower projections to the fitting parts of the operation section to attach. 28. Check that the cover plate smoothly moves on either side.
Projection Cover plate

Projection

Figure 1-3-82

Attach the one-touch sheet. 29. Divide the one-touch sheet of the corresponding language into two parts and then mount them on the one-touch securing sheet each. Bring back the left cover of the operation section that has been removed by Procedure 19, operation section sheet that has been removed by Procedure 21, operation section sheet for fax that corresponds to the unused languages, and the one-touch sheet.

One-touch sheet

Figure 1-3-83

1-3-41

2DA/2DB Attach the alphabet labels. 30. Take the alphabet labels from the one-touch label sheet, and adhere them above the corresponding numeric keys on the operation panel after wiping the panel with alcohol. In Asia and Oceania, use the PQRS TUV WXYZ label, and do not use the PRS TUV WXZ and OPER labels.

Alphabet labels

Figure 1-3-84

Attach the certification label (120 V specifications only). 31. Adhere the FCC68 label onto the shield cover after wiping the cover with alcohol.
Shield cover

FCC68 label

10mm 10mm

Figure 1-3-85

Execute the maintenance mode. After installation is complete, the fax control PCB must be initialized by executing the maintenance mode U601/ U602. (See the service manual of the fax system.)

1-3-42

2DA/2DB

1-3-11 Installing the scan system (option)

<Procedure> Remove the covers. 1. Remove the six screws (a), lift the shield cover and then remove the cover. If the fax system is installed, remove the six screws (a) and screw (b), lift the shield cover and then remove the cover. 2. Remove the two screws, and take off the cover.

Shield cover Cover

Screws (a)

Screws

Screw (b)

Screws (a)

Figure 1-3-86 Install the scanner board. 3. Insert the scanner board into the OPT1 opening of the shield box and firmly push the CN5 connector on the scanner board all the way into the YC12 connector on the engine circuit board.

Connector Connector OPT1 opening Scanner board YC12 CN5

Figure 1-3-87

4. Fasten the scanner board onto the shield box cover using the two screws that have been removed by Procedure 2.

Scanner board

Screws

Figure 1-3-88

1-3-43

2DA/2DB Install the shield cover. 5. Insert the lower part of the shield cover that has been removed by Procedure 1 into the shield box and refit it to its original position using the six screws (a). If the fax system is installed, refit the shield cover using the six screws (a) and screw (b) to its original position.

Shield cover

Screw (a)

Screw (a) Screw (a) Screw (b) Lower part

Screws (a) Shield box

Figure 1-3-89

1-3-44

2DA/2DB

1-3-12 Installing the hard disk (option)

<Procedure> 1. Remove the two screws of the slot for OPT2 which is on the machine right back, and then remove the cover. 2. Insert the hard disk in the socket on the printer board PCB. 3. Refit the cover which is removed with step 1. 4. Turn the power switch on and initialize the hard disk at the printer menu. 5. Output the printer status report and confirm whether the hard disk is recognized.

Socket

Hard disk

Figure 1-3-90

1-3-45

2DA/2DB

1-4-1 Maintenance mode

The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine. (1) Executing a maintenance item

Start

Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.

Maintenance mode is entered.

Enter the maintenance item number using the up/down cursor keys or numeric keys.

The maintenance item is selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop/clear key.

Yes

Repeat the same maintenance item?

No

Yes

Run another maintenance item?

No Enter 001 using the up/down cursor keys or numeric keys and press the start key.

Maintenance mode is exited.

End

1-4-1

2DA/2DB-1 (2) Maintenance modes item list Section General Item Maintenance item contents No. U000 Outputting an own-status report U001 Exiting the maintenance mode U002 Setting the factory default data U003 Setting the service telephone number U004 Displaying the machine number U005 Copying without paper U019 Displaying the ROM version Initialization U020 Initializing all data U021 Initializing memories U022 Initializing backup memory U026 Evacuation of backup data U027 Return of backup data Drive, paper feed, paper conveying and cooling system U030 Checking motor operation U031 Checking switches for paper conveying U032 Checking clutch operation U034 Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration Adjusting the center line Adjusting the trailing edge margin U035 Setting folio size Length/Width Width U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed Initial setting* *************** 0.9/1.2/1.3/ 1.3/1.3/1.0 -1.0/0.4/-1.2 -1.2/-1.2/0.3 0.0 330 210 20/0/0/-20/-20/0 0.1/0/-0.5/0.1/ -0.1/-0.3/-0.3/ -1.3/-1.5 12 0 0/-10 7/0 -4/0 0 0/0 0/0/0/0 0/0/0 0 0/0/0/2/3

Optical

U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties U061 Turning the exposure lamp on U063 Adjusting the shading position U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP U070 Adjusting the DP magnification U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U072 Adjusting the DP center line U073 Checking scanner operation U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment U087 Turning the DP scanning position adjust mode on/off U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Text and photo/text/photo/text in fax mode/photo in fax mode U099 Checking the original size detection

* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020

1-4-2

2DA/2DB-1 Section High voltage Item Maintenance item contents No. U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage U101 Setting high voltages Developing bias Transfer voltage Separation voltage U110 Checking/clearing the drum count Developing U130 Initial setting for the developer U144 Setting toner loading operation U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time U158 Checking the developing count Fixing and cleaning U161 Setting the fixing control temperature Primary stabilization fixing temperature Secondary stabilization fixing temperature Copying operation temperature 1 Copying operation temperature 2 Number of sheets for fixing control Number of sheets for fixing control (thick paper) U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly U163 Resetting the fixing problem data U167 Checking/clearing fixing counts U199 Checking the fixing temperature Operation panel and support equipment U200 Turning all LEDs on U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system U203 Checking DP operation U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter U207 Checking the operation panel keys U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors and solenoids U244 Checking the DP switches U245 Checking messages U246 Setting the finisher U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices Mode setting U250 Setting the maintenance cycle U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count U252 Setting the destination U253 Switching between double and single counts U254 Turning auto start function on/off U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection U260 Changing the copy count timing U264 Setting the display order of the date Initial setting* 132/60/50/10 27/45/22/45 166/177/37/35 1/35/42 OFF 140 160 170 180 5 20 4/4/4 150000 Japan Double count On Single mode After ejection Inch specifications: MONTH-DATE-YEAR Metric specifications: DATE-MONTH-YEAR 30 ON On Off

U265 Setting OEM purchaser code U277 Setting auto application change time U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication U332 Setting the size conversion factor U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function U342 Setting the ejection restriction U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode * Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020

1-4-3

2DA/2DB-1 Section Mode setting Item Maintenance item contents No. U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode Initial setting* Inch specifications: ENERGY STAR Metric specifications: GEEA 3.0/3.0/4.0 2.0/3.0/2.0/2.0 2.0/3.0/2.0/2.0 0.0 10 0

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Image processing U402 Adjusting margins of image printing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Network scanner Others U504 Initializing the scanner NIC U506 Setting the time out U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts U905 Checking counts by optional devices U906 Resetting partial operation control U908 Changing the total counter value U910 Clearing the black ratio data U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes U917 Setting backup data reading/writing U920 Checking the accounting counts U925 Checking/clearing the system error counts U926 Rewriting FAX program U927 Clearing the all accounting counts and machine life counts U928 Checking machine life counts U941 Setting the default magnification ratio of the default drawer U942 Adjusting the DP amount of slack in the original U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light U991 Checking the scanner count U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern

* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020

1-4-4

2DA/2DB (3) Contents of maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. U000 Outputting an own-status report Description

Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences. Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences. Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be output using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display MAINTENANCE JAM SERVICE CALL Output list List of the current settings of the maintenance modes List of the paper jam occurrences List of the service call occurrences

3. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output. When A4/11" 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location. When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode. Purpose To exit the maintenance mode. Method Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered. U002 Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings. Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed). Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport. Completion The power switch turns off.

1-4-5

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U003 Setting the service telephone number Description

Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected. Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine. Method Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed. Setting 1. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits) using the numeric keys. Move the cursor using the left/right cursor keys and select a number or symbol using the up/down cursor keys. To enter symbols, press the keys shown below as required. Key key # key Image mode selection key Aoto mode selection key Lighter key Darker key Symbol # ( ) Space

2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U004 Displaying the machine number Description Displays the machine number. Purpose To check the machine number. Method Press the start key. The currently machine number is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-6

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U005 Copying without paper Description

Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed. Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display PPC PPC + DP Operation Only the MFP operates. Both the MFP and DP operate (continuous operation).

3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed. 4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be made. Paper feed locations Magnifications Simplex or duplex copy mode Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999; in duplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting. Copy density Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key 5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper present, the paper feed pulley does not operate. 6. Press the start key. The operation starts. Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed. 7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-7

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U019 Displaying the ROM version Description

Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB. Purpose To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number. Method 1. Press the start key. The part number indicating the ROM version are displayed. 2. Change the screen using the up/down cursor keys. Display MAIN ENGINE LANG(St) LANG(Op) MAIN BOOT PRINTER NWS DP FINISHER CASS2 CASS3 CASS4 Description Main ROM IC Engine ROM IC Standard language ROM IC Optional language ROM IC Boot of main ROM IC Printer board ROM IC Network scanner*1 ROM IC DP*1 ROM IC Finisher*1 ROM IC First paper feeder*2 ROM IC Second paper feeder*1 ROM IC Third paper feeder*1 ROM IC

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U020 Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings. Purpose Run as needed. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for Japan specifications are set. When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on. Completion To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U021 Initializing memories Description Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e., settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM according to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252. Purpose Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting. Completion To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-8

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U022 Initializing backup memory Description

Description Initializes only the data set for the optical section or initializes various setting data when installing the optional network scanner board. Purpose To be executed after replacing the scanner unit or installing the network scanner board. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 067, U092 to 099, U403, U990 and U991) is initialized. The setting data of scanner function initial settings are initialized, and the registered transmission and reception are cleared. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U026 Evacuation of backup data Description Transfers the backup data of the main PCB to the EEPROM. Purpose Used when replacing the main PCB. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key to transfer the backup data. The screen displays the result. EXECUTE CHECK SUM: CODE : XXXX (See the table below) Code 0000 0101 0102 Description Processing ends correctly. Verification abnormality occurs. Verification abnormality occurs at the time of check sum entry.

4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-9

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U027 Return of backup data Description

Description Transfers the backup data of the EEPROM which was transferred with the U026 to flash memory. Purpose To use after the main PCB replaced. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key to transfer the backup data. The screen displays the result. EXECUTE CHECK SUM: CODE : XXXX (See the table below) Code 0000 0203 Description Processing ends correctly. Check sum does not agree when reading out from the EEPROM.

4. Disconnect and connect the power plug. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor. Purpose To check the operation of each motor. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the motor to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display MAIN RES T1 T2 T3 EJE1 EJE2 Operation Drive motor (DM) operates Registration motor (RM) operates Drawer drive motor 1*2 (DDM1) operates Drawer drive motor 2*1 (DDM2) operates Drawer drive motor 3*1 (DDM3) operates Eject motor rotates forward Eject motor rotates in reverse

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. 4. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-10

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U031 Checking switches for paper conveying Description

Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path. Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed. 2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status. When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse. Display EJE RES PF2 PF3 BRA DUP JOB Switches Eject switch (ESW) Registration switch (RSW) Drawer feed switch 1*2 (DFSW1) Drawer feed switch 2*1 (DFSW2) Feedshift switch (FSSW) Duplex paper conveying switch*1 (DUPPCSW) Job separator eject switch*1 (JBESW)

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch on. Purpose To check the operation of each clutch. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the clutch to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The clutch turns on for 1 s. Display PF1 PFBYP FEED1 FEED2 FEED3 Clutches Paper feed clutch (PFCL) Bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) Drawer paper feed clutch 1*2 (DPFCL1) Drawer paper feed clutch 2*1 (DPFCL2) Drawer paper feed clutch 3*1 (DPFCL3)

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-11

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance item No. U034 Adjusting the print start timing Adjustment See pages 1-6-16 and 18. U035 Setting folio size Description Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper. Purpose To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting the actual size of the folio paper used. Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display LENGTH DATA WIDTH DATA Setting Length Width Setting range 330 to 356 mm 200 to 220 mm Initial setting 330 210 Description

3. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Adjustment See page 1-6-21. U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors. Purpose Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct. Also speed adjustment for each paper source. Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display MAIN POLY EJE RES BYP CAS DUP EJE2 EJE3 Description Drive motor speed adjustment Polygon motor speed adjustment Eject motor speed adjustment Registration motor speed adjustment Motor speed adjustment (for paper feed from bypass tray) Drawer paper feed motor speed adjustment (for paper feed from paper feeder) Duplex paper feed motor speed adjustment (in duplex mode) Optional ejection correction value of eject motor (In the case of paper width more than 220 mm) Optional ejection correction value of eject motor (In the case of paper width less than or equal to 220 mm) Setting range 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 5.0 to +5.0 Initial setting 0.1 0 0.5 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.3 1.3 1.5

1-4-12

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U053 Description MAIN MOTOR Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction. POLYGON MOTOR Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and longer in the auxiliary scanning direction. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Press the start key. A VTC pattern is output. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Correct values for an A3/11" 17" output are: A = 300 1.5 mm B = 270 1.35 mm

Figure 1-4-1 Adjustment 1. Output an A3/11" 17" VTC pattern in interrupt copy mode. 2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are different from the correct sizes: A: Drive motor speed adjustment B: Polygon motor speed adjustment Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-13

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties Description

Description Adjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode. Purpose Used when the entire image appears too dark or light. Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Descrition Image scannnig density Setting range 1 to +23 Initial setting 12

Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U061 Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on. Purpose To check the exposure lamp. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights. 3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-14

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance item No. U063 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position. Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Description Shading position Setting range 8 to +8 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0.17 mm Description

Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine left. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Adjustment See pages 1-6-33 and 34. U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjustment See page 1-6-35. U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjustment See page 1-6-36. U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Purpose Used when there is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Description Scanning position Setting range 17 to +17 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0.17 mm

Increasing the setting moves the image backward, and decreasing it moves the image forward. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-15

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed. Purpose To be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
U053 U065 U070

Description

Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display CONVEY SPEED1 CONVEY SPEED2 Description Original conveying motor speed (simplex original) Original conveying motor speed (duplex original) Change in Setting range Initial setting value per step 25 to +25 25 to +25 0 0 0.1% 0.1%

Increasing the setting makes the image longer, and decreasing it makes the image shorter. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-16

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose To be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
U034 U066 U071

Description

Method Press the start key. The screen for setting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display LEAD1 TRAIL1 LEAD2 TRAIL2 Description DP leading edge registration (simplex original) DP trailing edge registration (simplex original) DP leading edge registration (duplex original) DP trailing edge registration (duplex original) Change in Setting range Initial setting value per step 32 to +22 22 to +32 32 to +22 22 to +32 0 0 0 0 0.2 mm 0.2 mm 0.2mm 0.2mm

Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward, and decreasing it moves the copy image forward. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Adjustment 1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DP. 2. Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows. For copy example 1, decrease the setting of LEAD1 or LEAD2. For copy example 2, increase the setting of LEAD1 or LEAD2.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-4-2 Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-17

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U072 Adjusting the DP center line Description

Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original. Purpose To be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
U034 U067 U072

Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display 1 sided 2 sided front 2 sided back Description Simplex copy mode Front face in duplex copy mode Reverse face in duplex copy mode Setting range 39 to +39 39 to +39 39 to +39 Change in Initial setting value per step 0 0 0 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm

Increasing the setting moves the image to the right, and decreasing it moves the image to the left. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Adjustment 1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DP. 2. Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows. For copy example 1, increase the setting. For copy example 2, decrease the setting.
Reference

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-4-3 Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-18

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U073 Checking scanner operation Description

Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions. Purpose To check scanner operation. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be changed using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 3. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display ZOOM SIZE LAMP Setting 8 9 24 36 39 40 41 Operating conditions Magnification Original size On and off of the exposure lamp Paper size A4 B5 11" 81/2" A3 B4 A4R B5R Setting 42 47 52 53 55 56 58 Setting range 100 to 400% See below. 0 (off) or 1 (on) Paper size A5R Folio 11" 17" 11" 15" 81/2" 14" 81/2" 11" 51/2" 81/2"

Original sizes for each setting in SIZE

4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions. 5. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP. Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the DP. Method Press the start key. Setting 1. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Description DP input light luminosity Setting range 0 to 8 Initial setting 0

Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-19

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment Description

Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section. Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U070, U071 and U072 will also be updated. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section. Method 1. Set a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) in the DP. 2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is displayed. Display CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ DP CENTER Description DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction DP leading edge registration DP original center line

If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. Completion Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.

1-4-20

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U087 Turning the DP scanning position adjust mode on/off Description Turns on or off the DP scanning position adjust mode, in which the DP original scanning position is adjusted automatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the reference data for identifying dust. Reference In the DP original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals. Purpose Used to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slit glass when the DP is used. Setting 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ON OFF Initial setting: ON Available only when the mode is turned on. 3. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Description Minimum density to be regarded as dust Setting range 10 to 95 Initial setting 35 Description DP scanning position adjust mode on DP scanning position adjust mode off

Example The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data of the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scan data taken when there is no original). 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

1-4-21

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Description

Description Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output using the up/down cursor keys. Display GRAYSCALE PG pattern to be output Purpose To check the laser scanner unit engine output characteristics.

MONO-LEVEL

To check the drum quality.

256-LEVEL

To check resolution reproducibility in printing.

1 DOT-LEVEL

To check fine line reproducibility. To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit (lateral squareness)

3. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL and 1dot-LEVEL, use the left/right cursor keys to change the preset values and press the start key to register the setting. Display Output density of MONO-LEVEL 1dot-LEVEL Setting range 0 or 35 0 to 21 Initial setting 0 0

4. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed. 5. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-22

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description

Description Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original. Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065) When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed. Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner. Method 1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A068020) on the contact glass. 2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is displayed. Display SCN CENTER SCN TIMING SUB SCAN MAIN SCAN Description Scanner center line Scanner leading registration Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction

If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. Completion Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.

1-4-23

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Description

Description Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text, text and photo, photo, text in fax mode, photo in fax mode). Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used to make copy image darker or lighter. Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the image mode to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys and press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed. Display MIXED TEXT PHOTO FAX TEXT FAX PHOTO Description Density in text and photo mode Density in text mode Density in photo mode Density in the text in fax mode Density in the photo in fax mode

Setting: Density in text and photo mode 1. Select the item to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Adjust the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display MIXED DARKER MIXED LIGHTER Description Change in density when manual density is set dark Change in density when manual density is set light Setting range 0 to 3 0 to 3 Initial setting 0 0

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density Dark Set to LIGHTER Setting: 3 Setting: 0

Set to DARKER Light Light Center Dark Density adjustment

Figure 1-4-4 Exposure density gradient 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Setting: Density in text mode 1. Select the item to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Adjust the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display TEXT DARKER TEXT LIGHTER Description Change in density when manual density is set dark Change in density when manual density is set light Setting range 0 to 3 0 to 3 Initial setting 0 0

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.

1-4-24

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U093 Setting: Density in photo mode 1. Select the item to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Adjust the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display PHOTO DARKER PHOTO LIGHTER Description Change in density when manual density is set dark Change in density when manual density is set light Setting range 0 to 3 0 to 3 Initial setting 0 0

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Setting: Density in the text in fax mode 1. Select the item to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Adjust the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display FAX TEXT DARKER FAX TEXT LIGHTER Description Change in density when manual density is set dark Change in density when manual density is set light Setting range 0 to 4 0 to 9 Initial setting 2 2

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Setting: Density in the photo in fax mode 1. Select the item to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Adjust the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display FAX PHOTO DARKER FAX PHOTO LIGHT. Description Change in density when manual density is set dark Change in density when manual density is set light Setting range 0 to 6 0 to 6 Initial setting 3 3

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-25

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U099 Checking the original size detection Description

Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value. Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like. Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select an item using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed. Display DATA B/W LEVEL Description Displaying detection sensor transmission data Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time

Method to display the data for the sensor 1. Press the start key. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed. Rear of machine Center of machine Front of machine

: 123 123 123 : 123 123 123 : 255 255 255

Figure 1-4-5 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Setting 1. Select an item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. Display LEVEL WAIT TIME A4R AREA ORG AREA SIZE Description Detection sensor threshold value Original size judgment time* Threshold value in the main scan direction for A4R detection Original size detection position display (mm) Detected original size display Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 100 220 (mm)/ 240 (mm) 0 to 350 0 to 63 Initial setting 170 30 240

* Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment Method to set the detection threshold value 1. Adjust the preset value using the left/right cursor keys. A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity, and a smaller value decreases it. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Method to set the original size judgment time 1. Adjust the preset value using the left/right cursor keys. A larger value increases the original size judgment time, and a smaller value decreases it. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. 3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-26

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance item No. U100 Setting the main high voltage Description

Description Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging. Also changes the setting of main charging copy quantity correction. Purpose To set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when reentering data after initializing the set data. Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item using the up/down cursor keys. Display MC DATA MC ON LASER ON/OFF INTERVAL COPY CNT MC ADJUST Description Changing the grid control voltage Turning the main charger on Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off Main charging copy quantity correction, copy interval Main charging copy quantity correction, copy quantity Main charging copy quantity correction, correction amount

Method for main charger output 1. Press the start key. The selected operation starts. 2. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key. Setting the grid control voltage 1. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Description Grid control voltage Setting range 0 to 255 Initial setting 132

Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the main charging copy quantity correction 1. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display INTERVAL COPY CNT MC ADJUST Setting Copy interval Copy quantity Correction amount Setting range 1 to 255 (minute) 1 to 255 (10 sheets) 0 to 50 (bit) Initial setting 60 50 10

Copy interval: Sets the time interval from the previous copying. If the time from the previous copying exceeds this preset value, the copy quantity counter will be reset. Copy quantity: Sets the copy quantity from which copy quantity correction starts. When the copy quantity counter reaches this preset value, correction will start. Correction amount: Sets the correction amount for copy quantity correction. Set the values in the range from 5 to 120 minutes for copy interval, from 10 to 2,000 sheets for copy quantity, and from 5 to 50 bits for correction amount. 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

1-4-27

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance item No. U101 Setting the other high voltages Description

Description Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer/separation voltage. Purpose To check the developing bias and the transfer/separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed. Display DEV TC SC Description Setting the developing bias Setting the transfer voltage Setting the separation voltage

Setting the developing bias 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display BIAS C DUTY C BIAS P DUTY P Description Developing bias clock frequency (copier mode) Developing bias clock duty (copier mode) Developing bias clock frequency (printer mode) Developing bias clock duty (printer mode) Setting range 2 to 255 1 to 99 2 to 255 1 to 99 Initial setting 27 45 22 45

Increasing the BIAS C/P setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker. Increasing the DUTY C/P setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the transfer voltage 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display TC DATA1 TC DATA2 OFF TIMING ON TIMING Description Transfer control voltage (large size) Transfer control voltage (small size) Transfer charging output OFF timing Transfer charging output ON timing Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 166 177 37 35

3. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting the separation voltage 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display SC SEL SC ON TIMING SC OFF TIMING Description Separation control voltage Separation charging output ON timing Separation charging output OFF timing Setting range 0 to 2 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 1 35 42

3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-28

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance item No. U110 Checking/clearing the drum count Description

Description Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing the figure. Purpose To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the durm during regular maintenance. Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing. A drum count value less than 150K, however, cannot be cleared. Method 1. Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed. 2. Select the CLEAR using the up/down cursor keys. If the counter value is 150K or less, CLEAR is not displayed. 3. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U130 Initial setting for the developer Description Replenishes toner to the developer unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed. Purpose To operate when installing the machine. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. Installation of toner starts and time (minutes) is indicated until the installation ends. 4. When the installation is complete, FINISHED will be displayed if the installation is successful or NG will be displayed if it has failed. If NG is displayed, check to see if the toner container contains toner and to see if the toner container sensor malfunctions and then try again. Completion Press the stop/clear key after operation is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U144 Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying. Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select either ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ON OFF Initial setting: OFF 2. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Description Toner loaded Toner not loaded

1-4-29

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure. Purpose To check the developing drive time. Also used to clear the count after replacing the developing unit. Method Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes. Clearing 1. Select the CLEAR using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Setting 1. Enter a seven-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U158 Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking a figure. Purpose To check the developing count. Method Press the start key. The developing count is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U161 Setting the fixing control temperature Description Changes the fixing control temperature. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a fixing problem on thick paper. Setting 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The screen for executing each item is displayed. 3. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display 1ST TEMP 2ND TEMP COPY TEMP1 COPY TEMP2 COPY CNT THICK CNT Description Primary stabilization fixing temperature Secondary stabilization fixing temperature Copying operation temperature 1 Copying operation temperature 2 Number of sheets for fixing control Number of sheets for fixing control (thick paper) Setting range 120 to 185 (C) 120 to 185 (C) 160 to 220 (C) 160 to 220 (C) 1 to 99 1 to 99 Initial setting 140 160 170 180 5 20

Copying operation temperature 1: Temperature in copying operation at the start of copying Copying operation temperature 2: Temperature in copying operation after the specified number of sheets for fixing control have passed Number of sheets for fixing control: The number of sheets to be counted for switching from copying operation temperature 1 to copying operation temperature 2 The temperatures are to be set such that Secondary stabilization > = Primary stabilization. 4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-30

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly Description

Description Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature. Purpose To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless of fixing temperature. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on. Completion To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key.The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U163 Resetting the fixing problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section. Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U167 Checking/clearing fixing counts Description Displays or clears fixing counts. Purpose To check fixing counts. Also used to clear the count after replacing the fixing unit. Method Press the start key. The fixing counts are displayed. Clearing 1. Select the CLEAR using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U199 Checking the fixing temperature Description Displays the fixing temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity. Purpose To check the fixing temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity. Method Press the start key. The fixing temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade (C) and the absolute humidity is displayed in percentage (%). Display FIX TEMP SURROUND TEMP HUMIDITY Description Fixing temperature (C) Ambient temperature (C) Absolute humidity (%)

Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-31

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on. Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light. Method Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light. Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting is necessary. U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP. Purpose To check the DP. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. 3. Select the item to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ADP RADP ADP (NON-P) RADP (NON-P) Operation With paper, single-sided original With paper, double-sided original Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation) Description

4. Press the start key. The operation starts. 5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-32

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed. Setting 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed 2. Select the optional counter to be installed using the up/down cursor keys. The selected counter is displayed in reverse. Display OFF KEY-CARD KEY-COUNTER Description None The key card is installed The key counter is installed

3. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U207 Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys. Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. COUNT1 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights. 3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in that line will light. 4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds. 5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-33

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors and solenoids Description Turns the motors or solenoids in the optional DP on. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display F MOT C MOT RJ SL RP SL Motors, solenoids and clutch Original feed motor (OFM) Original paper conveying motor (OCM) Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) Operation In operation In operation In operation On for 0.5 s On for 0.5 s

3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional DP. Purpose To check if respective switches in the optional DP operate correctly. Start 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse. Display SET SW TMG SW MAT SW COV SW REV SW SZ A SW Switches Original set switch (OSSW) DP timing switch (DPTSW) DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) DP original cover switch (DPOCSW) Original switchback switch (OSBSW) Original size length switch (OSLSW)

Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-34

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U245 Checking messages Description

Description Displays a list of messages or graphics on the operation panel. Purpose To check the messages or graphics to be displayed. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item to be displayed using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed. Display Check display messages Check display graphics Description Check the messages Check the graphics

Method to display the messages 1. Change the screen using the up/down cursor keys to display each message one at a time. You can select the language using the left/right cursor keys. 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Method to display the graphics 1. Change the screen using the up/down cursor keys to display each graphic one at a time. You can select the background (black or white) using the left/right cursor keys. 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U246 Setting the finisher Description Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position in the staple sort mode. Purpose To adjust when registration is not proper or staple position is shifted in the staple sort mode. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the desired cursor position using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 3. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display FRONT REAR END Description Front side registration cursor stop position Rear side registration cursor stop position Trailing edge registration cursor stop position Setting range 0 to +8 0 to +8 0 to +8 Initial setting 4 4 4

4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-35

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices Description Ejects paper to an optional job separator. Purpose To check paper conveying operation to optional job separator. Method 1. While pressing the feedshift switch by your hand, press the start key. Paper transfer operation starts. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U250 Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle. Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle. Method Press the start key. The current setting is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys. To clear, press the reset key. Description Maintenance cycle Setting range 0 to 9999999 Initial setting 150000

2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-36

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count Description

Description Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count. Purpose To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service. Method Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed. Clearing 1. Select the CLEAR using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Setting 1. Select the COUNT using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric keys. 3. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination. Purpose To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select the destination using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display JAPAN METRIC INCH EUROPE METRIC ASIA PACIFIC Description Metric (Japan) specifications Inch (North America) specifications Metric (Europe) specifications Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications

2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power is turned on. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination. Initial setting according to the destinations Maintenance item No. 253 Title Switching between double and single counts Japan Inch Single Europe Metric, Asia Pacific

Double Double

1-4-37

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U253 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters. Purpose According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11" 17" paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count). Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select double or single count using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display SINGLE COUNT DOUBLE COUNT (A3/LEDGER) DOUBLE COUNT (B4) Description Single count for all size paper Double count for A3/11" 17" paper only Double count for B4 size or larger

Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U254 Turning auto start function on/off Description Selects if the auto start function is turned on. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve the problem. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select either ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ON OFF Description Auto start function on Auto start function off

Initial setting: ON 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-38

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Description Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that can be made after the detection. Purpose To be set according to user request. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select single or continuous copying using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display SINGLE CONTINUE Description Enables only single copying. Enables single and continuous copying.

Initial setting: SINGLE 3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U260 Changing the copy count timing Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters. Purpose To be set according to user (copy service provider) request. If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying. To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier. If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, the copy timing should be made later. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select the copy count timing using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display FEED EJECT Description When secondary paper feed starts When the paper is ejected

Initial setting: EJECT 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-39

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U264 Setting the display order of the date Description

Description Selects year, month and day as the order of that appears on lists, etc. Purpose Set according to the user preference. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the desired order using the up/down cursor keys. Display YEAR-MONTH-DATE MONTH-DATE-YEAR DATE-MONTH-YEAR Setting Year/Month/Day Month/Day/Year Day/Month/Year

Initial setting: "MONTH-DATE-YEAR" (for the inch specifications) "DATE-MONTH-YEAR" (for the metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code. Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PCB and the like. Method Press the start key. Setting 1. Use the numeric keys or left/right cursor keys to adjust the preset value. 2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. U277 Setting auto application change time Description Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operation when the machine is used as a printer or fax. Purpose According to user request, changes the setting. Method Press the start key. The current setting is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Description Switching time Setting range 30 to 270 (s) Initial setting 30

The setting can be changed by 30 s per step. 2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-40

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description

Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the optional DP. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. Display ON OFF Description Displays the cleaning guidance Not to display the cleaning guidance

Initial setting: ON 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" 81/2" size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/11" 81/2" size and to display the result in user simulation. Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" 81/2" size for copy mode, printer mode and fax mode respectively. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select copier mode (COPY), printer mode (PRT) or fax mode (FAX) using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Display COPY PRINTER FAX Description Size parameter for copier mode Size parameter for printer mode Size parameter for fax mode Setting range 0.1 to 3.0 0.1 to 3.0 0.1 to 3.0 Initial setting 1.0 1.0 1.0

3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.

1-4-41

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output. Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the paper feed location for the printer using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 Description Drawer First paper feeder*2 Second paper feeder*1 Third paper feeder*1

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. 3. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. 0: OFF 1: ON 4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. U342 Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously. When the restriction is set, the number of sheets that can be ejected continuously to the internal eject tray will be limited to 250. Purpose According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select either ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ON OFF Description Sets restriction on the number of sheets Cancels restriction on the number of sheets

Initial setting: ON 2. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectiong a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-42

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance Description item No. U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy. Purpose To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ON OFF Description Duplex copy Simplex copy

Initial setting: OFF 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode Description Changes the control for preheat/energy saver mode. Purpose According to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select control mode using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display ENERGY STAR GEEA Control in preheat mode The fixing control temperature is lowered by 20C/68F and forced stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat. The fixing control temperature is lowered by 15C/59F and forced stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.

Initial setting: ENERGY STAR (for the inch specifications) GEEA (for the metric specifications) 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends. When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value, the message is displayed. This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification. U402 Adjusting margins of image printing Adjustment See page 1-6-20. U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Adjustment See page 1-6-37.

1-4-43

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance Description item No. U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP. Purpose Used if margins are not correct when the optional DP is used. Caution Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
U402
U403
U404

Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display A MARGIN B MARGIN C MARGIN D MARGIN Description Left margin Leading edge margin Right margin Trailing edge margin Setting range 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.0 Initial setting 2.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 Change in value per step 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm

Increasing the setting makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
DP leading edge margin (3 1.5 mm) Ejection direction (reference)

DP left margin (2 1.0 mm)

DP right margin (2 1.0 mm)

DP trailing edge margin (2 1.0 mm)

Figure 1-4-6 Correct margin amount 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Adjustment See page 1-6-17.

1-4-44

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U504 Initializing the scanner NIC Description

Description Initializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default. Purpose To return to a setup at the time of factory shipments. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U506 Setting the time out Description Sets the communication timeout time for connection to a computer. Purpose To change the preset value if a communication error occurs after connection to a computer continues for a long time. By delaying the error detection timing, the error may be cleared. If the error is not cleared after the preset value is changed, however, return the preset value to the initial value. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select ON or OFF using the left/right cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Description timeout time Setting range 10 to 120 (s) Initial setting 10

The setting can be changed by 10 s per step. 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-45

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts. Method 1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. 2. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. Display BYP PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 DUP Paper feed locations Bypass tray Drawer First paper feeder*2 Second paper feeder*1 Third paper feeder*1 Duplex section*1

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. Clearing 1. Select the count to be cleared using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. However, PF2, 3, and 4 are displayed only and cannot be cleared. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed. U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations. Purpose To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts. Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The code by type is displayed. Display COUNT TOTAL COUNT Description Displays/clears the jam counts Displays the total jam counts

Method: Displays/clears the jam counts 1. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. 2. Select the counts for all jam codes and select the ALL. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually. 3. Press the start key. The counts are cleared. Method: Displays the total jam counts 1. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. The total number of jam count cannot be cleared. 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.

1-4-46

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts Description

Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types. Purpose To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. Start 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the item using the up/down cursor keys. 3. Press the start key. The code by type is displayed. Display COUNT TOTAL COUNT Description Displays/clears the service call code counts Displays the total service call code counts

Method: Displays/clears the service call code counts 1. Select the code to be cleared using the up/down cursor keys. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. Select the counts for all service call codes and select the ALL. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Method: Displays the total service call code counts 1. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. The total number of service call code count cannot be cleared. 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed. U905 Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of the optional DP or finisher. Purpose To check the use of the DP and finisher. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the device using the up/down cursor keys, the count of which is to be checked and press the start key. The count of the selected device is displayed. DP Display ADP RADP Finisher Display CP CNT STAPLE BUNDLE EJECT Description No. of copies that has passed Frequency the stapler has been activated Frequency the bundle discharge has been activated Description No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP in ADP mode No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP in RADP mode

Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-47

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U906 Resetting partial operation control Description

Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control. Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and the related parts are serviced. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine returns to the same status as when the power switch is turned on. U908 Changing the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value. Purpose To check the total counter value. Method Press the start key. The current total counter value is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U910 Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets. Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes. Purpose To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts. Method Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed. Clearing 1. Select the paper size to be cleared using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. To clear all counts, select the ALL. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.

1-4-48

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U917 Setting backup data reading/writing Description

Description Stores backup data from the fax control PCB (when an optional fax kit is installed) into Compact Flash or reads the data from Compact Flash. Purpose To store and write data when replacing the PCB. Setting 1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine. 4. While pressing the Copier key, turn on the power switch and connect the power plug. Press and hold on the Copier key until the message Please wait. disappears. 5. Enter the maintenance item. 6. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 7. Select the item using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display SRAMCF:BKUP CFSRAM:BKUP SRAMCF:DIAL CFSRAM:DIAL Description Writing the backup data of fax control PCB Reading the backup data of fax control PCB Writing the backup data of fax dial information Reading the backup data of fax dial information

8. Press the start key. Reading or writing is executed, and the screen displays the result. If the operation was successful: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM CODE 0000 If the operation failed: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure. See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 below. 9. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 10. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.

Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 Code 0102 0104 0105 01FF 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0212 Communication error. Detects call for service on main PCB. CF error. No CF card. No data in CF card. CF data is incompatible. Bad CF data (Checksum error) CF read error. CF write error. Fax control PCB flash memory error. Meaning Detects call for service on fax control PCB.

1-4-49

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U920 Checking the accounting counts Description Checks the accounting counts. Purpose To check the accounting counts. Method Press the start key. The current counts of copy counter, printer counter and fax counter are displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U925 Checking/clearing the system error counts Description Displays and clears the count value of system error. Purpose To check the system error status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. Method Press the start key. The count for system error detection by type is displayed. Clearing 1. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. 2. Select the counts for system error and select the ALL. System error counts cannot be cleared individually. 3. Press the start key. The counts are cleared. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed. U926 Rewriting FAX program Description Downloads the fax program and fax fonts when installing an optional fax kit. Purpose To run when upgrading the fax program and fax fonts. Setting 1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine. 4. While pressing the Copier key, turn on the power switch and connect the power plug. Press and hold on the Copier key until the message Please wait. disappears. 5. Enter the maintenance item. 6. Press the start key. Downloading of the fax program starts and the result shown below is displayed. If the operation was successful: EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE 0000 If the operation failed: EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure. 7. Then, downloading of the fax fonts starts and the result shown below is displayed. Description

1-4-50

2DA/2DB-1 Maintenance item No. U926 Description If the operation was successful: EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE 0000 If the operation failed: EXECUTE 0100 CHECKSUM CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure. See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on page 1-4-49. 8. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 9. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine. U927 Clearing the all accounting counts and machine life counts Description Clears the all accounting counts and machine life counts. Purpose To start the counters with value 0 when installing the machine. Supplement The all accounting counts and the machine life counter can be cleared only once only if the count values are 1000 or less. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse. 3. Press the start key. All accounting counts and machine life counts are cleared. If the counts cannot be cleared, CANNOT EXECUTE is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts. Purpose To check the machine life counts. Method Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U941 Setting the default magnification ratio of the default drawer Description Sets the default magnification ratio when paper selection of copy default setting is set to the default drawer. Purpose Accounting to user request, changes the setting. Method Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. Setting 1. Select 100% or AMS using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Display 100% AMS Description 100 % magnification ratio Automatical magnification ratio

Initial setting: 100 % magnification ratio 2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-51

2DA/2DB Maintenance Description item No. U942 Adjusting the DP amount of slack in the original Description Adjusts the DP amount of slack in the original. Purpose To run this mode if original jams or Z folds occur when copying from the DP. Method Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed. Setting 1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse. 2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys. Display CONVEY FEED Description Setting range -10 to +20 -10 to +20 Initial setting 0 0

Increasing the setting, the larger the amount of slack; decreasing the setting, the smaller the amount of slack. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Interrupt copy mode While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode. 1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode. 2. Set the original and press the strat key. To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light. Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replacement. Method Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes. Clearing 1. Select the CLEAR using the up/down cursor keys. 2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Setting 1. Enter a seven-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Completion To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-52

2DA/2DB Maintenance item No. U991 Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count. Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner. Method Press the start key. The screen for the scanner operation count is desplayed. Display COPY FAX NWS Description Scanner operation count for copying Scanner operation count for fax Network scanner operation count Description

Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed. 2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the up/down cursor keys.
Display PG1 PG pattern to be output Purpose Center line adjustment

PG2

Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment

PG3

3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed. 4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output. Completion Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-4-53

2DA/2DB-1

1-4-2 Management mode

In addition to a maintenance function for service, the machine is equipped with a management function which can be operated by users (mainly by the machine administrator). In this management mode, settings such as default settings can be changed. (1) Using the management mode

Start

Press the system menu/counter key. Select [Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. Enter the management code. Select [Copy default] and then press the enter key. Enter the management code. Select [Machine default] and then press the enter key. Enter the management code. Select [Bypass setting] and then press the enter key. Make bypass settings (page 1-4-60). Select [Counter check] and then press the enter key. Check the counter (page 1-4-60). Select [Print report] and then press the enter key. Output the report (page 1-4-60). Select the [End] and press the enter key. Make machine default settings (page 1-4-58). Make copy default settings (page 1-4-56). Execute job accounting items (page 1-4-55).

Select [Language] and then press the enter key.

Set the language (page 1-4-60).

End

1-4-54

2DA/2DB-1 (2) Setting the job accounting Registering a new account Registers ID-codes and the limit of use for each account. 1. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [New registration] and then press the enter key. 3. Enter the ID-code (up to 8 digits) using the numeric keys. 4. Press the enter key. 5. Set the lmit of use. 6. Select [End] and then press the enter key. Deleting an account 1. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Delete] and then press the enter key. 3. Select the ID-code to delete and then press the enter key. 4. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter key. Changing limit of use 1. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Change limit in use] and then press the enter key. 3. Select the ID-code to change and then press the enter key. 4. Change the limit of use. 5. Select [End] and then press the enter key. All account management You can browse the total output count, output the job accounting report, and clear the counter for all accounts. 1. Select [Job Accounting Total] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Print report] and then press the enter key. The management report is printed out. 3. Select [Counter clear] and then press the enter key. 4. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter key. Individual account management Checks the output count and/or clears the counter for individual accounts. 1. Select [Each Job Accouning TL] and then press the enter key. The output counts of individual accounts are displayed. 2. Select the ID-code to clear and then press the enter key. 3. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter key. Job accounting ON/OFF 1. Select [Job Accounting On/Off] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Copier job accounting ON/OFF 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Set.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Copy Job Account.] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Printer job accounting ON/OFF 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Set.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Prnt Job Account.] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Scanner job accounting ON/OFF Note: This setting is only available when the optional network scanner board is installed in the machine. 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Set.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Scanner Job Accnt] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Fax job accounting ON/OFF Note: This setting is only available when the optional fax kit is installed in the machine. 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Set.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Fax Job Accountng] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Operation against excess over limit Determines whether to stop output by prohibiting immediately use of the machine, to stop the operation from the next job or to display a warning message onle, when the limit of count that has been set with the function of the limit of use is exceeded. 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Set.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Excess limit Set.] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [Stop job immediately], [Stop after job done] or [Only warning]and then press the enter key.

1-4-55

2DA/2DB-1 (3) Copy default Exposure mode Selects the exposure mode at power-on. 1. Select [Exposure Mode] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Manual] or [Auto] and then press the enter key. Original quality Selects the image quality at power-on. 1. Select [Orig Quality] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Text+Photo], [Photo] or [Text] and then press the enter key. Eco print mode ON/OFF Determines whether or not the eco print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. 1. Select [EcoPrint] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Background color adjustment Adjust the ground color of the copied paper. 1. Select [Background adjst] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 5 Paper selection Sets whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set, or whether the designated default drawer will be automatically selected. 1. Select [Paper Select] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Auto] or [Default cassette] and then press the enter key. Paper type (Auto paper selection mode) Selects the types of paper that will be available for selection under the APS (Auto Paper Selection) mode. 1. Select [Paper type(Auto)] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 3. If selected [On], select the desired paper type and then press the enter key. Default drawer Sets one drawer that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that drawer. 1. Select [Default cassette] and then press the entrer key. 2. Select the drawer that will be used with priority. Settings: Cassette 1/Cassette 2/Cassette 3/ Cassette 4 * For 16 ppm model, the setting for drawer 2, 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed. * For 20 ppm model, the setting for drawer 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed. Default magnification ratio Sets whether or not the appropriate magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when selecting the size of copy paper. 1. Select [Default magnif.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [100%] or [Auto %] and then press the enter key. Auto exposure adjustment Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto exposure mode. 1. Select [Adj.Auto expos.] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7 Auto exposure adjustment (OCR) Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when using the optional scanner functions of this machine. 1. Select [Auto expos.(OCR)] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7 Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode) Adjusts the median exposure value when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality. 1. Select [Txt+Photo Dens.] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7

1-4-56

2DA/2DB-1 Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) Adjusts the median exposure value when the text mode is selected for the image quality. 1. Select [Txt Ori Density] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7 Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode) Adjusts the median exposure value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality. 1. Select [Photo Ori Dnsity] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7 Sort mode ON/OFF Determines whether or not the Sort mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. 1. Select [Sort] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Offset copying Determines whether or not the offset copy will be the default setting in the initial mode. 1. Select [Offset] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. 1. Select [Auto Rotation] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Margin width Determines the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode. 1. Select [Margin Width] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the margin widths and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1/8" to 3/4" in 1/8" increments (inch specifications) 1 to 18 mm in 1mm increments (metric specifications) Erased border width Determines the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes. 1. Select [BorderEraseWidth] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the widths and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1/8" to 3/4" in 1/8" increments (inch specifications) 1 to 18 mm in 1mm increments (metric specifications) Copy limit Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time. 1. Select [Copy Limit] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the copy limit and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 999 Black-line correction Reduces black lines that may be caused when the DP is used. 1. Select [Corr. Black line] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [None], [Weak] or [Strong] and then press the enter key.

1-4-57

2DA/2DB-1 (4) Machine default Auto drawer switching ON/OFF Turns automatic drawer switching ON or OFF. 1. Select [Auto Cassette SW] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On/All types of paper], [On/Only same paper type] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Paper size (drawer 1 to 4) Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawer 1 through 4. 1. Select one of the [Paper Size (1st) to (4th)] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Auto Detection Metric], [Auto Detection Inch] or a paper size and then press the enter key. * For 16 ppm model, the setting for drawer 2, 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed. * For 20 ppm model, the setting for drawer 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed. Paper type (drawer 1 to 4) Sets the type of paper that is loaded in drawers 1 through 4. 1. Select one of the [Paper Type (1st) to (4th)] and then press the enter key. 2. Select the paper type and then press the enter key. * For 16 ppm model, the setting for drawer 2, 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed. * For 20 ppm model, the setting for drawer 3 and 4 will only be available when the optional paper feeder is installed. Bypass tray settings display ON/OFF 1. Select one of the [Check Bypass] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Paper weight for paper type Sets the paper weight for each paper type. 1. Select [P. type (Weight)] and then press the enter key. 2. Select paper type and then press the enter key. 3. Select paper weight and then press the enter key. Custom paper type Sets whether or not to match the orientation in one-sided printing and two-sided printing. 1. Select [Special P. type] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Match Print Direction] or [Fast Mode] and then press the enter key. Original orientation Sets the default original orientation. 1. Select [Orig. direction] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Rear] or [Left top] and then press the enter key. Auto sleep time Sets the time that elapses before the auto sleep function. 1. Select [Sleep mode time] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets sleep mode type and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 240 min (Inch specifications) 1 to 120 mim (metric specifications) Auto low power time Sets the time that elapses before the low power mode is automatically activated. 1. Select [Low power time] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets low power time and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 240 mm (Inch specifications) 1 to 120 mm (metric specifications) Copy eject location Sets the paper output location with priority for copying. This setting is only available when the optional finisher or job separator are installed in the machine. 1. Select [Copy Otput Destn] and then press the enter key. 2. Select output location and then press the enter key. Duplex print for paper type Sets whether or not each custom type of paper (custom 1 to custom 8) will be available for use in duplex printing. 1. Select [P. type (Duplex)] and then press the enter key. 2. Select one of the [Custom 1 to 8] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key.

1-4-58

2DA/2DB-1 Fax eject location Sets where incoming faxes will be ejected. This setting is only available when the optional fax kit, finisher or job separator are installed in the machine. 1. Select [Fax Output Destn] and then press the enter key. 2. Select output location and then press the enter key. Default operation mode Sets whether the display that appears after power is turned on to the machine will be the one for the copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode. This setting is only available when the optional fax kit is installed. 1. Select [Main mode] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Copy mode] or [Fax mode] and then press the enter key. Key sound ON/OFF Sets whether or not the operation panel will emit a beep sound each time a key is pressed. 1. Select [Key sound On/Off] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Day and time Sets the current date and time. 1. Select [Date/Time] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the current date and time. 3. Select [End] and then press the enter key. Display contrast adjustment Adjust the display contrast. 1. Select [Display Contrast] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the contrast and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7 Changing the management code Changes the management code. 1. Select [PIN # Change] and then press the enter key. 2. Enter a new 4-digit management code using the numeric keys. Auto sleep ON/OFF Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function. This setting is displayed only on the inch specification model. 1. Select [Auto Sleep] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Auto clear ON/OFF Sets whether or not to have the auto clear function. 1. Select [Auto Clear] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Auto clear time Sets the time that elapses from completion of copying to activation of the auto cler function. 1. Select [Auto Clear Time] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the time and then press the enter key. Setting range: 10 to 270 s Silent mode ON/OFF Sets whether or not to use the silent mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. 1. Select [Silent Mode] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key.

1-4-59

2DA/2DB-1 (5) Bypass setting Paper size and type Sets the paper size and paper type for the bypass settings. When using special papers such as transparency, cards, and postcards, be sure to set the paper type to prevent faulty transfer and faulty fixing. 1. Select paper size. If the paper size is unknown or no particular paper size setting is required, select [Universal Size]. When setting a size, turn on the size input and use the left/right cursor key to select the paper size. Setting range: (Inch specifications) Width: 3 7/8" to 11 5/8" Length: 5 7/8" to 17" (Metric specifications) Width: 98 to 297 mm Length: 148 to 432 mm 2. Press the enter key. 3. Select paper type and then press the enter key. Selecting other standard sizes Sets a special standard size. 1. Select [Other Regular Size] and then press the enter key. 2. Select paper size and then press the enter key. 3. Select paper type and then press the enter key. Checks the total count of copies, etc., and prints out the information as a counter report. 1. Select [Counter check] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Output count] or [Scan count] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [End] and then press the enter key. 4. Select [Print counter report] and then press the enter key to print out a counter report. (6) Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report

(7) Status report print out Prints out one of the status report. 1. Select [Print Report] and then press the enter key. 2. Select the report to print out and then press the enter key. [Copy report] [Machine report] [Coverage report] The selected status report will be printed out.

(8) Language selection function Switches the language to be displayed on the operation panel. 1. Select [Language] and then press the enter key. 2. Select the language to use and then press the enter key. Available languages: Inch specifications Japanese, English, French and Spanish Metric specifications English, German, French, Spanish and Italian

1-4-60

2DA/2DB

1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection

(1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops operating and displays the jam location on the operation panel. Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903. To remove paper jammed in the machine, open the front cover, left cover, or pull the drawer out. To remove original jammed in the DP, open the DP original cover. Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.

8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Figure 1-5-1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Misfeed in the drawer 1 Misfeed in the drawer 2*2 Misfeed in the drawer 3*1 Misfeed in the drawer 4*1 Misfeed in the bypass tray Misfeed in the paper conveying section Misfeed in the exit section (Misfeed in the job separator*1 or finisher*1) 8 Misfeed in the DP*1

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-1

2DA/2DB (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions

OCM OFM OSBSW DPTSW

PCSW ESW

FSSW

DUPPCSW DUPFCL BYPPFSOL RM RSW PFCL

DPFCL1 DFSW1

DPFCL2 DFSW2

DPFCL3

Figure 1-5-2

1-5-2

2DA/2DB Section System Jam code 00 Description No paper feed Conditions When the power switch is turned on, the machine detects activation of the registration switch (RSW), the exit switch (ESW) or the feedshift switch (FSSW). A cover open state is detected during copying. When the machine waits for secondary paper feed, 30 s or more have elapsed. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1680 ms of the bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) turning on; the solenoid is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 1680 ms. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1430 ms of the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on; the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 1430 ms. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 2780 ms of the drawer paper feed clutch 1 (DPFCL1)*2 turning on; the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 2780 ms. The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn on within 2490 ms of the drawer paper feed clutch 2 (DPFCL2)*1 turning on; the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 2490 ms. The drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 does not turn on within 2490 ms of the drawer paper feed clutch 3 (DPFCL3)*1 turning on; the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 2490 ms. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 2340 ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning on. The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn off within 2050 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning on. The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn off within 2050 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning off. 16 Paper conveying section 20 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying 2 Multiple sheets in the bypass tray The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn on within 2050 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320 ms of registration switch (RSW) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1680 ms of bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) turning on. 21 Multiple sheets in the drawer 1 (drawer) The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320 ms of registration switch (RSW) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1430 ms of paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on.

04 05 Paper feed section 10

Cover open JAM Secondary paper feed timeout No paper feed from the bypass tray

11

No paper feed from the drawer 1 (drawer)

12

No paper feed from the drawer 2*2 (first paper feeder)

13

No paper feed from the drawer 3*1 (second paper feeder)

14

No paper feed from the drawer 4*1 (third paper feeder)

15

Misfeed in vertical paper conveying 1

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-3

2DA/2DB Section Paper conveying section Jam code 22 Description Multiple sheets in the drawer 2*2 (first paper feeder) Conditions The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320 ms of registration switch (RSW) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2780 ms of drawer paper feed clutch 1 (DPFCL1)*2 turning on. The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn off within 6320 ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning on. The rdrawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)* 2 does not turn off within 2490 ms of drawer paper feed clutch 2 (DPFCL2)* 1 turning on. The drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 does not turn off within 6320 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning on. The rdrawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)* 1 does not turn off within 2490 ms of drawer paper feed clutch 3 (DPFCL3)* 1 turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2340 ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2340 ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning off. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1760 ms of duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW1)*1 turning on. Fixing section 40 Misfeed in the fixing section (paper feed from bypass tray) Misfeed in the fixing section (paper feed from drawer) Misfeed in the fixing section (paper feed from first paper feeder*2) Misfeed in the fixing section (paper feed from second paper feeder*1) Misfeed in the fixing section (paper feed from third paper feeder*1) Misfeed in the fixing section (paper feed from duplex section*1) Misfeed in the exit section The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn off within 3020 ms of the registration switch (RSW) turning off. The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the registration motor (RM) turning on. 51 Misfeed in the job separator*1 The job separator eject switch (JBESW)*1 does not turn on within 2050 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The job separator eject switch (JBESW)*1 does not turn off within 2050 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. The job separator eject switch (JBESW)*1 does not turn off within 2050 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. *1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

23

Multiple sheets in the drawer 3*1 (second paper feeder)

24

Multiple sheets in the drawer 4*1 (third paper feeder)

Transfer section

30

Misfeed in registration/ transfer section

41

42

43

44

45

Exit section

50

1-5-4

2DA/2DB Section Feedshift section Jam code 52 Description Misfeed in the feedshift section (paper feed from bypass tray) Conditions The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530 ms of paper switchback. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530 ms of paper switchback. 53 Misfeed in the feedshift section (paper feed from drawer) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530 ms of paper switchback. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530 ms of paper switchback. 54 Misfeed in the feedshift section (paper feed from first paper feeder*2) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530 ms of paper switchback. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530 ms of paper switchback. 55 Misfeed in the feedshift section (paper feed from second paper feeder*1) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530 ms of paper switchback. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530 ms of paper switchback. 56 Misfeed in the feedshift section (paper feed from third paper feeder*1) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530 ms of paper switchback. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530 ms of paper switchback. 57 Misfeed in the feedshift section (paper feed from duplex section*1) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530 ms of paper switchback. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530 ms of paper switchback. Duplex section 60 Misfeed in duplex paper conveying section*1 The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 does not turn off within 3280 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 does not turn on within 3280 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 does not turn off within 3280 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-5

2DA/2DB Section Duplex section Jam code 61 Description Misfeed in duplex exit section*1 Conditions The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1760 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1760 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 turning off. DP 70 No original feed*1 During the primary feed of the second original in the singlesided or double-sided original mode, even if retry operation is performed five times, primary original feed is not performed. During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW)*1 does not turn off within 6500 ms of the original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on. During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW)*1 does turn off within 750 ms of the original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on. During scanning of the second side or reversing of the original for ejection in the double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW)*1 does not turn off within 6500 ms of the original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on. During scanning of the second side or reversing of the original for ejection in the double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW)*1 does not turn on within 750 ms of the original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on. During the switchback operation of an original in the doublesided original mode, the original switchback switch (OSBSW) *1 does not turn on within 1300 ms of the original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on. The paper conveying switch (PCSW)*1 does not turn on within 1550 ms of the signal requesting paper ejection is output from the MFP. During paper intake from the MFP, the paper conveying switch (PCSW)*1 does not turn off within 1960 to 3480 ms (depending on paper size) of paper conveying switch (PCSW)*1 turning on. When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW)*1 does not turn on within 1590 ms of the paper conveying motor (PCM)*1 turning on. When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW)*1 does not turn off within 2260 to 3190 ms (varies depending on the paper size) of the paper conveying motor (PCM)*1 turning on.

71

An original jam in the original conveying section 1*1 An original size error jam*1

72

73

An original jam in the original conveying section 2*1 An original jam in the original conveying section 3*1 An original jam in the original switchback section*1 Jam between the finisher and MFP*1 Intake jam*1

74

75

Finisher

80

81

83

Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1*1 Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2*1

84

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-6

2DA/2DB (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or exit section is indicated as soon as the power switch is turned on. Jam code 00 Causes/check procedures A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around registration switch, exit sensor or feedshift switch. Defective registration switch. Defective exit switch. Corrective measures Check visually and remove it, if any.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U031 and turn exit switch on and off manually. Replace exit switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Change the paper. Check visually and replace any deformed pulley. Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feed solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-35).

Defective feedshift switch.

(2) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from the bypass tray). Jam code 10

Paper on the bypass tray is extremely curled. Check if the bypass paper feed pulley is deformed. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the bypass paper feed solenoid malfunctions. Electrical problem with the bypass paper feed solenoid.

(3) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from the drawer 1). Jam code 11

Paper in the drawer is extremely curled. Check if the paper feed pulley, separation pulley or forward pulley is deformed. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions. Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch.

Change the paper. Check visually and replace any deformed pulley.

Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-35).

1-5-7

2DA/2DB Problem (4) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from the drawer 2). Jam code 12 Causes/check procedures Paper in the first paper feeder*2 is extremely curled. Check if the paper feed pulley, separation pulley or forward pulley in the first paper feeder*2 is deformed. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2. (5) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from the drawer 3). Jam code 13 Paper in the second paper feeder*1 is extremely curled. Check if the paper feed pulley, separation pulley or forward pulley in the second paper feeder*1 is deformed. Broken drawer feed switch 1*2 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 1*2. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1. (6) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from the drawer 4). Jam code 14 Paper in the third paper feeder*1 is extremely curled. Check if the paper feed pulley, separation pulley or forward pulley in the third paper feeder*1 is deformed. Broken drawer feed switch 2*1 actuator. Change the paper. Corrective measures

Check visually and replace any deformed pulley.

Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace any deformed pulley.

Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace any deformed pulley.

Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-8

2DA/2DB Problem (6) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from the drawer 4). Jam code 14 Causes/check procedures Defective drawer feed switch 2*1. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 3*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 3*1. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Broken drawer feed switch 1*2 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 1*2. Broken drawer feed switch 2*1 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 2*1. Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions. Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 3*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 3*1. Corrective measures Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 2 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

(7) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (misfeed in vertical paper conveying 1). Jam code 15

Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 2 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-35). Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-9

2DA/2DB Problem (8) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (misfeed in vertical paper conveying 2). Jam code 16 Causes/check procedures Broken drawer feed switch 1*2 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 1*2. Broken drawer feed switch 2*1 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 2*1. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1. (9) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in the bypass tray). Jam code 20 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the bypass paper feed solenoid malfunctions. Electrical problem with the bypass paper feed solenoid. Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other. (10) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in the drawer 1). Jam code 21 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions. Corrective measures Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 2 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feed solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-35).

Check visually and remedy if necessary.

Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-10

2DA/2DB Problem (10) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in the drawer 1). Jam code 21 (11) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in the drawer 2). Jam code 22 Causes/check procedures Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch. Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other. Corrective measures Check (see page 1-5-35). Check visually and remedy if necessary.

Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 1*2. Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other.

Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

Check visually and remedy if necessary.

(12) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in the drawer 3). Jam code 23

Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Broken drawer feed switch 1*2 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 1*2. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 2*1.

Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check.

(13) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in the drawer 4). Jam code 24

Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Broken drawer feed switch 2*1 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 2*1. Check if the drawer paper feed clutch 3*1 malfunctions.

Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 2 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 2 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.

Check. Electrical problem with the drawer paper feed clutch 3*1. *1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-11

2DA/2DB Problem (14) A paper jam in the transfer section is indicated during copying (misfeed in registration/transfer section). Jam code 30 Causes/check procedures Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Broken drawer feed switch 1*2 actuator. Defective drawer feed switch 1*2. Broken duplex paper conveying switch*1 actuator. Defective duplex paper conveying switch*1. (15) A paper jam in the fixing section is indicated during copying (misfeed in the fixing section). Jam code 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 Check if the fixing unit front guide is deformed. Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed. Check if the heat roller separation claws are dirty or deformed. Check if the heat roller and its separation claws contact each other. Broken exit switch actuator. Defective exit switch. Corrective measures Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveying switch on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveying switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Repair or replace if necessary. Clean or replace if necessary.

Clean or replace if necessary.

Remedy if the separation claw springs are out of place.

Check visually and replace the exit switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn exit switch on and off manually. Replace exit switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U030 and select the registration motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-34). Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace the exit switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn exit switch on and off manually. Replace exit switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light.

Check if the registration motor malfunctions. Electrical problem with the registration motor. (16) A paper jam in the exit section is indicated during copying (misfeed in the exit section). Jam code 50 Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Broken exit switch actuator. Defective exit switch.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-12

2DA/2DB Problem (16) A paper jam in the exit section is indicated during copying (misfeed in the exit section). Jam code 50 (17) A paper jam in the exit section is indicated during copying (misfeed in the job separator). Jam code 51 Causes/check procedures Check if the registration motor malfunctions. Electrical problem with the registration motor. Corrective measures Run maintenance item U030 and select the registration motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-34).

Broken feedshift switch actuator. Defective feedshift switch.

Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace the Job separator eject switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn Job separator eject switch on and off manually. Replace Job separator eject switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U030 and select the exit motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-34). Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveying switch on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveying switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U030 and select the exit motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-5-34). Check visually and remedy if necessary. Check.

Broken Job separator eject switch*1 actuator. Defective Job separator eject switch*1.

(18) A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying (misfeed in the feedshift section). Jam code 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57

Broken feedshift switch actuator. Defective feedshift switch.

Check if the exit motor malfunctions. Electrical problem with the exit motor. Broken feedshift switch actuator. Defective feedshift switch.

(19) A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying (misfeed in duplex paper conveying section). Jam code 60

Broken duplex paper conveying switch*1 actuator. Defective duplex paper conveying switch*1. Check if the exit motor malfunctions. Electrical problem with the exit motor. Check if the duplex feed clutch*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the duplex feed clutch*1.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-13

2DA/2DB Problem (20) A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying (misfeed in duplex paper conveying section). Jam code 61 Causes/check procedures Broken duplex paper conveying switch*1 actuator. Defective duplex paper conveying switch*1. Broken registration switch actuator. Defective registration switch. Check if the duplex feed clutch*1 malfunctions. Electrical problem with the duplex feed clutch*1. (21) An original jams when the power switch is turned on. A piece of paper torn from an original is caught around the DP timing switch*1 or original switchback switch*1. Defective DP timing switch*1. Defective original switchback switch*1. (22) An original jams in the original feed section is indicated during copying (no original feed). Jam code 70 Defective original set switch*1. Check if the original feed motor*1 malfunctions. Check if the DP paper feed pulley or DP separation pad is deformed. (23) An original jams in the original conveying section is indicated during copying (An original jam in the original conveying section 1). Jam code 71 Broken DP timing switch*1 actuator. Defective DP timing switch*1. Check if the original conveying motor*1 malfunctions. Corrective measures Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveying switch on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveying switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace the registration switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and remedy if necessary. Check. Check visually and remove it, if any.

Run maintenance item U244 and turn DP timing switch on and off manually. Replace DP timing switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U244 and turn original switchback switch on and off manually. Replace original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U244 and turn original set switch on and off manually. Replace original set switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.

Check visually and replace DP timing switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U244 and turn DP timing switch on and off manually. Replace DP timing switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-14

2DA/2DB Problem (24) An original jams in the original conveying section is indicated during copying (An original size error jam). Jam code 72 (25) An original jams in the original conveying section is indicated during copying (An original jam in the original conveying section 2). Jam code 73 Causes/check procedures Broken DP timing switch*1 actuator. Defective DP timing switch*1. Check if the original conveying motor*1 malfunctions. Broken DP timing switch*1 actuator. Defective DP timing switch*1. Check if the original conveying motor*1 malfunctions. Check if the switchback feedshift solenoid*1 malfunctions. (26) An original jams in the original conveying section is indicated during copying (An original jam in the original conveying section 3). Jam code 74 Broken DP timing switch*1 actuator. Defective DP timing switch*1. Check if the original conveying motor*1 malfunctions. Check if the switchback feedshift solenoid malfunctions*1. (27) An original jams in the original switchback section is indicated during copying (An original jam in the original switchback section). Jam code 75 (28) Original jams frequently. Defective original switchback switch*1. Check if the original conveying motor*1 malfunctions. Check if the switchback feedshift solenoid*1 malfunctions. An original outside the specifications is used. The DP forwarding pulley or DP paper feed pulley is dirty with paper powder. The DP paper feed pulley and DP separation pad do not contact correctly. Corrective measures Check visually and replace DP timing switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U244 and turn DP timing switch on and off manually. Replace DP timing switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check visually and replace DP timing switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U244 and turn DP timing switch on and off manually. Replace DP timing switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U243 and select the switchback feedshift solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check visually and replace DP timing switch if its actuator is broken. Run maintenance item U244 and turn DP timing switch on and off manually. Replace DP timing switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U243 and select the switchback feedshift solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U244 and turn original switchback switch on and off manually. Replace original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U243 and select the switchback feedshift solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Use only originals conforming to the specifications. Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Check and remedy.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-15

2DA/2DB Problem (29) A paper jam in the finisher*1 is indicated during copying (Intake jam). Jam code 81 Causes/check procedures Defective paper conveying switch*1. Corrective measures With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the finisher main PCB, check if CN4-10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.

Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed. Defective paper conveying switch*1.

(30) A paper jam in the finisher*1 is indicated during copying (jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1). Jam code 83 (31) A paper jam in the finisher*1 is indicated during copying (jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2). Jam code 84

With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the finisher main PCB, check if CN4-10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.

Check if the feedshift roller or press roller is deformed.

Defective paper conveying switch*1.

With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the finisher main PCB, check if CN4-10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying switch. Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.

Check if the eject roller or eject pulley is deformed.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-16

2DA/2DB

1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled. "C" and a number between 0030 and 8210 altenates, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by power switch turns off and on.

List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason, a system error will be indicated. After a system error is indicated, the error can be cleared by turning the main switch off and then on. If the error is detected continuously, however, perform the operation shown in Table 1-5-1. If a system error occurs frequently, a fault may have occurred. Check the details of the C call to take proper measures. System error 0210 0250 0410 0420 0440 0500 0510 0630 3100 Contens Communication problem between the main PCB and engine PCB Scanner network board*1 communication problem DP*1 communication problem First paper feeder*2 communication problem Finisher*1 communication problem Operation System error Normal C call processing System error Normal C call processing System error Normal C call processing System error Normal C call processing System error System error Normal C call processing System error Normal C call processing System error Normal C call processing System error Normal C call processing

Second paper feeder*1 communication problem Third paper feeder*1 communication problem DMA problem Scanner carriage problem

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. Table 1-5-1 List of system errors

Partial operation control If any of the following calls for service is detected, partial operation control will be activated. After taking measures against the cause of trouble, run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control. Display C8170 C8180 C8190 C8210 *1: Optional. Contens Finisher*1 front side registration motor problem Finisher*1 rear side registration motor problem Finisher*1 trailing edge registration motor problem Finisher*1 front stapler problem

1-5-17

2DA/2DB (2) Self diagnostic codes Code C0030 Contents system problem Fax control Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem. Fax control PCB*1 incompatibility detection problem Fax software is not compatible with MMI software. Backup memory read/write problem (main PCB flash) Read and write data does not match. Backup memory data problem (main PCB flash) Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values. PCB*1 Remarks Causes Defective fax control PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

C0070

Fax software or main software is something of the other machine. Defectivemain PCB. Problem with the backup memory data. Defective backup RAM. Defective EEPROM or main PCB. Problem with the backup memory data. Defective EEPROM. Defective engine PCB. Problem with the backup memory data. Defective backup RAM. Defective main PCB or engine PCB.

Check the version of the Fax software and the main software, upgrade the version to the compatible software. Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation. Turn safety switch off and back on and run maintenance item U020 to set the contents of the backup memory data again. If the C0110 is displayed after re-setting the backup memory contents, replace the main PCB. Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation. Turn safety switch off and back on and run maintenance item U020 to set the contents of the backup memory data again. If the C0140 is displayed after re-setting the backup memory contents, replace the EEPROM or main PCB. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Turn safety switch off and back on and run maintenance item U020 to set the contents of the backup memory data again. If the C0160 is displayed after re-setting the backup memory contents, replace the engine PCB. Replace the main PCB or engine PCB and check for correct operation.

C0100

C0110

C0130

Backup memory read/write problem (main PCB EEPROM) Read and write data does not match. Backup memory data problem (main PCB EEPROM) Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values.

C0140

C0150

Backup memory read/write problem (engine PCB) Read and write data does not match. Backup memory data problem (engine PCB) Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values.

C0160

C0170

Accounting count problem When the power is turned on, the total count and the scan count are abnormal both on the main PCB and the engine PCB. Machine number mismatch When the power is turned on, the machine number does not match between the main PCB and the engine PCB.

C0180

Correct EEPROM is not installed. Data damage of EEPROM.

Install the correct EEPROM. If it does not solve the problem, contact the Service Administrative Division. Contact the Service Administrative Division.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-18

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective main PCB or engine PCB. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective main PCB or printer board PCB. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective main PCB or scanner network board. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective main PCB or fax control PCB. DP installed incorrectly. Defective engine PCB or DP driver PCB. Paper feeder installed incorrectly. Defective engine PCB or drawer main PCB. Finisher installed incorrectly. Defective engine PCB or finisher main PCB. Paper feeder installed incorrectly. Defective engine PCB or drawer main PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the main PCB or engine PCB and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the main PCB or printer board PCB and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the main PCB or scanner network board and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the main PCB or fax control PCB and check for correct operation. Check the installation state of the DP and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Replace the engine PCB or DP driver PCB and check for correct operation. Check the installation state of the paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Replace the engine PCB or drawer main PCB and check for correct operation. Check the installation state of the finisher and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Replace the engine PCB or finisher main PCB and check for correct operation. Check the installation state of the paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Replace the engine PCB or drawer main PCB and check for correct operation.

Code C0210

Contents Communication problem between the main PCB and engine PCB When the power is turned on, the machine does not detect the low level of SBSY and the high level of SDIR for 10 s. Printer board PCB communication problem The printer board PCB does not respond 120 s after the power is turned on.

C0240

C0250

Scanner network board*1 communication problem The scanner network board does not respond.

C0280

Fax control PCB*1 communication problem Communication between the fax control PCB and the main PCB of the machine cannot be performed normally. DP*1 communication problem Communication fails five times successively.

C0410

C0420

First paper feeder*2 communication problem Communication fails five times successively.

C0440

Finisher*1 communication problem Communication fails five times successively.

C0500

Second paper feeder*1 communication problem Communication fails five times successively.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-19

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes Paper feeder installed incorrectly. Defective engine PCB or drawer main PCB. Defective main PCB. DIMM installed incorrectly. Defective DIMM. C0630 DMA problem DMA transmission of compressed, decompressed, rotated, relocated or blanked-out image data does not complete within the specified period of time. Image processing problem JAM05 is detected twice. Fax control PCB*1 CG ROM checksum error A checksum error occurred with the CG ROM data of the fax control PCB. Flash ROM program area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the program of the fax control PCB. Fax control PCB*1 software switch checksum error A checksum error occurred with the software switch value of the fax control PCB. Fax control PCB*1 to main PCB highcapacity data transfer problem High-capacity data transfer between the fax control PCB and the main PCB of the machine was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times. Fax control PCB*1 program archive problem When power is turned on, the compressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB was not successfully decompressed. Defective main PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the installation state of the paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Replace the engine PCB or drawer main PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation. Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PCB correctly. Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation. Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation.

Code C0510

Contents Third paper communication problem Communication fails five times successively. feeder*1

C0610

Bitmap (DIMM) problem There is a problem with the data or address bus of the bitmap DRAM.

C0800 C0820

Defective main PCB. Defective fax control PCB.

Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

C0830

Defective fax control PCB.

Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

C0860

Defective fax software. Defective fax control PCB. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective main PCB or fax control PCB. Defective fax control PCB.

Install the fax software to Ver. 2.xx or later. Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation. Check the connection of connector. Repair or replace if necessary. Replace the main PCB or fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

C0870

C0880

Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-20

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes Defective fax control PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

Code C0890

Contents CG font archive Fax control problem When power is turned on, the compressed CG font in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB was not successfully decompressed. Fax software incompatibility detection problem Version of fax software is not compatible with that of main software. Fax file system error The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PCB. Drive motor problem LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 s, 1 s after the drive motor has turned on. PCB*1

C0900

Fax software version or main software is earlier. Defective fax control PCB.

Check the version of the fax software and the main software, upgrade the version to the compatible software. Replace the fax control PCB and check for correct operation.

C0920

C2000

Poor contact in the drive motor connector terminals. Defective drive motor rotation control circuit. Defective drive transmission system.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the drive motor.

Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the scanner home position switch.

C3100

Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or copying the document placed on the contact glass.

Poor contact of the connector terminals. Defective scanner home position switch. Defective engine PCB. Defective scanner motor.

Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the scanner motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PCB. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Adjust the position of the contact glass (shading plate). If the problem still occurs, replace the scanner home position switch.

C3200

Exposure lamp problem Non-lighting of the exposure lamp is detected at the beginning of copying.

Poor contact of the connector terminals. Defective exposure lamp or inverter PCB. Defective engine PCB. Incorrect shading position.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-21

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes Insufficient exposure lamp luminosity. Defective engine PCB. Incorrect shading position. Defective CCD PCB. C4000 Polygon motor synchronization problem The polygon motor does not reach the stable speed within 15 s of the START signal turning on. Poor contact in the polygon motor connector terminals. Defective polygon motor. Defective engine PCB. C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem The polygon motor rotation is not stable for 5 s after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized. Poor contact in the polygon motor connector terminals. Defective polygon motor. Defective engine PCB. C4200 BD steady-state problem The MIP detects a BD error for 600 ms after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized. Defective laser diode. Defective polygon motor. Defective main PCB. Defective engine PCB. C6000 Broken fixing heater wire In fixing warm-up, the time to reach 50C/122 F exceeds 13.5 s, the time to reach 100C/212 F exceeds 10 s, the time to reach the primary stabilization exceeds 10 s or the time to reach the secondary stabilization exceeds 24 s. Poor contact in the thermistor connector terminals. Fixing thermistor installed incorrectly. Fixing thermostat triggered. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PCB. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Adjust the position of the contact glass (shading plate). If the problem still occurs, replace the scanner home position switch. Replace the ISU. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the LSU. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the LSU. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the LSU. Replace the LSU. Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check and reinstall if necessary.

Code C3300

Contents Optical system (AGC) problem After AGC, correct input is not obtained at CCD.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the fixing thermostat.

1-5-22

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes Fixing heater M or S installed incorrectly. Broken fixing heater M or S wire. Check procedures/corrective measures Check and reinstall if necessary.

Code C6000

Contents Broken fixing heater wire In fixing warm-up, the time to reach 50C/122 F exceeds 13.5 s, the time to reach 100C/212 F exceeds 10 s, the time to reach the primary stabilization exceeds 10 s or the time to reach the secondary stabilization exceeds 24 s. Abnormally high fixing unit thermistor temperature The fixing temperature exceeds 230C/446 F for 40 ms.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the fixing heater M or S.

C6020

Shorted thermistor. Broken heater control circuit on the power supply PCB. Poor contact in the thermistor connector terminals. Broken fixing thermistor wire. Fixing thermistor installed incorrectly. Fixing thermostat triggered. Fixing heater M or S installed incorrectly. Broken fixing heater M or S wire.

Measure the resistance. If it is 0 , replace the thermistor. Replace the power supply PCB and check for correct operation.

C6050

Abnormally low fixing unit thermistor temperature The fixing temperature remains below 90C/194F for 1 s.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Measure the resistance. If it is , replace the fixing thermistor. Check and reinstall if necessary.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the fixing thermostat. Check and reinstall if necessary.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the fixing heater M or S. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the zero-crossing signal is output from YC2-5 on the power supply PCB. If not, replace the power supply PCB. Replace the engine PCB if C6400 is detected while YC2-5 on the power supply PCB outputs the zero-crossing signal. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the drawer PCB and check for correct operation.

C6400

Zero-crossing signal problem The engine PCB does not detect the zero-crossing signal for the time specified below. At power-on: 3 s Others: 5 s

Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective power supply PCB. Defective engine PCB.

C7800

Broken external temperature thermistor The input voltage is 0.5 V or less.

Poor contact in the humidity sensor connector terminals. Defective humidity sensor.

1-5-23

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes Poor contact in the humidity sensor connector terminals. Defective humidity sensor. C8170 Finisher*1 front side registration motor problem If the front side registration home position sensor is on in initialization, the sensor does not turn off within 570 ms of starting initialization. If the front side registration home position sensor is off in initialization, the sensor does not turn on within 3180 ms of starting initialization. The front side registration motor connector makes poor contact. The front side registration motor malfunctions. The front side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. The front side registration home position sensor malfunctions. Defective finisher main PCB. C8180 Finisher*1 rear side registration motor problem If the rear side registration home position sensor is on in initialization, the sensor does not turn off within 570 ms of starting initialization. If the rear side registration home position sensor is off in initialization, the sensor does not turn on within 2880 ms of starting initialization. The rear side registration motor connector makes poor contact. The rear side registration motor malfunctions. The rear side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. The rear side registration home position sensor malfunctions. Defective finisher main PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the drawer PCB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the front side registration motor and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Code C7810

Contents Short-circuited external temperature thermistor The input voltage is 4.5 V or more.

Replace the front side registration home position sensor and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the rear side registration motor and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Replace the rear side registration home position sensor and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-24

2DA/2DB Remarks Causes The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact. The trailing edge registration motor malfunctions. The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. The trailing edge registration home position sensor malfunctions. Defective finisher main PCB. C8180 Finisher*1 front stapler problem The front stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of front stapler motor counterclockwise (forward) rotation. During initialization, the front stapler home position sensor does not change state from non-detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of front stapler motor clockwise (reverse) rotation. The front stapler connector makes poor contact. The front stapler malfunctions. a) The front stapler is blocked with a staple. b) The front stapler is broken. Defective finisher main PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the trailing edge registration motor and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Code C8170 Finisher*1

Contents trailing edge registration motor problem If the trailing edge registration home position sensor is on in initialization, the sensor does not turn off within 570 ms of starting initialization. If the trailing edge registration home position sensor is off in initialization, the sensor does not turn on within 4550 ms of starting initialization.

Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

a) Remove the front stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. b) Replace the front stapler and check for correct operation. Replace the finisher main PCB and check for correct operation.

*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.

1-5-25

2DA/2DB

1-5-3 Image formation problems

(1) No image appears (entirely white). (2) No image appears (entirely black). (3) Image is too light. (4) Background is visible.

See page 1-5-27 (5) A white line appears longitudinally.

See page 1-5-27 (6) A black line appears longitudinally.

See page 1-5-28 (7) A black line appears laterally.

See page 1-5-28 (8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.

See page 1-5-28 (9) Black dots appear on the image.

See page 1-5-29 (10) Image is blurred.

See page 1-5-29 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.

See page 1-5-29 (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original.

See page 1-5-30 (13) Paper creases.

See page 1-5-30 (14) Offset occurs.

See page 1-5-30 (15) Image is partly missing.

See page 1-5-31 (16) Fixing is poor.

See page 1-5-31 (17) Image is out of focus.

See page 1-5-31 (18) Image center does not align with the original center.

See page 1-5-32

See page 1-5-32

See page 1-5-32

See page 1-5-33

1-5-26

2DA/2DB (1) No image appears (entirely white). Causes 1. No transfer charging. 2. No LSU laser is output. 3. No developing bias is output.

Causes 1. No transfer charging. A. The connector terminals of the high-voltage PCB make poor contact. B. Defective engine PCB. C. Defective high-voltage PCB. 2. No LSU laser is output. A. Defective laser scanner unit. B. Defective main PCB. 3. No developing bias is output. A. The connector terminals of the high-voltage PCB make poor contact. B. Defective engine PCB. C. Defective high-voltage PCB.

Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the high voltage PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-6-29). Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation. Replace the high voltage PCB and check for correct operation.

(2) No image appears (entirely black).

Causes 1. No main charging. 2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. No main charging. A. Broken main charger wire. B. Leaking main charger housing. C. The connector terminals of the high-voltage PCB make poor contact. D. Defective engine PCB. E. Defective high-voltage PCB. Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-6-40). Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if YC9-5 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB. Check if main charging takes place when YC1-12 on the highvoltage PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the high-voltage PCB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1-1 and 1-6 on the inverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the inverter PCB. Check if YC17-1 and YC17-6 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.

2. Exposure lamp fails to light. A. The connector terminals of the exposure lamp make poor contact. B. Defective inverter PCB.

C. Defective engine PCB.

1-5-27

2DA/2DB (3) Image is too light. Causes 1. Insufficient toner. 2. The transfer voltage is not output properly. 3. Dirty main charger wire. 4. Dirty main charger grid.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Insufficient toner. 2. The transfer voltage is not output properly. 3. Dirty main charger wire. 4. Dirty main charger grid.

If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment, replace the container. Clean or check the transfer roller (see page 1-6-42). Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chager unit (see page 1-6-40). Clean the main charger grid or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chager unit (see page 1-6-40).

(4) Background is visible.

Causes 1. The developing bias voltage is not properly. 2. Dirty main charger wire.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. The developing bias voltage is not properly. 2. Dirty main charger wire.

Replace the high voltage PCB and check for correct operation. Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chager unit (see page 1-6-40).

(5) A white line appears longitudinally.

Causes 1. Dirty main charger wire. 2. Foreign matter in the developing unit. 3. Dirty shading plate.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Dirty main charger wire. 2. Foreign matter in the developing unit. 3. Dirty shading plate.

Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chager unit (see page 1-6-40). Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter (see page 1-6-41). Clean the shading plate.

1-5-28

2DA/2DB (6) A black line appears longitudinally. Causes 1. Dirty contact glass. 2. Dirty or flawed drum. 3. Dirty scanner mirror. 4. Dirty main charger wire.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Dirty contact glass. 2. Dirty or flawed drum. 3. Dirty scanner mirror. 4. Dirty main charger wire.

Clean the contact glass. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). Clean the scanner mirror. Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chager unit (see page 1-6-40).

(7) A black line appears laterally.

Causes 1. Dirty contact glass. 2. Dirty or flawed drum. 3. Dirty scanner mirror. 4. Dirty shading plate. 5. Leaking main charger housing.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Dirty contact glass. 2. Dirty or flawed drum. 3. Dirty scanner mirror. 4. Dirty shading plate. 5. Leaking main charger housing.

Clean the contact glass. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-38). Clean the scanner mirror. Clean the shading plate. Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.

(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.

Causes 1. Dirty main charger wire. 2. Defective exposure lamp.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Dirty main charger wire. 2. Defective exposure lamp.

Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chager unit (see page 1-6-40). Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replace the exposure lamp and inverter PCB.

1-5-29

2DA/2DB-1 (9) Black dots appear on the image. Causes 1. Dirty or flawed drum. 2. Dirty contact glass. 3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. 4. Dirty drum separation claws. 5. Dirty heat roller separation claws.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Dirty or flawed drum. 2. Dirty contact glass. 3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. 4. Dirty drum separation claws. 5. Dirty the heat roller separation claws.

Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). Clean the contact glass. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). Clean the drum separation claws. Clean the heat roller separation claws.

(10) Image is blurred.

Causes 1. Scanner moves erratically. 2. Deformed press roller. 3. Paper conveying section drive problem.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Scanner moves erratically. 2. Deformed press roller. 3. Paper conveying section drive problem.

Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails. If any, remove it. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-45). Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.

(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.

Causes 1. Misadjusted leading edge registration. 2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Misadjusted leading edge registration. 2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration.

Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-16). Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-6-35).

1-5-30

2DA/2DB (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. Causes 1. Paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid or registration motor installed or operating incorrectly.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid or registration motor installed or operating incorrectly.

Check the installation position and operation of the paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid and registration motor. If any of them operates incorrectly, replace it.

(13) Paper creases.

Causes 1. Paper curled. 2. Paper damp. 3. Defective pressure springs. 4. Defective separation. 5. Dirty separation electrode.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Paper curled. 2. Paper damp. 3. Defective pressure springs. 4. Defective separation. 5. Dirty separation electrode.

Check the paper storage conditions. Check the paper storage conditions. Replace the pressure springs. Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws. Clean the separation electrode.

(14) Offset occurs.

Causes 1. Defective cleaning blade. 2. Defective fixing section.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective cleaning blade. 2. Defective fixing section.

Replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). Check the heat roller and press roller.

1-5-31

2DA/2DB-1 (15) Image is partly missing. Causes 1. Paper damp. 2. Paper creased. 3. Dirty or flawed drum. 4. Dirty transfer roller.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Paper damp. 2. Paper creased. 3. Dirty or flawed drum. 4. Dirty transfer roller.

Check the paper storage conditions. Replace the paper. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). Clean the transfer roller.

(16) Fixing is poor.

Causes 1. Wrong paper. 2. Defective pressure springs. 3. Flawed press roller. 4. Defective fixing heater.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Wrong paper. 2. Defective pressure springs. 3. Flawed press roller. 4. Defective fixing heater.

Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace the pressure springs. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-45). Replace the fixing heater (see page 1-6-46).

(17) Image is out of focus.

Causes 1. Defective image scanning unit. 2. Drum condensation.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective image scanning unit. 2. Drum condensation.

Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-28). Clean the drum.

1-5-32

2DA/2DB (18) Image center does not Causes align with the original 1. Misadjusted center line of image printing. center. 2. Misadjusted scanner center line. 3. Original placed incorrectly.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Misadjusted center line of image printing. 2. Misadjusted scanner center line. 3. Original placed incorrectly.

Readjust the center line of image printing (see page 1-6-18). Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-36). Place the original correctly.

1-5-33

2DA/2DB

1-5-4 Electrical problems

Problem (1) The machine does not operate when the power switch is turned on. Causes No electricity at the power outlet. The power cord is not plugged in properly. The front cover or left cover is not closed completely. Broken power cord. Defective power switch. Blown fuse in the power source PCB. Defective front or left cover safety switch. Defective power source PCB. (2) The drive motor does not operate (C2000). Poor contact in the drive motor connector terminals. Broken drive motor gear. Defective drive motor. Check procedures/corrective measures Measure the input voltage. Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet. Check the front cover and left cover.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord. Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the power switch. Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing and replace the fuse. Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If none, replace the switch. With AC present, check for 24 V DC at YC1-1 and 5 V DC at YC1-7 on the power source PCB. If none, replace the power source PCB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor operates when YC7-5 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the drive motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC7-5 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check visually and replace the registration motor if necessary. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the registration motor operates when YC2-1,2,4,5 on the registration motor PCB goes low. If not, replace the registration motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC4-4 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check visually and replace the exit motor if necessary. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the exit motor operates when YC14-1,2,3,4 on the engine PCB go low. If not, replace the exit motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC14-1,2,3,4 on the engine PCB go low. If not, replace the engine PCB.

Defective engine PCB. (3) The registration motor does not operate. Poor contact in the registration motor connector terminals. Broken registration motor gear. Defective registration motor. Defective engine PCB. (4) The exit motor does not operate. Poor contact in the exit motor connector terminals. Broken exit motor gear. Defective exit motor.

Defective engine PCB.

1-5-34

2DA/2DB Problem (5) The scanner motor does not operate. Causes Broken scanner motor coil. Poor contact in the scanner motor connector terminals. Broken cooling fan motor 1 coil. Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 1 connector terminals. Broken cooling fan motor 2 coil. Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 2 connector terminals. Broken cooling fan motor 3 coil. Poor contact in the cooling fan motor 3 connector terminals. Poor contact in the drawer drive motor connector terminals. Broken drawer drive motor gear. Defective drawer drive motor. Defective drawer main PCB. (10) The paper feed clutch does not operate. Broken paper feed clutch coil. Poor contact in the paper feed clutch connector terminals. Defective engine PCB. (11) The bypass paper feed solenoid does not operate. Broken bypass paper feed solenoid coil. Poor contact in the bypass paper feed solenoid connector terminals. Defective engine PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the scanner motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

(6) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fan motor 1. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

(7) Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fan motor 2. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

(8) Cooling fan motor 3 does not operate.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fan motor 3. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

(9) The drawer drive motor* does not operate.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check visually and replace the drawer drive motor if necessary. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drawer drive motor operates when YC9-2,3,4,5 on the drawer main PCB goes low. If not, replace the drawer drive motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC9-2,3,4,5 on the drawer main PCB goes low. If not, replace the drawer main PCB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paper feed clutch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC8-3 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypass paper feed solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC8-5 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.

*: 20 ppm model only.

1-5-35

2DA/2DB Problem (12) The drawer paper feed clutch* does not operate. Causes Broken drawer paper feed clutch coil. Poor contact in the drawer paper feed clutch connector terminals. Defective drawer main PCB. (13) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. Poor contact in the cleaning lamp connector terminals. Defective cleaning lamp. Defective engine PCB. (14) The exposure lamp does not turn on. Poor contact in the exposure lamp connector terminals. Defective inverter PCB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the drawer paper feed clutch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC8-3 on the drawer main PCB goes low. If not, replace the drawer main PCB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp. If the cleaning lamp turns on when YC3-7,8 on the engine PCB is held low, replace the engine PCB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC1-1 and YC1-6 on the inverter PCB go low. If not, replace the inverter PCB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC17-1 and YC17-6 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB. If the exposure lamp does not turn off with YC1-1 and YC1-6 on the inverter PCB high, replace the inverter PCB. If YC17-1 and YC17-6 on the engine PCB are always low, replace the engine PCB. Check for continuity across each heater. If none, replace the heater M or S. Check for continuity across thermostat. If none, remove the cause and replace the thermostat. Measure the resistance. If it is , replace the fixing thermistor. Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts. See page 1-5-27.

Defective engine PCB. (15) The exposure lamp does not turn off. Defective inverter PCB. Defective engine PCB. Broken wire in fixing heater M or S. Fixing thermostat triggered. Broken fixing thermistor wire. Dirty sensor part of the fixing thermistor. Broken main charger wire. Leaking main charger housing. Poor contact in the highvoltage PCB connector terminals. Defective engine PCB. Defective high- voltage PCB.

(16) The fixing heater does not turn on (C6000). (17) The fixing heater does not turn off.

(18) Main charging is not performed.

*: 20 ppm model only.

1-5-36

2DA/2DB Problem (19) Transfer charging is not performed. Causes Poor contact in the highvoltage PCB connector terminals. Defective engine PCB. Defective high-voltage PCB. (20) No developing bias is output. Poor contact in the highvoltage PCB connector terminals. Defective engine PCB. Defective high-voltage PCB. (21) The original size is not detected. (22) The original size is not detected correctly. Defective original detection switch. Original is not placed correctly. Poor contact in the original size detection sensor connector terminals. Defective original size detection sensor. (23) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the drawer 1. (24) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the drawer 2*. (25) The size of paper in the drawer 1 is not displayed correctly. Poor contact in the paper switch connector terminals. Defective paper switch. If the level of YC18-5 on the engine PCB does not change when the original detection switch is turned on and off, replace the original detection switch. Check the original and correct if necessary. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. If the level of YC8-2 on the engine PCB does not change when the paper switch is turned on and off, replace the paper switch. See page 1-5-27. Check procedures/corrective measures See page 1-5-27.

Poor contact in the drawer paper switch connector terminals. Defective drawer paper switch.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. If the level of YC5-2 on the drawer main PCB does not change when the drawer paper switch is turned on and off, replace the drawer paper switch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if YC22-1,2,4 on the engine PCB goes low when the paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the paper length switch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if YC4-5,6,8 on the drawer main PCB goes low when the drawer paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the drawer paper length switch.

Poor contact in the paper length switch connector terminals. Defective paper length switch. Poor contact in the drawer paper length switch connector terminals. Defective drawer paper length switch.

(26) The size of paper in the drawer 2* is not displayed correctly.

*: 20 ppm model only.

1-5-37

2DA/2DB Problem (27) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated when the power switch is turned on. Causes A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around registration switch, exit switch or feedshift switch. Defective registration switch. Defective exit switch. Check procedures/corrective measures Check and remove if any.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the corresponding sensor is not light. Run maintenance item U031 and turn exit switch on and off manually. Replace exit switch if indication of the corresponding sensor is not light. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace feedshift switch if indication of the corresponding sensor is not light. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuity when the switch is on, replace it.

Defective feedshift switch.

(28) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover and left cover are closed. (29) Others.

Poor contact in the connector terminals of safety switch. Defective safety switch.

Wiring is broken, shorted or makes poor contact. Noise.

Check for continuity. If none, repair. Locate the source of noise and remove.

1-5-38

2DA/2DB-1

1-5-5 Mechanical problems

Problem (1) No primary paper feed. Causes/check procedures Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder: forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation pulley, registration rollers, bypass paper feed pulley, bypass separation pad, feed roller*, drawer forwarding pulley*, drawer paper feed pulley* and drawer separation pulley*. Check if the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley or separation pulley is deformed. Check if the drawer forwarding pulley*, drawer paper feed pulley* or drawer separation pulley* is deformed. Electrical problem with the following electromagnetic clutches: paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid and drawer paper feed clutch*. (2) No secondary paper feed. Check if the surfaces of the right and left registration rollers are dirty with paper powder. Electrical problem with the registration motor. (3) Skewed paper feed. Width guide in a drawer installed incorrectly. Deformed width guide in a drawer. Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place. (4) The scanner does not travel. (5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. (6) Paper jams. Check if the scanner wire is loose. The scanner motor malfunctions. Check if the separation pulley or drawer separation pulley* is worn. Check if the paper is curled. Check if the paper is excessively curled. Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct. Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed. Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct. Check if the contact between the exit roller and pulley is correct. Corrective measures Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys (see pages 1-6-3 and 5). Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys (see pages 1-6-7 to 10). See pages 1-5-35 and 36.

Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

See page 1-5-34. Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary. Repair or replace if necessary . Repair or replace. Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-623). See page 1-5-35. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn (see pages 1-6-3 and 8). Change the paper. Change the paper. Repair or replace if necessary. Check visually and remedy if necessary. Clean or replace the press roller (see page 1-6-45). Repair if any springs are off the separation claws. Check visually and remedy if necessary.

*: 20 ppm model only.

1-5-39

2DA/2DB Problem (7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. (8) Abnormal noise is heard. Causes/check procedures Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty. Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears operate smoothly. Check if the following electromagnetic clutches are installed correctly: paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid and drawer paper feed clutch*. Corrective measures Clean the developing unit.

Grease the bearings and gears. Correct.

*: 20 ppm model only.

1-5-40

2DA/2DB

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions Be sure to turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly. When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board. Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the MFP may be seriously damaged. Use the following testers when measuring voltages: Hioki 3200 Sanwa MD-180C Sanwa YX-360TR Beckman TECH300 Beckman DM45 Beckman 330* Beckman 3030* Beckman DM850* Fluke 8060A* Arlec DMM1050 Arlec YF1030C * Capable of measuring RMS values. Prepare the following as test originals: 1. NTC (new test chart) 2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)

1-6-1

2DA/2DB (2) Running a maintenance item

Start

Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.

Maintenance mode is entered.

Enter the maintenance item number using the up/down cursor keys or numeric keys.

The maintenance item is selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop/clear key.

Yes

Repeat the same maintenance item?

No

Yes

Run another maintenance item?

No Enter 001 using the up/down cursor keys or numeric keys and press the start key.

Maintenance mode is exited.

End

1-6-2

2DA/2DB

1-6-2 Paper feed section

(1) Detaching and refitting the separation pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the separation pulley. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and left cover. Remove the waste toner box. 2. Pull out the drawer.

Drawer

Figure 1-6-1 3. Remove the screw and then the front left lower cover.

Front left lower cover

Figure 1-6-2 4. Remove the screw and then the lower paper feed unit.

Lower paper feed unit

Figure 1-6-3

1-6-3

2DA/2DB 5. Remove the separation pulley unit from the lower paper feed unit. 6. Remove the separation pulley from the separation pulley unit. 7. Replace the separation pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Separation pulley

Separation pulley unit

Lower paper feed unit

Figure 1-6-4

1-6-4

2DA/2DB (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. Procedure 1. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page 1-6-3). 2. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). 3. Remove the rear cover. 4. Remove the paper feed clutch, stop ring and bushing at the machine rear.

Stop ring

Paper feed clutch Bushing

Figure 1-6-5

5. Remove the screw and then the registration guide.

Registration guide

Figure 1-6-6

6. Remove the screw and then the upper paper feed unit.

Upper paper feed unit

Figure 1-6-7

1-6-5

2DA/2DB 7. Remove the springs, stop ring and bushing and then the shaft holder from the upper paper feed unit.

Shaft holder Spring

Spring

Stop ring

Upper paper feed unit

Bushing

Figure 1-6-8

8. Remove the forwarding pulley from the upper paper feed unit. 9. Remove the paper feed pulley from the upper paper feed unit. 10. Replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Paper feed pulley

Forwarding pulley

Figure 1-6-9

1-6-6

2DA/2DB-1 (3) Detaching and refitting the feed roller (20 ppm model only) Follow the procedure below to replace the feed roller. Procedure 1. Remove the rear cover, right cover and front left lower cover. 2. Remove the three screws and then remove the main body from the paper feeder.

Screw

Screw

Paper feeder Screw

Figure 1-6-10-1 3. Open the drawer left cover. 4. Remove the two stop ring, gear and spring pin from rear side of the feed roller. * When removing the gear, take care not to lose the spring pin. 5. Slide the bearings in the front and rear of the feed roller toward the inside, push the feed roller once into the rear side of the machine, and then remove it from the paper feeder. 6. Remove the two bushing from front and rear side of the feed roller. 7. Replace the feed roller and refit all the removed parts.
Stop rings

Gear Bushing

Spring pin

Feed roller

Feed roller

Figure 1-6-10-2

Bushing

1-6-7

2DA/2DB (4) Detaching and refitting the drawer separation pulley (20 ppm model only) Follow the procedure below to replace the drawer separation pulley. Procedure 1. Pull out the drawer. Open the drawer left cover. 2. Remove the screw and then the lower paper feed unit.

Lower paper feed unit

Figure 1-6-11

3. Remove the drawer separation pulley unit from the lower paper feed unit. 4. Remove the drawer separation pulley from the drawer separation pulley unit. 5. Replace the drawer separation pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Drawer separation pulley

Drawer separation pulley unit Lower paper feed unit

Figure 1-6-12

1-6-8

2DA/2DB-1 (5) Detaching and refitting the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley (20 ppm model only) Follow the procedure below to replace the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley. Procedure 1. Remove the main body from the paper feeder (see page 1-6-7). 2. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page 1-6-8). 3. Remove the drawer rear cover. 4. Remove the stop ring and drawer paper feed clutch from the machine rear side. Remove the stop ring and bushing.

Stop ring

Stop ring

Drawer paper feed clutch

Bushing

Figure 1-6-13

5. Remove the screw and then the upper paper feed unit.

Upper paper feed unit

Figure 1-6-14

1-6-9

2DA/2DB-1 6. Remove the springs, stop ring and bushing and then the shaft holder from the upper paper feed unit.

Shaft holder Spring

Spring

Stop ring

Upper paper feed unit

Bushing

Figure 1-6-15

7. Remove the drawer forwarding pulley from the upper paper feed unit. 8. Remove the drawer paper feed pulley from the upper paper feed unit. 9. Replace the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Drawer paper feed pulley

Drawer forwarding pulley

Figure 1-6-16

1-6-10

2DA/2DB (6) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit Follow the procedure below to maintenance of the paper feed section. Procedure 1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). 2. Remove the strap from the rear side. Restore the paper conveying unit. Remove the fitting projection and pin, and then remove the stopper from the front side. 3. Open the left cover until it is put horizontally.

Left cover

Fitting projection Strap Stopper

Pin

Figure 1-6-17

4. Push the fitting portions of the fixtures located on the front and rear and then remove the fixtures from the left cover. 5. Remove the left cover from the MFP.

Fixture

Left cover

Fixture

Figure 1-6-18

1-6-11

2DA/2DB 6. Push the fitting portions of the bypass upper cover. Remove the bypass upper cover from the bypass unit.

Bypass upper cover

Figure 1-6-19 7. Detach the connector and remove the bypass lower cover from the MFP.

Connector

Bypass lower cover

Figure 1-6-20

8. Remove the paper conveying unit from the MFP.

Paper conveying unit

Figure 1-6-21

1-6-12

2DA/2DB (7) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad Follow the procedure below to replace the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and remove the waste toner box. Pull out the drawer. 2. Remove the screw and then the front left lower cover.

Front left lower cover

Figure 1-6-22

3. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-6-11). 4. Remove the stop ring and bushing at the machine front side.

Stop ring

Bushing

Figure 1-6-23

5. Remove the rear cover. 6. Remove the stop ring and bypass paper feed clutch gear at the machine rear side.

Stop ring

Bypass paper feed clutch gear

Figure 1-6-24

1-6-13

2DA/2DB 7. Temporarily push the bypass paper feed pulley unit into the rear side to unlock the front side and then remove it from the MFP.
Bypass paper feed pulley unit

Figure 1-6-25

8. Remove the bypass paper feed pulley from the bypass paper feed pulley shaft.
Bypass paper feed pulley shaft

Bypass paper feed pulley

Figure 1-6-26

9. Push the fitting portions of the bypass separation pad. Remove the bypass separation pad from the MFP. 10. Replace the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad and refit all the removed parts.

Bypass separation pad

Figure 1-6-27

1-6-14

2DA/2DB (8) Detaching and refitting the registration left roller Follow the procedure below to replace the registration left roller. Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-6-11). 2. Remove the transfer roller (see page 1-6-42). 3. Release the stoppers at the front and rear side, and then remove the registration left roller from the paper conveying unit. 4. Replace the registration left roller and refit all the removed parts.
Stopper Paper conveying unit

Stopper

Registration left roller

Figure 1-6-28 (9) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner Follow the procedure below to replace the registration cleaner. Procedure 1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). 2. Remove the screw and then the registration guide.
Trans guide film

Registration guide

Figure 1-6-29 3. Remove the screw and then the registration cleaner. 4. Replace the registration cleaner and refit all the removed parts.

Registration cleaner

Figure 1-6-30

1-6-15

2DA/2DB (10) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement Perform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches. (10-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U066 (P. 1-6-35) U071 (P. 1-4-17)

U034

Caution: Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode. Procedure
Start

Leading edge registration

Enter maintenance mode.

Enter 034 using the numeric keys.

Correct image

Output example 1

Output example 2

Figure 1-6-31
Press the start key.

Select the ADJ. RCL ON TIMING using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the start key. RCL ON: Drawer RCL BYP: Bypass tray RCL T1: Optional first paper feeder (standard for 20 ppm model) RCL T2: Optional second paper feeder RCL T3: Optional third paper feeder RCL DUP: Duplex copying (second face) Press the start key The new setting is stored Press the start key to output a test pattern.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key.

Is the leading edge registration correct? Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

For output example 1, decrease the value using the left cursor key. For output example 2, increase the value using the right cursor key. Setting range (Initial setting) RCL ON: 5.0 +10.0 (0.9) RCL BYP: 5.0 +10.0 (1.2) RCL T1: 5.0 +10.0 (1.3) RCL T2: 5.0 +10.0 (1.3) RCL T3: 5.0 +10.0 (1.3) RCL DUP: 5.0 +10.0 (1.0) Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.

End

1-6-16

2DA/2DB (10-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leading edge of the original during memory copying.
U053 (P. 1-4-13) U034 (P. 1-6-16) U065 (P. 1-6-34) U066 (P. 1-6-35) U403 (P. 1-6-37)

U407

Caution: Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Procedure

Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Original
Enter 407 using the numeric keys.

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Press the start key.

Figure 1-6-32

Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key. The new setting is stored.

Press the start key and make a test copy.

Is the leading edge registration correct? Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

For copy example 1, increase the value using the right cursor key. For copy example 2, decrease the value using the left cursor key. Setting range: 2.0 +2.0 Initilal setting: 0.0 Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.

End

1-6-17

2DA/2DB (10-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original when paper is fed from the drawer.
U067 (P. 1-6-36) U072 (P. 1-4-18)

U034

Caution: Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode. Procedure
Center line of printing Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Enter 034 using the numeric keys.

Correct image

Output example 1

Output example 2

Press the start key.

Figure 1-6-33

Select the ADJ. LSU OUT TIMING using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the start key. LSU OUT: Drawer LSU BYP: Bypass tray LSU T1: Optional first paper feeder (standard for 20 ppm model) LSU T2: Optional second paper feeder LSU T3: Optional third paper feeder LSU DUP: Duplex copying (second face) Press the start key. The new setting is stored. Press the start key to output a test pattern.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key.

Is the image correct? Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

For output example 1, decrease the value using the left cursor key. For output example 2, increase the value using the right cursor key. Setting range (Initial setting) LSU OUT: 7.0 +10.0 (1.0) LSU BYP: 7.0 +10.0 (0.4) LSU T1: 7.0 +10.0 (1.2) LSU T1: 7.0 +10.0 (1.2) LSU T1: 7.0 +10.0 (1.2) LSU DUP: 7.0 +10.0 (0.3) Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.1 mm.

End

1-6-18

2DA/2DB (10-4) Adjusting the trailing edge margin of image printing Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the trailing edges of the copy image and original. Procedure

Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Trailing edge margin Correct image Output example

Enter 034 using the numeric keys.

Figure 1-6-34
Press the start key.

Select the ADJ. MGN REAR using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the start key.

Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key The new setting is stored

Press the start key to output a test pattern.

Is the trailing edge margin correct? Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

For output example, increase the value using the right cursor key. Setting range: 4.0 +10.0 Initial setting: 0.0 Changing the value by 1 moves the trailing edge by 0.1 mm. Increasing the setting makes the margin narrower, and decreasing it makes the margin wider.

End

1-6-19

2DA/2DB-1 (10-5) Adjusting the margins for printing Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U403 (P. 1-6-37) U404 (P. 1-4-44)

U402

Caution: Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode. Procedure
Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Enter 402 using the numeric keys.

Press the start key. LEAD: Printer leading edge margin AC: Printer left/right margins TRAIL: Printer trailing edge margin Press the start key. The new setting is stored. Press the start key to output a test pattern using A3/11" 17" paper. Change the setting. Increasing the value using the right cursor key makes the margin wider. Decreasing the value using the left cursor key makes the margin narrower. Setting range (initial setting) LEAD: 0.0 +10.0 (3.0) AC: 3.4 +10.0 (3.0) TRAIL: 5.0 +10.0 (4.0) Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key.

Are the margins correct?

No

Yes Yes Proceed to another mode? No Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

Printer leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm) Ejection direction (reference) Printer left margin +1.5 (2.52.0 mm) Printer right margin (2.5+1.5 2.0 mm)

End

Printer trailing edge margin (3 2.5 mm)

Figure 1-6-35

1-6-20

2DA/2DB-1 (10-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is Z-folded. Procedure

Start

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Enter maintenance mode.

Figure 1-6-36

Enter 051 using the numeric keys. PF1: Drawer BYPASS: Bypass tray PF2: Optional first paper feeder (standard for 20 ppm model) PF3: Optional second paper feeder PF4: Optional third paper feeder DUPLEX: Duplex copying (second face) Press the start key. The new setting is stored. Press the start key to make a test copy.

Press the start key.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key.

Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly (copy example 1)? No

Yes

Increase the value using the right cuusor key.

Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy example 2)?

Yes

Decrease the value using the left cursor key. Setting range (Initial setting) PF1: 50 +127 (20) BYPASS: 50 +127 (0) PF2: 50 +127 (0) PF3: 50 +127 (20) PF4: 50 +127 (20) DUPLEX: 50 +127 (0) The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.

No Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

End

1-6-21

2DA/2DB

1-6-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Take the following procedure when the exposure lamp is to be replaced. Procedure 1. Remove the original cover or the DP. 2. Remove the two screws holding the upper right cover and then the cover. Remove the contact glass.
Contact glass

Upper right cover

Figure 1-6-37 3. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the machine. * When moving the mirror 1 frame, do not touch the exposure lamp nor the inverter PCB. 4. Detach the exposure lamp connector from the inverter PCB and release the wire from three clamps.
Clamps

Connector

Inverter PCB

Figure 1-6-38 5. Remove the two screws holding the exposure lamp and then the lamp. 6. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the removed parts.

Exposure lamp

Figure 1-6-39

1-6-22

2DA/2DB (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced. (2-1) Detaching the scanner wires Procedure 1. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-622). 2. Remove the two screws holding the upper rear cover and then the cover. Remove the two screws holding the middle left cover and upper left cover and then the covers.
Upper rear cover

Upper left cover Middle left cover

Figure 1-6-40 3. Remove the screw and then the slit retainer and slit glass. Detach the fitting portions and then remove the front scanner cover.
Slit glass

Front scanner cover

Slit retainer

Figure 1-6-41 4. Remove the inverter wire guide and then detach the inverter wire from the inverter PCB.
Inverter wire guide

Inverter wire Inverter PCB

Figure 1-6-42

1-6-23

2DA/2DB 5. Remove the screw holding each of the front and rear wire retainers and then remove the mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit.
Mirror 1 frame

Front wire retainer

Rear wire retainer

Figure 1-6-43

6. Unhook the round terminal of the scanner wire from the scanner tension spring on the left side of the scanner unit. 7. Remove the scanner wire.

Round terminal Round terminal

Scanner tension springs

Figure 1-6-44

1-6-24

2DA/2DB (2-2) Fitting the scanner wires Caution: When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below. Machine front: P/N 2C91236 (gray) Machine rear: P/N 2C91235 (black) Fitting requires the following tools: Two frame securing tools (P/N 2AV6808) Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811) Procedure 1. Remove the screw and then scanner wire drum gear at the machine rear side.

Scanner wire drum gear

Figure 1-6-45

2. Remove the stop ring and bushing from the front of the scanner wire drum shaft. 3. Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the scanner unit.

Scanner wire drum shaft

Bushing

Stop ring

Figure 1-6-46

1-6-25

2DA/2DB 4. Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner wires into the hole in the respective scanner wire drum and wind the scanner wire three turns inward and four turns outward. With the locating ball as the reference point, wind the shorter end of each of the wires outward. 5. Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers.

Scanner wire stoppers

Three turns inward

Three turns inward

Locating ball Four turns outward Scanner wire drum Four turns outward

Figure 1-6-47

6. Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the scanner unit. 7. Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame in position.

Frame securing tool Frame securing tool

Mirror 2 frame

Figure 1-6-48

1-6-26

2DA/2DB 8. Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above. ......................................................................................................................... 1 9. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit. .............................................................. 2 10. Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the left of the scanner unit, winding from below to above. ......................................................................................................................... 3 11. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above to below. .............................................................................................................................................................. 4 12. Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit. ........ 5 13. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension springs. .......................................................................... 6

Figure 1-6-49

14. Remove the scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools. 15. Gather the scanner wires toward the locating balls. 16. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position. 17. Put the mirror 1 frame on the scanner rail and move it toward the left side of the machine. 18. Insert the frame securing tools into the positioning holes (leftmost holes) at the front and the rear of the scanner unit and screw the mirror 1 frame while securing both the mirror 1 frame and the mirror 2 frame. 19. Remove the two frame securing tools. 20. Refit all the removed parts.

Frame securing tool Frame securing tool

Mirror 2 frame Mirror 1 frame

Figure 1-6-50

1-6-27

2DA/2DB (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be replaced. Procedure Detaching the ISU 1. Remove the contact glass (see page 1-6-22). 2. Remove the four screws holding the ISU cover and then the cover.

ISU cover

Figure 1-6-51 3. Detach the CCD wire from the CCD PCB. 4. Remove the four screws holding the ISU and then the ISU. 5. Replace the ISU.
CCD PCB CCD wire

ISU

Figure 1-6-52 Refitting the ISU 1. Align the positioning holes of the ISU by pushing it a little and attach the ISU to the scanner unit. * Attach the ISU with reference to marking "C". 2. Secure the ISU using the four screws. 3. Refit the CCD wire to CCD PCB. 4. Refit all the removed parts.
ISU Positioning holes

C M

Marking

Figure 1-6-53

1-6-28

2DA/2DB (4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be replaced. Procedure 1. Remove the original cover or the DP. 2. Remove the upper right cover, contact glass, upper rear cover, middle left cover, upper left cover, slit glass and front scanner cover (see page 1-6-23). 3. Remove the four screws holding the right cover and then the cover. Remove the seven screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.

Right cover Rear cover

Figure 1-6-54

4. Detach the connector YC8 on the main PCB. Detach the connectors YC16, YC17, YC18 and YC19 on the engine PCB.

YC8

YC16

YC19 YC17 YC18

Figure 1-6-55

1-6-29

2DA/2DB 5. Remove the four pins holding the scanner unit and then the unit.
Pin Scanner unit Pin Pin

Pin

Figure 1-6-56 6. Remove the screw holding the exit cover and then the cover. Remove the two screws holding the inner rear cover and then the cover.
Exit cover Inner rear cover

Figure 1-6-57 7. Remove the front and rear left cover.

Rear left cover

Figure 1-6-58

Front left cover

1-6-30

2DA/2DB 8. Remove the two screws holding the exit unit and then pull out the unit a little.

Exit unit

Figure 1-6-59 9. Remove the exit tray.

Exit tray

Figure 1-6-60

10. Remove the four screws and detach the two connector and then remove the laser scanner unit. 11. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all the removed parts.

Connector

Laser scanner unit

Connector

Figure 1-6-61

1-6-31

2DA/2DB (5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness not obtained). Caution: Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (page 1-6-21) first. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image, and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment. Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment. Procedure

Start
Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2

Place the original on the contact glass.

Figure 1-6-62

Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification.

Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass.

Is the image correct?

No

Yes

Remove the contact glass. Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame. For copy example 1, move the frame in the direction of the white arrow (e). For copy example 2, move the frame in the direction of the black arrow (b).

End

Screws

Figure 1-6-63

1-6-32

2DA/2DB (6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.
U053 (P. 1-4-13) U065 (main scanning direction) U065 (auxiliary scanning direction) (P. 1-6-34) U067 (P. 1-6-36)

Caution: Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Also, perform (7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (page 1-6-34) and (9) Adjusting the scanner center line (page 1-6-36) after this adjustment. Procedure

Start Enter maintenance mode.

Original
Enter 065 using the numeric keys. Press the start key.

Copy example

Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-64

Select the MAIN SCAN ADJ using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key. The new setting is stored.

Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.

Is the image correct?

No

For copy example 1, increase the value using the right cursor key. For copy example 2, decrease the value using the left cursor key. Setting range: 25 +25 Initial setting: 0 Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%. Increasing the value makes the image wider, and decreasing it makes the image narrower.

Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

End

1-6-33

2DA/2DB (7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.
U053 (P. 1-4-13) U065 (main scanning direction) (P. 1-6-33) U065 (auxiliary scanning direction) U070 (P. 1-4-16)

Caution: Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Procedure

Start Enter maintenance mode.

Original

Enter 065 using the numeric keys. Press the start key.

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-65

Select the SUB SCAN ADJ using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.

Press the start key. The new setting is stored.

Is the image correct?

No

For copy example 1, increase the value using the right cursor key. For copy example 2, decrease the value using the left cursor key. Setting range: 25 +25 Initial setting: 10 Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%. Increasing the value makes the image longer, and decreasing it make the image shorter.

Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

End

1-6-34

2DA/2DB (8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Perform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U034 (P. 1-6-16) U071 (P. 1-4-17)

U066

Caution: Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Procedure
Scanner leading edge registration

Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2

Enter 066 using the numeric keys.

Figure 1-6-66
Press the start key.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

ADJUST DATA 1: ADJUST DATA 2:

Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key. The new setting is stored.

Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.

Is the scanner leading edge registration correct? Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

For copy example 1, decrease the value using the left cursor key. For copy example 2, increase the value using the right cursor key. Setting range (Initial setting) ADJUST DATA 1: 32 +32 (7) ADJUST DATA 2: 20 +20 (0) Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.17 mm.

End

1-6-35

2DA/2DB (9) Adjusting the scanner center line Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
U034 (P. 1-6-18) U072 (P. 1-4-18)

U067

Caution: Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Procedure
Scanner center line

Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Original
Enter 067 using the numeric keys.

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-67
Press the start key.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

ADJUST DATA 1: ADJUST DATA 2:

Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key. The new setting is stored.

Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.

Is the scanner center line correct? Yes Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

For copy example 1, decrease the value using the left cursor key. For copy example 2, increase the value using the right cursor key. Setting range (Initial setting) ADJUST DATA 1: 39 +39 (4) ADJUST DATA 2: 39 +39 (0) Changing the value by 1 moves the center line ADJUST DATA 1: 0.17 mm ADJUST DATA 2: 0.084 mm

End

1-6-36

2DA/2DB-1 (10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U402 (P. 1-6-20) U404 (P. 1-4-44)

U403

Caution: Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Procedure
Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Enter 403 using the numeric keys.

Press the start key. A MARGIN: Scanner left margin B MARGIN: Scanner leading edge margin C MARGIN: Scanner right margin D MARGIN: Scanner trailing edge margin Press the start key. The new setting is stored.

Select the items to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys.

Press the interrupt key.

Press the start key to make a test copy (A test copy is output at the reduction ratio of 95%).

Are the margins correct? Yes Yes Proceed to another mode? No Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.

No

Change the setting. Increasing the value using the right cursor key makes the margin wider. Decreasing the value using the left cursor key makes the margin narrower. Setting range (Initial setting) A MARGIN: 0.0 +10.0 (2.0) B MARGIN: 0.0 +10.0 (3.0) C MARGIN: 0.0 +10.0 (2.0) D MARGIN: 0.0 +10.0 (2.0) Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.

Scanner leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm) Ejection direction (reference) Scanner left margin (2.5+1.5 2.0 mm) Scanner right margin (2.5+1.5 2.0 mm)

End

Scanner trailing edge margin (3 2.5 mm)

Figure 1-6-68

1-6-37

2DA/2DB

1-6-4 Drum section

(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit. Cautions: Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit. Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and left cover. Remove the waste toner box and toner container. 2. Remove the inner cover. 3. Remove the screw holding the developing release lever. 4. Pull the developing release lever and then release the developing unit.
Inner cover

Developing release lever

Figure 1-6-69

5. Remove the screw and detach the connector and then remove the drum unit from MFP. 6. Replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts.

Connector

Drum unit

Figure 1-6-70

1-6-38

2DA/2DB (2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claws. Procedure 1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). 2. Push the drum separation claws with the minus driver from the top of the corner hole and remove the claws. 3. Replace the drum separation claws and refit all the removed parts.

Drum unit

Drum separation claws

Coner hole

Drum separation claw

Figure 1-6-71

1-6-39

2DA/2DB (3) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and remove the waste toner box and inner cover. 2. While lifting the main charger unit toward the upper right, remove the unit from the MFP. 3. While pressing the main charger release lever in the direction indicated by the arrow at the removal stopper position to release the removal stopper, remove the main charger unit from the MFP. 4. Replace the main charger unit and refit all the removed parts.

Main charger release lever

Main charger unit

Figure 1-6-72

1-6-40

2DA/2DB

1-6-5 Developing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit. Procedure 1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). 2. While lifting the developing unit a little, remove the unit from the MFP. 3. Replace the developing unit and refit all the removed parts.

Developing unit

Figure 1-6-73

1-6-41

2DA/2DB

1-6-6 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller. Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-6-11). 2. Remove the screw holding each of the front and rear release lever stoppers and then the stoppers from the release lever shaft.

Rear release lever stopper Front release lever stopper

Paper conveying unit

Figure 1-6-74

3. Detach the fitting portions located on the front and rear and then remove the transfer roller from the paper conveying unit. 4. Replace the transfer roller and refit all the removed parts.

Paper conveying unit

Transfer roller

Fitting portion

Fitting portion

Figure 1-6-75

1-6-42

2DA/2DB-1

1-6-7 Fixing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and left cover and then remove the inner cover. 2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like through the groove at the left side of the machine and unlock the engaged portion of front left cover 1 to remove it.

Front left cover 1

Figure 1-6-76
Front left cover 2

3. Remove the screw and then remove the front left cover 2.
Screw

Figure 1-6-77 4. Remove the screw and then remove the stopper and spacer. When attaching the spacer, place the fixing unit on the original step.

Stopper Spacer

Figure 1-6-78

1-6-43

2DA/2DB-1 5. Remove the screw and detach the two connectors and then remove the fixing unit from MFP. 6. Replace the fixing unit and refit all the removed parts.

Connectors

Fixing unit

Figure 1-6-79

1-6-44

2DA/2DB-1 (2) Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-43). 2. Remove the two screws and then separate the fixing right unit and left unit.
Fixing right unit

Fixing left unit

Figure 1-6-80

3. Remove the three screws holding the press roller guide from fixing right unit.

Press roller guide

Fixing right unit

Figure 1-6-81

4. Remove the press roller from the fixing right unit. 5. Replace the press roller and refit all the removed parts.

Fixing right unit

Press roller

Figure 1-6-82

1-6-45

2DA/2DB-1 (3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing heater M and S. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit and separate the fixing right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45). 2. Remove the two screws holding each of the fixing heater M and S on the front and rear of the fixing left unit.
Fixing heater S Fixing heater S

Fixing heater M

Fixing heater M

Figure 1-6-83

3. Pull out the fixing heater M and S from the fixing left unit. 4. Replace the fixing heater M and S, and refit all the removed parts.

Fixing heater M

Fixing heater S

Figure 1-6-84

1-6-46

2DA/2DB-1 (4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit and separate the fixing right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45). 2. Detach the fitting portions and then remove the heat roller guide from the fixing left unit.

Fixing left unit

Heat roller guide

Figure 1-6-85

3. Remove the heat roller separation claws from the fixing left unit. 4. Replace the heat roller separation claws and refit all the removed parts.

Fixing left unit

Heat roller separation claws

Figure 1-6-86

1-6-47

2DA/2DB-1 (5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit and separate the fixing right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45). 2. Remove the heat roller separation claws. (see page 1-6-47). 3. Pull out the heat roller bushing from the fixing left unit and then remove the heat roller. 4. Replace the heat roller and refit all the removed parts.

Heat roller bushing

Heat roller

Heat roller bushing

Fixing left unit

Figure 1-6-87

1-6-48

2DA/2DB-1 (6) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermostat Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing thermostat. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit and separate the fixing right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45). 2. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-48). 3. Remove the two screws holding the fixing thermostat and then the thermostat. 4. Replace the fixing thermostat and refit all the removed parts.

Fixing thermostat

Figure 1-6-88

(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermistor Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing thermistor. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit and separate the fixing right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45). 2. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-48). 3. Remove the screw holding the fixing thermistor and then the thermistor. 4. Replace the fixing thermistor and refit all the removed parts.

Fixing thermistor

Figure 1-6-89

1-6-49

2DA/2DB-1 (8) Adjusting the fixing unit height (adjusting lateral squareness) Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fixing unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fixing section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer. Procedure 1. Remove the front left cover 1 and 2 (see pages 1-6-43). 2. Remove the screw and then remove the stopper. 3. Loosen the screw holding the fixing unit.

Stopper Screw Spacer

Figure 1-6-90

4. In the case of copy example 1 (the trailing edge of image of the machine rear side becomes longer): Place the fixing unit on the third step from the bottom of the spacer to adjust the spacer position (height adjustment of +0.5 mm). In the case of copy example 2 (the trailing edge of image of the machine front side becomes longer): Place the fixing unit on the first step from the bottom of the spacer to adjust the spacer position (height adjustment of -0.5 mm).
Height adjustment: 0 mm (Second step from the bottom) Fixing unit

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-91

Height adjustment: +0.5 mm (Third step from the bottom)

Height adjustment: -0.5 mm (First step from the bottom)

Spacer

Stopper [Cross section viewing from the right side of the machine]

Figure 1-6-92

5. Retighten the screw holding the fixing unit and refit the stopper. 6. Refit all the removed parts.

1-6-50

2DA/2DB-1

1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB

Firmware upgrading requires the following tools: Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.) NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance. Procedure 1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Insert Compact Flash in a socket of the machine (insert the surface of Compact Flash toward the machine rear). 4. Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts. Caution: Never turn the power switch off during upgrading. 5. Completed is indicated on the message display when upgrading is complete. 6. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 7. Remove Compact Flash from the machine and refit the rear cover. 8. Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on.

Compact Flash Socket

Figure 1-7-1

1-7-1

2DA/2DB

1-7-2 Upgrading the printer board firmware

Firmware upgrading requires the following tools: Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.) NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance. Procedure 1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 2. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine (insert the surface of Compact Flash toward the machine rear). 3. Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts. Caution: Never turn the power switch off during upgrading. 4. Completed is indicated on the message display when upgrading is complete. 5. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug. 6. Remove Compact Flash from the machine and refit the rear cover. 7. Insert the power plug and turn the power switch on.

Compact Flash

Notch hole

Figure 1-7-2

1-7-2

2DA/2DB

1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)

The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field. High-voltage PCB: VR201, VR202, VR301 Drum unit zener PCB: VR1

1-7-4 Remarks on PCBs replacement

Confirm the version of the firmware and upgrade the version in up-to-date state when replacing PCBs. When replacing the engine PCB or main PCB, remove the EEPROM from the engine PCB or main PCB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PCB or main PCB.
EEPROM

EEPROM

Figure 1-7-3

1-7-3

2DA/2DB

2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed section conveys paper from the drawer (one drawer is standard for 16 ppm model/two drawers are standard for 20 ppm model) or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing. Drawer can hold up to 300 sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque limiter. The bypass tray can hold up to 50 sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the bypass tray by the rotation of the bypass paper feed pulley.

Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section

1 Separation pulley 2 Forwarding pulley 3 Paper feed pulley 4 Bypass paper feed pulley 5 Bypass separation pad 6 Left registration roller 7 Right registration roller 8 Drawer lift 9 Registration switch (RSW)

0 Bypass paper width switch (BYPPWSW) ! Drawer paper feed pulley* @ Drawer forwarding pulley* # Drawer separation pulley* $ Feed roller* % Feed pulley* ^ Drawer lift* & Drawer feed switch (DFSW)* *: 20 ppm model only

2-1-1

2DA/2DB

RMPCB RM RM YC2-1,2,4,5 YC1-4 RM

EPCB YC4-4

RSW DPCB RSW PFCL YC5-12 YC2-1 YC1-9 YC1-15 RSW PFCL YC8-9 YC8-3

PFCL

BYPPFSOL

BYPPFSOL

YC3-2

YC1-13

BYPPFCL

YC8-5

PSW BYPPWSW

PSW BYPPWSW

YC6-2

YC1-16

PSW BYPPWSW

YC8-2

YC5-9

YC1-10

YC8-8

PLSW

PLSW

YC22-1,2,4

YC10

DPFCL* DDM* DFSW*

DPFCL DDM A,B,_A,_B DFSW

YC3 YC8-2 YC9-2,3,4,5 YC6-2 DMPCB*

*: 20 ppm model only

Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed section block diagram

2-1-2

2DA/2DB

Primary feed

Secondary feed 105 ms

Primary feed

Secondary feed 105 ms 250 ms

PFCL

550 ms 1900 ms 430 ms 430 ms 150 ms 320 ms 150 ms

RSW

RM 330 ms Dev.BIAS

Separation charging

290 ms 100 ms 10 ms 670 ms

290 ms

10 ms

Transfer charging 2020 ms ESW

Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the drawer (A4, single-sided copy) a: The paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on to start primary paper feed. b: 430 ms after the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on, the registration switch (RSW) turns on. c: 105 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns on, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns off. d: 150 ms after the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on, the registration motor (RM) turns on to start secondary paper feed. e: 550 ms after the registration motor (RM) turns on, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns off. f: 1900 ms after the registration motor (RM) turns on, the registration switch (RSW) turns off. At the same time, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on to start primary paper feed of the second sheet. g: 320 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns off, the registration motor (RM) turns off.

2-1-3

2DA/2DB

2-1-2 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frames and the image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unit for printing.

Figure 2-1-3 Optical section

1 Mirror 1 frame 2 Mirror 2 frame 3 Exposure lamp (EL) 4 Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 3 7 Image scanning unit (ISU) 8 CCD PCB (CCDPCB) 9 Laser scanner unit (LSU) 0 Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) ! Original detection switch (ODSW) @ Original size detection sensor (OSDS)

2-1-4

2DA/2DB (1) Original scanning The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the image scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal. The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. When the DP is used, the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning.

Original

YC2-1 EL CCDPCB YC2-3

INPCB SM YC1-1,6

EL ON

MPCB

YC8-1YC8-18 YC6-1YC6-22 YC1-1YC1-22

YC17-1,6

YC16 -1,2,3,4

YC7-1YC7-7

YC1-1YC1-7 YC2-2

EPCB APCPCB YC19-2

SM

OSDS

OSDS

PDN

YC18-5 PM PM YC3-3 YC18-2 LSU

ODSW

ODSW

PDPCB

SHPSW

SHPSW

Figure 2-1-4 Optional section block diagram

2-1-5

2DA/2DB (2) Image printing The image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface.

Drum

Figure 2-1-5 Laser scanner unit

1 Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum. 2 Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam. 3 Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution. 4 Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 23619 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam toward the drum for one main-direction scan. 5 Polygon motor: Drives the polygon mirror. 6 F lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum surface. 7 F lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum surface. 8 PD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the PD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal. 9 Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the PD sensor mirror to the PD sensor. 0 PD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the PD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PCB (MPCB) to provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.

2-1-6

2DA/2DB The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-6.

Less than 100 m

Less than 85 m

Figure 2-1-6

Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction is provided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum. The static latent image of the letter A, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-7. Electrical charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser. The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.

Main scanning direction

Auxilary scanning direction

: laser beam is on

Figure 2-1-7

2-1-7

2DA/2DB

2-1-3 Drum section

The drum section consists of the drum, main charger section, cleaning section and cleaning lamp. The main charger section consists of main charger wire, main charger grid and main charger shield, and the drum is charged by a high voltage applied to the main charger wire. In addition, this section is equipped with a manual main charger cleaner that is used for cleaning the main charger wire. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and cleaning roller that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box. The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface.

Figure 2-1-8 Drum section

1 Drum 2 Main charger unit 3 Main charger wire 4 Drum separation claw 5 Cleaning roller 6 Cleaning spiral 7 Cleaning blade 8 Cleaning lamp (CL)

2-1-8

2DA/2DB

CL

CL

YC3-7,8

MC Grid

YC1-8 YC1-12

MHVADJC MHVDRN

YC9-9 YC9-5

Drum

ZENER PCB

HVTPCB

EPCB

Figure 2-1-9 Drum section block diagram

DM ESW 100 ms Main charging CL 840 ms

Timing chart 2-1-2 Main charging section operation a: The drive motor (DM) turns on at the same time, the cleaning lamp (CL) turns on. b: 100 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, main charging starts. c: 840 ms after the exit switch (ESW) off, main charging is completed. d: The drive motor (DM) turns off at the same time, the cleaning lamp (CL) turns off.

2-1-9

2DA/2DB

2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container. The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and the developing spirals that agitate the toner. Also, the toner container sensor (TCS) checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container.

Figure 2-1-10 Developing section

1 Developing unit 2 Developing roller 3 Doctor blade 4 Left developing spiral 5 Right developing spiral 6 Toner container 7 Toner container sensor (TCS) 8 Toner container detection switch (TCDSW)

2-1-10

2DA/2DB (1) Formation of magnetic brush The developing roller consists of a magnet roller with four poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller around the magnet roller entrains toner, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height of the magnetic brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on the magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade. A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing roller to provide image contrast.

Doctor blade A 94 S2 86

N1

N2

Developing roller

100 S1

A: Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller; 0.3 0.05 mm

N1:870 10-4T N2:400 10-4T S1:725 10-4T S2:910 10-4T

Figure 2-1-11 Forming a magnetic brush

Drum DB

HVTPCB EPCB DB

OFS

OFS

YC3-14

TCDSW

TCDSW

YC22-5

YC8-10

YC1-8 TCS TCS YC4-2 DPCB

Figure 2-1-12 Developing section block diagram

2-1-11

2DA/2DB (2) Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system, and reversal processing is performed with a + charged drum (a-Si) and a + charged magnetic toner. With the single component developing system, toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and + charged when it passes through the magnetic doctor blade. The toner that has passed through the magnetic doctor blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve. When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum, toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole. Then, when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum, on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed. On the other hand, on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed. When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large, an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve. Development is complete.

Magnetic toner blade

Toner South pole

Drum

North pole Developing sleeve

Figure 2-1-13 Single component developing system Developing bias parameters For the bias to the developing sleeve, an alternating current (AC) is applied. Parameters for the developing bias are shown below. Vp-p: Difference between the maximum and the minimum of applied voltage 1.6 kV (fixed) Vf: Frequency Typically 2.7 kHz. This value varies depending on the preset value of the drive time and the environmental correction. (Can be adjusted with the maintenance item U101.) Duty: Ratio of time where + voltage is applied in a cycle Typically 45%. (Can be adjusted with the maintenance item U101.) Vdc: Developing shift bias potential 290 V Supplementation Vo: Drum surface potential on non-image area (area not exposed to light) VL: Drum surface potential on image area (area exposed to light)

Duty

Vo Vdc VL 0

Vp-p

Vf

Figure 2-1-14 Developing bias waveformsa

2-1-12

2DA/2DB

2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections

The transfer and separation sections consists of the transfer roller, separation electrode and drum separation claws. A high voltage generated by the high-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging. Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) to the separation electrode.

Figure 2-1-15 Transfer and separation sections 1 Transfer roller 2 Separation electrode 3 Drum separation claw 4 Drum

YC9-3 YC9-7 YC9-11 YC9-13 MPCB

SHVISELN SHVDRN THVDRN THVADJ

YC1-14 YC1-10 YC1-6

SC

Separation electrode Drum

Transfer roller TC

YC1-4 HVTPCB

Figure 2-1-16 Transfer and separation sections block diagram

2-1-13

2DA/2DB

Primary feed

Secondary feed 105 ms 250 ms

Primary feed

Secondary feed 105 ms 250 ms

PFCL 1900 ms 430 ms RSW 150 ms RM 330 ms Dev.BIAS 320 ms 150 ms 430 ms

290 ms Separation charging 100 ms 10 ms Transfer charging 2020 ms ESW 670 ms 10 ms

Timing chart 2-1-3 Transfer and separation sections operation a: 290 ms after the registration motor (RM) turns on to start secondary paper feed, separation charging starts. b: 10 ms after separation charging starts, transfer charging starts. c: 670 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns off, transfer charging ends. d: 100 ms after transfer charging ends, separation charging ends.

2-1-14

2DA/2DB

2-1-6 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in figure. When paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer process, it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by fixing heaters M and S (FH-M/FH-S). Pressure is applied by the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper. The heat roller is heated by fixing heaters M and S (FH-M/FH-S) inside it; its surface temperature is detected by the fixing thermistor (FTH) and is regulated by the fixing heaters turning on and off. If the fixing section becomes abnormally hot, fixing thermostat (FTS) operates shutting the power to the fixing heaters off. When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed from the MFP to exit and switchback section.

1 Left fixing unit 2 Right fixing unit 3 Press roller 4 Heat roller 5 Fixing heater M (FH-M) 6 Fixing heater S (FH-S) 7 Heat roller separation claw 8 Fixing thermostat (FTS)

Figure 2-1-17 Fixing section

Heat roller FTS FH-M FH-S FTH YC6-1 PSPCB YC6-2 LIVE YC6-3 AC COM

YC2-8 FH-M FTH YC21-7

EPCB

Figure 2-1-18 Fixing section block diagram

CN3-12

YC21-8

FH-S

YC2-7

2-1-15

2DA/2DB-1 (1) Fixing temperature system

Temperature (C) Preset temperature (C) (secondary stabilization)

Warm-up control

Ready state control

Time

500 ms

HEAT signal HEAT signal

On On

Off Off

On On

Off Off

On On

Fixing heater S (FH-S) Fixing heater M (FH-M)

Figure 2-1-19 Fixing temperature system Warm-up control 1. 500 ms after the fixing heater S (FH-S) turns on, the fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on. 2. When the fixing temperature reaches preset temperature, both fixing heater S (FH-S) and fixing heater M (FH-M) turn off simultaneously. Ready state control 1. When the fixing temperature drops to the preset temperature, fixing heater S (FH-S) turns on, and after specified time, the heater turns off. 2. When fixing heater S (FH-S) turns off, fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on at the same time, and after specified time, the heater turns off. 3. The operation above is repeated to keep the fixing temperature to the preset temperature. * If a temperature more than or equal to the preset temperature + 20C/68F is detected, both fixing heater S (FH-S) and fixing heater M (FH-M) are turned off forcibly. (2) Fixing temperature control based on ambient temperature This machine performs fixing temperature control based on the ambient temperature.

Ambient temperature Lower than 13C/55.4F

Fixing temperature (C) Reference value +10

Higher than or equal to 13C/55.4F, Reference value +5 lower than 18C/64.4F Higher than or equal to 18C/64.4F, Reference value lower than 31C/87.8F Higher than 31C/87.8F Reference value -5

2-1-16

2DA/2DB

2-1-7 Exit and switchback sections

The exit and switchback sections exit paper on which fixing has ended with the exit roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the exit motor. In duplex copying, paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the exit motor.

1 Feedshift guide 2 Exit roller 3 Exit pulley 4 Feedshift guide 5 Switchback roller 6 Switchback pulley 7 Exit switch (ESW) 8 Feedshift switch (FSSW)

Figure 2-1-20 Exit and switchback sections

EM

EM

YC14-1,2,3,4

ESW

ESW

YC15-2

FSSW

FSSW

EPCB YC15-3

Figure 2-1-21 Exit and switchback sections block diagram

2-1-17

2DA/2DB

2-1-8 Duplex section

In duplex mode, after copying on to the reverse face of the paper, the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex unit. The paper is then conveyed to the MFP paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers.

1 Duplex feed pulley 2 Upper duplex feed roller 3 Duplex feed pulley 4 Lower duplex feed roller 5 Duplex paper conveying switch (DPPCSW)

Figure 2-1-22 Duplex section

DPCB

EPCB

DUPPCSW

DUPPCSW

YC5-5

YC1-11

DUPPCSW

YC8-7

DUPFCL

DUPFCL

YC5-8

YC1-12

DUPFCL

YC8-6

Figure 2-1-23 Duplex section block diagram

2-1-18

2DA/2DB (1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section, the exit motor switches from forward rotation to reverse rotation to switch the exit roller to reverse rotation, and the paper conveying direction is reversed. Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex unit via the exit roller and the switchback roller. Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex unit is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed.

Exit roller

Switchback roller

Exit roller

Exit roller

Upper duplex feed roller

Lower duplex feed roller Copying onto reverse side (forward rotation of exit motor) Switchback operation (reverse rotation of exit motor) Copying onto front side (forward rotation of exit motor)

Paper path

Figure 2-1-24

2-1-19

2DA/2DB

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

(1) PCBs

5 6

13

10

9 2 12 4 3

11

Machine front

Figure 2-2-1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Engine PCB (EPCB) .................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical components and optional devices. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the operation panel and laser scanner unit. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates +24 V DC and 5V DC; controls the fixing heater. High-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) ...................... Main charging. Generates high voltages for transfer and high voltages for separation. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) ........................ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs. Drawer PCB (DPCB) ................................... Controls the electrical components. APC PCB (APCPCB) ................................... Generates and controls the laser light. PD PCB (PDPCB) ........................................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam. Registration motor PCB (RMPCB) ............... Controls the registration motor. Printer board PCB (PRNPCB) ..................... Controls the printer functions. LCD PCB (LCDPCB) ................................... Controls the display of LCD. Drawer main PCB (DMPCB)*1 ............................ Controls electrical components of the drawer. Drawer heater PCB (DHPCB)*1 ......................... Relays the drawer heater power.

;
14

15

Machine inside

Machine rear

PCBs

*1: Optional for 16 ppm model./Standard for 20 ppm model.

2-2-1

2DA/2DB (2) Switches and sensors

10

12

13

17

2 23 16 11 14 7 4 6 15 1

18 19

20 21

Machine front

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Power switch (POWSW) .............................. Turns the AC power on and off. Front cover safety switch (FCSSW) ............. Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened. Left cover safety switch (LCSSW) ............... Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover is opened. Paper switch (PSW) ..................................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer. Paper size length switch (PLSW) ................ Detects the length of paper in the drawer. Paper size width switch (PWSW) ................ Detects the width of paper in the drawer. Bypass paper size width switch (BYPPWSW) ................................................ Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) .... Detects the optical system in the home position. Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... Operates the original size detection sensor. Original size detection sensor (OSDS) ........ Detects the size of the original. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing. Exit switch (ESW) ........................................ Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section. Feedshift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy. Toner container sensor (TCS) ...................... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container. Toner container detection switch (TCDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner container. Overflow sensor (OFS) ................................ Detects when the waste toner box is full. Fixing thermistor (FTH) ................................ Detects the heat roller temperature. Drawer left cover safety switch (DLCSSW)*1 ................................................................ Breaks the safety circuit when the drawer left cover is opened.

22

Machine inside

Machine rear

2-2-2

2DA/2DB 19. Drawer feed switch (DFSW)*1 ............................. Detects a paper misfeed. 20. Drawer paper switch (DPSW)*1 .......................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer. 21. Drawer paper size width switch (DPWSW)*1 .................................................................. Detects the width of paper in the drawer. 22. Drawer paper size length switch (DPLSW)*1 .................................................................... Detects the length of paper in the drawer. 23. Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*2 ............................................................ Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex unit. *1: Optional for 16 ppm model./Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.

2-2-3

2DA/2DB (3) Motors

3 4 6 5 1

Machine front

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine. 2. Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the optical system. 3. Exit motor (EM) ............................................ Drives the exit section. 4. Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ........................ Cools the machine interior. 5. Cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2) ........................ Cools the machine interior. 6. Cooling fan motor 3 (CFM3) ........................ Cools the machine interior. 7. Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror. 8. Registration motor (RM) ............................... Drives the registration roller. 9. Drawer drive motor (DDM)*1 ................................ Drives the drawer section. *1: Optional for 16 ppm model./Standard for 20 ppm model.

Machine inside

Machine rear

2-2-4

2DA/2DB-1 (4) Other electrical components

6 5 7

4 11 8 1

10

Machine front

Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Paper feed clutch (PFCL) ............................ Primary paper feed from the drawer. Bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) .. Primary paper feed from the bypass tray. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface. Fixing heater M (FH-M) ................................ Heats the heat roller. Fixing heater S (FH-S) ................................. Heats the heat roller. Fixing thermostat (FTS) ............................... Prevents overheating in the fixing section. Drawer heater (DH)*2 .............................................. Dehumidifies the drawer section. Drawer heater (DH)*2 .............................................. Dehumidifies the drawer section. Drawer paper feed clutch (DPFCL)*1 ............... Primary paper feed from the drawer. Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)*2 ......................... Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller.

Machine inside

Machine rear

*1: Optional for 16 ppm model./Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.

2-2-5

2DA/2DB-1

2-3-1 Power source PCB

CN1 T1 D101 D1 Q2 C5 Energy save control circuit F3 L4 F2 L3 Switching control circuit Rectifier circuit DH1.LIVE DH1.OUT PC4 D33 D30 PC5 PC1 DH2.LIVE DH2.OUT AC Zero-cross circuit detection circuit Fixing heater ON/OFF circuit (TRA1,TR201) SH.OUT H.LIVE MH.OUT Fixing heater control circuit PC3 Zero-cross output circuit Overvoltage detection circuit D109 D104 5 V DC 3-terminal regulator (IC301) +5V1 ZCROSSC Q1 C101 C104 D206 5 V DC output circuit IC101 Energy save control circuit Q153 Q154 +5V D111 D110 24 V DC output circuit +24V Q151 +24V1 GND

Power switch

F1

L1 L2

AC INPUT

C102 C105

SLEPN GND

+24V2

PC2 PC201

SHEATN MHEATN

Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram

The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC and 5 V DC. It includes a rectifier circuit, a switching regulator circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5 V DC output circuit, overvoltage detection circuit, zero-cross circuit and a fixing heater control circuit. The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input using the diode bridge D1. The smoothing capacitor (C5) smoothes out the pulsed current from the diode bridge. In the switching control circuit, switching circuit turns the power MOSFET (Q1) on and off to switch the voltage induced in the primary coil of the transformer (T1). The 5 V DC output circuit rectifies and smoothes the voltage induced in the secondary coil of the transformer (T1) via diodes (D102) and smoothing capacitors (C102, C105), and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit (IC101). For 5 V DC output, the switching circuit of the switching control circuit changes the duty of the switching pulse width of the power MOSFET (Q1) via a photo coupler (PC1) based on the output voltage status to adjust the 5 V DC output. The 24 V DC output circuit rectifies and smoothes the voltage induced in the secondary coil of the transformer (T1) via diodes (D101) and smoothing capacitors (C101, C104), and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit (IC101). The zero-cross circuit detects zero-crossing of the AC input voltage with the AC detection circuit and outputs the zero-cross signal (ZCROSSC) from the zero-cross output circuit through the photo coupler (PC3). The fixing heater control circuit is divided into the sub-heater output (SH.OUT) and the main heater output (MH.OUT). When the control signals (SHEATN and MHEATN) input from the machine engine side show a low level, this circuit turns on the sub-heater and the main heater respectively by turning on the photo triac couplers (PC2 and PC201) with a zero-cross circuit to turn on the triacs (TRA1 and TR201) in the fixing heater ON/OFF circuit. The power-saving control circuit performs power-saving control by turning off the 24 V DC output in the 24 V DC output ON/ OFF switching circuit and controlling the switching control circuit and the AC detection circuit through the photo coupler (PC4) to decrease the switching frequency, stop the starting circuit in the switching control circuit, and stop the AC detection circuit when the sleep signal (SLEPN) input from the machine engine side is low. In addition, 5 V DC 3-terminal regulator (IC102) is connected to the back of the 24 V DC output ON/OFF switching circuit to output +5 V1, and this output stops when the sleep signal (SLEPN) is low.

2-3-1

2DA/2DB-1

220-240 V AC

120 V AC

Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram

2-3-2

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. CN1 Connected to the AC power plug YC1 Connected to the engine PCB and left cover safety switch YC2 Connected to the engine PCB 1 2 3 Signal AC-L FG AC-N I/O I I AC supply (LIVE) Ground AC supply (NEUTRAL) Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3

+24V1 NC +24V2 +24V4 PGND SGND +5V +5V SGND +24V2 SGND ZCROSSC SLEPN SHEATN MHEATN COUNTN PGND PGND +24V1 +24V1 +24V +5V1 NC +5V3

O I O O O O O I I I I O O O O I

24 V DC power supply for LCSSW Not used 24 V DC power supply (Via LCSSW) 24 V DC power supply for EPCB (Via LCSSW) Ground Ground 5 V DC power supply for EPCB 5 V DC power supply for EPCB (Via FCSSW) Ground 24 V DC power supply (Via LCSSW) Ground Zero-cross signal Power source sleep signal FH-S on/off FH-M on/off Counter control signal Ground Ground 24 V DC power supply for EPCB 24 V DC power supply for EPCB 24 V DC power supply for EPCB 5 V DC power supply for FCSSW Not used 5 V DC power supply

YC5 Connected to the front cover safety switch YC6 Connected to the fixing heater M/S YC7 Connected to the paper feeder*1

1 2 3

H.LIVE MH.OUT SH.OUT

O O O

AC power supply for FH-M/S (LIVE) AC power supply for FH-M AC power supply for FH-S

1 2 3 4

DH2.LIVE NC NC DH2.OUT

O O

AC power supply for drawer heater of the paper feeder (LIVE) Not used Not used AC power supply for drawer heater of the paper feeder

YC8 Connected to the drawer heater*2 YC9 Connected to the paper feeder*1

1 2 3 4

DH1.LIVE NC NC DH1.OUT

O O

AC power supply for drawer heater (LIVE) Not used Not used AC power supply for drawer heater

1 2

+24V4 PGND

O -

24 V DC power supply for paper feeder Ground

*1: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.

2-3-3

2DA/2DB-1

2-3-2 Main PCB

Main PCB

IICSCL IICSDA Operation PCB LCD PCB LCD controller (U17) IICSCL IICSDA Serial I/O XIO (U49) Work memory (U54) (U57) Program memory Flash ROM (U23)

EEPROM (U39) RTC (U40)

Data bus Address bus

Analog CCD PCB CCDCLK1-2

AFE (U3)

8bit

ADCLK

Buffer

PVSYNC OVSYNC Image memory SDRAM (YS1,YS2) (YC12) VIDEO_PRT_N LVDS VIDEO_PRT_P PLGCLK 8bit 8bit Polygon motor OUTPEN BDN APC PCB SAMPLEN LDOP LDON +5VAPC Q1 Q2 BDFAIL0 Image data Code data Memory copy ASIC (U20)

Engine PCB

Printer board PCB

CPU (U56) 33 MHz Codec IC (U19)

Network scanner

Image processing ASIC (U7)

Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram The main PCB (MPCB) consists of mainly CPU (U56), program memory flash ROM (U23), work memory SDRAMs (U54, U57), XIO (U49), image processing ASIC (U7), memory copy ASIC (U20), codec IC (U19), AFE (U3), LCD controller (U17), EEPROM (U39), and RTC (U40).

2-3-4

2DA/2DB-1

2 1 13

16 2 15 1

10 11 7

17 1

YC7

B49 B50 A49 A50

YC12

YC13

B1 B2 A1 A2

YC3

12

YC6

YC5

YC2 18

YC1

2 1

YC16
4 2 3 1 50 49 100 99 50 49 100 99 1

YS3

72 70 71 69

YS2
2 1 52 51 2 YS1 1 52 51 2

YC10

1 26

YC9

25 50

19

20

YC11

YS8
13 14 1 2

YS15
A1 A2 B1 B2 A19 A20 B19 B20

Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram

2 1

20 19

19 20

1 2

2-3-5

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC1 1 2 Connected 3 to the CCD 4 PCB 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 YC2 Connected to the APC PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal CCDO CCDON CCDE CCDEN +5V SGND +12V SGND CCDCLK SGND CCDCLKN SGND RS SGND CP SGND SH SGND PDN SGND OUTPEN SAMPLEN VDON VDOP +5V1 SCAN7N SCAN6N SCAN5N SCAN4N SCAN3N SCAN2N SCAN1N SCAN0N BUZERDRN +5V SGND POWERKEYN LED0 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 KEY9 KEY8 KEY7 KEY6 KEY5 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 KEY0 I/O I I O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I O O O O O I I I I I I I I I I Description CCDPCB image scanning signal Ground CCDPCB image scanning signal Ground 5 V DC power supply for CCDPCB Ground +12 V DC power supply for CCDPCB Ground CCDCLK signal Ground CCDCLKN signal Ground CCDPCB RS signal Ground CCDPCB CP signal Ground CCDPCB SH signal Ground Laser sync signal Ground Laser diode output signal Laser light signal Image differential signal (negative) Image differential signal (positive) 5 V DC power supply for APCPCB Key switch scan signal 7 Key switch scan signal 6 Key switch scan signal 5 Key switch scan signal 4 Key switch scan signal 3 Key switch scan signal 2 Key switch scan signal 1 Key switch scan signal 0 OPCB buzzer signal 5 V DC power supply for OPCB Ground Power key operating signal input LED lighting selection signal 0 LED lighting selection signal 1 LED lighting selection signal 2 LED lighting selection signal 3 LED lighting selection signal 4 Key switch return signal 9 Key switch return signal 8 Key switch return signal 7 Key switch return signal 6 Key switch return signal 5 Key switch return signal 4 Key switch return signal 3 Key switch return signal 2 Key switch return signal 1 Key switch return signal 0

YC5 Connected to the operation unit PCB

YC6 Connected to the operation unit PCB

2-3-6

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC7 1 2 Connected 3 to the LCD 4 PCB 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 YC10 Connected to the printer board PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal +5VSLEEP -12V LCDUD3 LCDUD2 LCDUD1 LCDUD0 LCDCP LCDFLM LCDENB LCDLP LCDVO SGND LCDGND +24V SGND +12VCCD E2CSGND E2CRSTN E2CEGIRN PDMASKN E2CEGSO E2CSCKN +5V E2CEGSI +5V E2CSBSYN +3.3V E2CSDIR PLGCLK OUTEPN PVSYNC OVSYNC +5VAPC SGND C2PW_UP_PRTN SGND C2PW_RST_PRTN SGND C2PEGIRN C2PEGSO +5V C2PSCKN +5V C2PEGSI +5V C2SBSYN +3.3V C2PSDIR PRBDN SGND C2PVIDEO_PRN_N C2PVIDEO_PRN_P SGND I/O O O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I I O I O I I I I O I I I I I O O O I I I O I O I O O I I Description 5 V DC power supply from LCDPCB -12 V DC power supply from LCDPCB LCD display data signal LCD display data signal LCD display data signal LCD display data signal LCD display control signal LCD display control signal LCD display control signal LCD display control signal LCD display control signal Ground Ground 24 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Ground 24 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Ground Reset signal Engine communication E2CEGIRN signal Printing image interval signal Engine serial communication reception Engine communication clock signal 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine serial communication transmission 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine communication E2CSBSYN signal 3.3 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine communication E2CSDIR signal PM clock signal Laser diode output signal Printing image interval signal Original scanning interval signal 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Ground C2PW_UP_PRTN signal Ground C2PW_RST_PRTN signal Ground Engine communication C2PEGIRN signal Engine serial communication transmission 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine communication clock signal 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine serial communication reception 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine communication C2SBSYN signal 3.3 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine communication E2CSDIR signal Laser sync signal Ground C2PVIDEO_PRN_N signal C2PVIDEO_PRN_P signal Ground

YC11 Connected to the printer board PCB

2-3-7

2DA/2DB-1

2-3-3 Engine PCB

HVTPCB
MHVDR THVDR SHVDR SHVISEL HVCLK (DB) MHVIADJ THVIADJ 24V4 5V

Fixing unit
THERMA

MHEATN SHEATN SLEPN ZCROSSC

INPCB
LAMPN 24V1

DP
ORGTIM DOPSEL,DOPRDY DOPSI,DOPSO DOPSCLK

CL
24V4

ERASER1N ERASER2N

PSPCB
TONEEPY TONEFUL

24V1

5V

ISU
5V

Scanner unit
OPSWN ORGLSWN HPSWN 5V2 5V2 12V 5V 24V1

CCDPCB

Finisher/ Job separator

24V4 5V4

UOPSEL UOPRDY UOPSDO UOPSDI SCLK SLSOLN RLSOLN

ISMDA ISMDNB ISMDNA ISMDB

ISU

TEMP HUMIDC HMCLK1 HMCLK2 5V2

OPPCB

SCAN0-7 BUZERDRN LED0-4 KEY0-9 LCDUD0-3 LCDCP LCDFLM LCDENB LCDLP LCDVO SBSY SDIR EGIRN RSTN EGSO SCKN EGSI

+12V -12V

Duplex unit
24V4

ICLTN IPPSWN

EPCB

5V 3.3V 2.5V 1.8V

LCDPCB

CFM1,2,3
24V1

FAN1DRN FAN2DRN FAN3DRN

2.5V

5V

1.8V 3.3V

PFCL BYPPFCL
24V1

CPU

FCLTN BSOLN

PRNPCB
REM RDY CLK 5V REGSWN EXTSWN SEPSWN

DM

MPCB
PDMASKN OVSYNK OUTPEN PLGCLK

ASIC

24V4

RSW ESW FSSW

5V2

Paper feeder BYPPWSW

BPWSW BPPESW

PLSW PWSW
C1PLSW1N C1PLSW2N C1PLSW3N C1PWSWN C1PDSW

RM
RMLOW RMCLK RMENB

LOPSDO LOPSDI LOPSCLK LOPSRDY LOPSEL0 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL2

LSU
PLGCLK PLGDRN PLGRDYN OUTPEN VDOP VDON PDN SAMPLEN 5V3

24V4 5V2 5V2 5V

24V1 5V2 24V4

Figure 2-3-5 Engine PCB block diagram

2-3-8

2DA/2DB-1

YC16 1 4

6 YC17 1

3 1 YC6 12

YC18 6

YC19 1

U13

YC4

13 YC15 1 4 1
U12

U10

U9

U8

YC12

U6

YC5 U1 X1 YC23 1
U11 U16 17 6 YC22 1 1 YC9

1
U15

YC1

YC2

YC13

22

14

YC21

4 YC20 1

U7

YC10

YC24

11

YC8

Figure 2-3-6 Engine PCB silk-screen diagram

16

YC11

YC7

15

YC3

YC14

2-3-9

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC1 1 2 Connected 3 to the 4 printer 5 board PCB 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 YC3 Connected to the polygon motor, cleaning lamp, cooling fan motor 1, fixing thermister and overflow sensor YC4 Connected to the registration motor PCB YC5 Connected to the finisher*2/ job separator*2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Signal +12V OVSYNC RSTN EGRN SDIR SBSY PDMASKN EGSI SCKN EGSO PLGCLK SGND OUTEPN +5V +5V +5V SGND SGND SGND +5V1 PGND +24V PLGCLKN PLGRDYN PLGDRN PLGGND PLG+24V4 ERASE+24V4 ERASE2N ERASE1N FAN1DRN +24V1 THERMA+5V THERMA TONEGND TONEFUL TONE+5V2 +5V RMLOW RMCLK RMENB SGND RLSOLN SLSOLN SCLK SDI SDO OPRDY OPSEL SGND +5V4 PGND PGND +24V4 +24V4 I/O O O O O O O O I I O I O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O I I O O O O O I I O I O I O O O O Description +12 V DC power supply for MPCB Original scanning interval signal Reset signal Engine communication EGRN signal Engine communication SDIR signal Engine communication SBSY signal Printing image interval signal Engine serial communication reception Engine communication clock signal Engine serial communication transmission PM clock signal Ground Laser diode output signal 5 V DC power supply for MPCB 5 V DC power supply for MPCB 5 V DC power supply for MPCB Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power supply for PRNPCB Ground 24 V DC power supply for PRNPCB PM clock signal PM rotation sync signal PM on/off Ground 24 V DC power supply for PM 24 V DC power supply for CL CL on/off (2) CL on/off (1) CFM1 on/off 24 V DC power supply for CFM1 5 V DC power supply for FTH FTH analog signal Ground OFS on/off 5 V DC power supply for OFS 5 V DC power supply for RM RM Low signal RM clock signal RM on/off Ground Finisher/Job separator FSSW (RET) on/off Finisher/Job separator FSSW (ACT) on/off Finisher/Job separator clock signal Finisher serial communication reception/ Job separator JBESW on/off Finisher/Job separator serial communication transmission Finisher READY signal/ Job separator EPDSW on/off Finisher SELECT signal Ground 5 V DC power supply for Finisher/Job separator Ground Ground 24 V DC power supply for Finisher/Job separator 24 V DC power supply for Finisher/Job separator

*1: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.

2-3-10

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC6 1 2 Connected 3 to the DP*2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC7 Connected to the drive motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal ORGTIMN DOPRDY DOPSEL SGND DOPCLK DOPSDI DOPSDO +5V4 PGND PGND +24V1 +24V1 +24V4 PGND SGND +5V REM RDY CLK BPPESW C1PDSWN FCLTN +24V1 BPSOLN ICLTN IPPSWN BPWSW REGSWN TONEPY SGND +5V2 C1PWSWN HUMIDC HMCLK2 HMCLK1 TEMP HVCLK +5V SHVISELN PGND MHVDRN PGND SHVDRN PGND MHVADJ PGND THVDRN +24V4 THVADJ +24V4 PGND +24V4 I/O I I O O I O O O O O O O I O I I O O O O I I I I O I I O O I O O O O O O O O O O O Description DP original scanning interval signal DP READY signal DP SELECT signal Ground DP clock signal DP serial communication reception DP serial communication transmission 5 V DC power supply for DP Ground Ground 24 V DC power supply for DP 24 V DC power supply for DP 24 V DC power supply for DM Ground Ground 5 V DC power supply for DM DM on/off DM rotation sync signal DM clock signal BYPPSW on/off PSW on/off PFCL on/off 24 V DC power supply for DPCB BYPPFCL on/off DUPFCL on/off DUPPCSW on/off BYPPWSW on/off RSW on/off TCS on/off Ground 5 V DC power supply for DPCB PWSW on/off HUMSENS analog signal HUMSENS clock signal (2) HUMSENS clock signal (1) HUMSENS analog signal Developing bias clock signal 5 V DC power supply for HVTPCB Separation high-voltage switch signal Ground Main charging high-voltage on/off Ground Separation high-voltage on/off Ground Main charging high-voltage adjust signal Ground Transfer high-voltage on/off 24 V DC power supply for HVTPCB Transfer high-voltage adjust signal 24 V DC power supply for HVTPCB Ground 24 V DC power supply for HVTPCB

YC8 Connected to the drawer PCB

YC9 Connected to the highvoltage PCB

*1: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.

2-3-11

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC10 1 2 Connected 3 to the 4 paper 5 feeder*1 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC11 Connected to the cooling fan motor 2 YC12 Connected to the cooling fan motor 3 YC13 Connected to the key counter*2 YC14 Connected to the exit motor YC15 Connect to the exit switch and feedshift switch YC16 Connected to the scanner motor YC17 Connected to the inverter PCB 1 2 Signal LOPSRDY LOPSEL2 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL0 LOPSCLK LOPSDI LOPSDO SGND +5V2 SGND +5V2 +24V4 FAN2DRN I/O I O O O O I O O O O O Description Paper feeder READY signal Paper feeder SEL2 signal Paper feeder SEL1 signal Paper feeder SEL0 signal Paper feeder clock signal Paper feeder serial communication reception Paper feeder serial communication transmission Ground 5 V DC power supply for the paper feeder Ground 5 V DC power supply for the paper feeder 24 V DC power supply for CFM2 CFM2 on/off

1 2

+24V4 FAN3DRN

O O

24 V DC power supply for CFM3 CFM3 on/off

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

+24V1 KEYCN SGND KEYENBN COMDA COMDNB COMDNA COMDB PGND EXTSMN SEPSWN +5V2

O O I O O O O I I O

24 V DC power supply for key counter Key counter count signal Ground Key counter set signal EM control signal (A) EM control signal (_B) EM control signal (_A) EM control signal (B) Ground ESW on/off FSSW on/off 5 V DC power supply for ESW/FSSW

1 2 3 4

ISMDA ISMDNB ISMDNA ISMDB

O O O O

SM control signal (A) SM control signal (_B) SM control signal (_A) SM control signal (B)

1 2 3 4 5 6

LAMPN PGND +24V1 +24V1 PGND LAMPN

O O O O

EL on/off Ground 24 V DC power supply for inverter PCB 24 V DC power supply for inverter PCB Ground EL on/off

*1: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.

2-3-12

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC18 Connected to the original detection switch and scanner home position switch YC19 Connected to the original size detection sensor YC20 Connected to the power source PCB YC21 Connected to the power source PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal +5V2 HPSWN SGND +5V2 OPSWN SGND I/O O I O I Description 5 V DC power supply for SHPSW SHPSW on/off Ground 5 V DC power supply for ODSW ODSW on/off Ground

1 2 3

+5V2 ORGLSWN SGND

O I -

5 V DC power supply for OSDS OSDS on/off Ground

1 2 3 4

+5 V SGND PGND +24V4

I I

5 V DC power supply from PSPCB Ground Ground 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB (Via LCSSW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6

+24V +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND COUNTN MHEATN SHEATN SLEPN ZCROSSC SGND +24V2 SGND +5V3 C1PLSW3N C1PLSW2N SGND C1PLSW1N TCONDET SGND

I I I O O O O I I I I I I -

24 V DC power supply from PSPCB 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB Ground Ground Not used FH-M on/off FH-S on/off Power source sleep signal Zero-cross signal Ground 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB (Via LCSSW) Ground 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB (Via LCSSW) PLSW on/off PLSW on/off Ground PLSW on/off TCDSW on/off Ground

YC22 Connected to the paper size length switch and toner container detection switch YC24 Connected to the registration motor PCB

1 2

+24V4 SGND

O -

24 V DC power supply for RMPCB Ground

2-3-13

2DA/2DB-1

2-3-4 Printer board PCB

YC4
USB I/F

DATA+, DATA-

FSDM, FSDP HSDM, HSDP U25 USB2.0 PHY Q2 Q3

VALIDH USBCLK, LINESTATE0-1, TXREADY, RXERROR, RXVALID, RXACTIVE USBRST, SUSPENDM, TERMSELECT, XCVRSELECT, TXVALID USBD15-0 CPUD31-0 CPUA31-0 U7, U9, U11 X3 Xtal (USB) 48.0 MHz LA22-2 Buffer CPUA31-0 RSTOUTN U1 PPC750CXr U6, U8, U10, U12 Local data bus buffer LD31-0

Digital transistor USBINT USBVBUS

XIN XOUT

YC2 TX_CLK, RX_ER, RX_CLK, RX_DV, COL, CRS, PHY_IRN TX_EN, MDC U26 Ether PHY TX_D3-0 RX_D3-0 RSTOUTN
Local address bus

CDET1A, CDET2A, CFWAITN1 CFCS1LN, CFCS1HN, CFOEN1, CFWEN1, CFRST1 LA20,11-2 Buffer U22,U23 LA22-2 LA20,11-2 Option hard disk slot YS1 System DIMM slot (Code ROM) CFA20,11-2 Option CFD15-0 memory card slot

U20, U21
Buffer

YC5 TXOP, TXON

Network I/F

LD15-0

MDIO

YC1

RXIP, RXIN XIN XOUT LEDN NSELIN U24

Centronics transceiver

LD15-0

Digital transistor YC3 Q4 PNSELIN

Parallel I/F

X4

Xtal (Ether) 25.0 MHz

CDET2A, CDET2B, CFWAITN2 CFCS2LN,CFCS2HN, CFOEN2, CFWEN2, CFRST2 LA22-5

PNSTROBE, PNAUTOFD, PNINIT PNACK, PBUSY, PPERROR PSELECT, PFAULT PPDATA7-0

NSTROBE, NAUTOFD, NINIT NACK,BUSY, PERROR SELECT, FAULT PDATA7-0

ROMA4-2 CSN0-1, FCLE, FALE, OEN0, WEN0, NANDCSN, RSTOUTN U3 ASIC FRB ROMA1 CSN2, OEN1 LA22-2 Font mask ROM U13

LD31-0

LD15-0 U14 LD15-0

YC11
Serial I/F

P1284DIR RTS, DTR, TXD CTS, DSR, RXD RSSEL ROMA1 OEN1 CNS3 LA22 LA20-2

Decoder U15 YC12

API ROM socket

YC8
Connect to engine PCB

OPRSTN1 C2PBDN, C2PSDIR, C2PSBSY C2PEGSI, C2PSCKN C2PVIDEO_PRT_P, C2PVIDEO_PRT_N C2PRST_PRTN C2PW_UP_PRTN U5 Xtal (System) 25.0000 MHz X1 SSCG SDCLK1-2 DQMN3, DQMN2 DQMN1, DQMN0 SDRASN, SDCASN, SDWEN, SDBA1, SDBA0, SDCLKE IICSCL IICSDA SDCSN2-3 VXIN X2 VXOUT SDA12-0 Xtal (Video) Buffer U27 19.858061 MHz SDCLK0 SDCSN0 U18 SDRAM SDD31-16 YS2 SDA12-0 SDRAM address bus KUIOCSN1, OPRDY1, DMAACK1N,IOR1N, IOW1N IODTACKN1, OPIR1N, DMAREQ1 LA16-2 LD15-0 Option I/f KUIO-LV (3.3 V)

YC6
Connect to engine PCB

Option SDRAM DIMM socket SDD31-0

E2COVSYNC, E2CPVSYNC, E2CSCLKN E2CEGSI, E2CRSTN, E2CPLGCLK E2CSDIR, E2CSBSY, E2CEGSO, E2CEGIRN E2COUTPEN

YC7
Connect to main PCB

3.3V-2.5V regulator +3.3V U33 +2.5V U19 SDA12-0 3.3V-1.8V regulator +3.3V U34 +1.8V +3.3V regulator circuit +5VCONV U32 +3.3 V SDRAM data bus SDD31-0 SDD31-0 SDRAM SDD15-0

Figure 2-3-7 Printer board PCB block diagram

2-3-14

2DA/2DB-1

2 1

16 15

YC10
B2 B1 A2 A1 26 1

YC1

YC12

1 50 25

B30 B29 A30 A29

36

18

YC3

YC9

19

YC11

YS2
26 1 72 70 71 69

10

50 25

YC2

YS1

99 100 49 50

Figure 2-3-8 Printer board PCB silk-screen diagram

YC6
22

2-3-15

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC6 1 Connected 2 to the 3 engine PCB 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 YC7 Connected to the main PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal +12V OVSYNC RSTN EGRN SDIR SBSY PDMASKN EGSI SCKN EGSO PLGCLK SGND OUTEPN +5V +5V +5V SGND SGND SGND +5V1 PGND +24V +24V SGND +12VCCD E2CSGND E2CRSTN E2CEGIRN PDMASKN E2CEGSO E2CSCKN +5V E2CEGSI +5V E2CSBSYN +3.3V E2CSDIR PLGCLK OUTEPN PVSYNC OVSYNC +5VAPC I/O I I I I I I I O O I O I I I I I I O O O O O O I O I O O O O I O O O O Description +12 V DC power supply from EPCB Original scanning interval signal Reset signal Engine communication EGRN signal Engine communication SDIR signal Engine communication SBSY signal Printing image interval signal Engine serial communication transmission Engine communication clock signal Engine serial communication reception PM clock signal Ground Laser diode output signal 5 V DC power supply from EPCB 5 V DC power supply from EPCB 5 V DC power supply from EPCB Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power supply from EPCB Ground 24 V DC power supply from EPCB 24 V DC power supply for MPCB Ground +12 V DC power supply for MPCB Ground Reset signal Engine communication E2CEGIRN signal Printing image interval signal Engine serial communication transmission Engine communication clock signal 5 V DC power supply for MPCB Engine serial communication reception 5 V DC power supply for MPCB Engine communication E2CSBSYN signal 3.3 V DC power supply for MPCB Engine communication E2CSDIR signal PM clock signal Laser diode output signal Printing image interval signal Original scanning interval signal 5 V DC power supply for MPCB

2-3-16

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC8 Connected to the main PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal SGND C2PW_UP_PRTN SGND C2PW_RST_PRTN SGND C2PEGIRN C2PEGSO +5V C2PSCKN +5V C2PEGSI +5V C2SBSYN +3.3V C2PSDIR PRBDN SGND C2PVIDEO_PRN_N C2PVIDEO_PRN_P SGND I/O O I I I O O O I O I O I I O O Description Ground C2PW_UP_PRTN signal Ground C2PW_RST_PRTN signal Ground Engine communication C2PEGIRN signal Engine serial communication reception 5 V DC power supply for MPCB Engine communication clock signal 5 V DC power supply for MPCB Engine serial communication transmission 5 V DC power supply for MPCB Engine communication C2SBSYN signal 3.3 V DC power supply from PRNPCB Engine communication E2CSDIR signal Laser sync signal Ground C2PVIDEO_PRN_N signal C2PVIDEO_PRN_P signal Ground

2-3-17

2DA/2DB-1

2-3-5 Operation unit PCB

K69 K67 K66 K65 K64 K60 K56 K52 +5V BZ1 SGND YC1
SGND 1 +5V 2 BUZERDRN 3 SCAN0 4 SCAN1 5 SCAN2 6 SCAN3 7 SCAN4 8 SCAN5 9 SCAN6 10 SCAN7 11

K63 K62 K51 K59 K58 K57 K55 K54 K53

K49 K48 K47 K46 K45 K44 K43 K42 K41

K39 K38 K37 K36 K35 K33 K32 K31 K30 K29 K28 K27 K26 K25 K24 K23 K22 K21 K20 K19 K18 K15 K14 K13 K12 K17 K16 K11 K10 K9 K8 K7 K6 K40 K34 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1

K51 K50

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

YC2

KEY0 1 KEY1 2 KEY2 3 KEY3 4 KEY4 5 KEY5 6 KEY6 7 KEY7 8 9 KEY8 10 KEY9 11 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LED0 POWERKEY

L35 L41 L36 L42 K68 +5V SGND L40 R1 L37 L43 L38 L39

L1

L25

L20

L14

L10

L1

L31

L26

L21

L15

L11

L6

L2

L32

L27

L22

L16

L12

L7

L3

L33 L34

L28 L29

L23 L24

L17 L18

L13 L19

L6 L9

L4 L5

SGND

Figure 2-3-9 Operation unit PCB block diagram The operation unit PCB (OPPCB) consists of key switches, LEDs and buzzer. The lighting of LEDs is determined by scan signals (SCAN0 to SCAN7) and LED lighting selection signals (LED0 to LED4) from the main PCB (MPCB). The key switches operated are identified by the scan signals (SCAN0 to SCAN7) and the return signals (KEY0 to KEY9). As an example, to light L1, the LED lighting selection signal (LED4) should be driven low in synchronization with a low level on the scan signal (SCAN0). LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations. As another example, if K1 is pressed, the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal (SCAN0) back to the main PCB (MPCB) via the return signal (KEY9). The main PCB (MPCB) locates the position where the line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross, and thereby determines which key switch was operated.

2-3-18

2DA/2DB-1

Figure 2-3-10 Operation unit PCB silk-screen diagram

2-3-19

2DA/2DB-1 Connector Pin No. YC1 1 Connected 2 to the main 3 PCB 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC2 Connected to the main PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal SGND +5V BUZERDRN SCAN0N SCAN1N SCAN2N SCAN3N SCAN4N SCAN5N SCAN6N SCAN7N KEY0 KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 KEY8 KEY9 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LED0 POWERKEYN I/O I I I I I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I O Description Ground 5 V DC power supply from MPCB OPCB buzzer signal Key switch scan signal 0 Key switch scan signal 1 Key switch scan signal 2 Key switch scan signal 3 Key switch scan signal 4 Key switch scan signal 5 Key switch scan signal 6 Key switch scan signal 7 Key switch return signal 0 Key switch return signal 1 Key switch return signal 2 Key switch return signal 3 Key switch return signal 4 Key switch return signal 5 Key switch return signal 6 Key switch return signal 7 Key switch return signal 8 Key switch return signal 9 LED lighting selection signal 4 LED lighting selection signal 3 LED lighting selection signal 2 LED lighting selection signal 1 LED lighting selection signal 0 Power key operating output signal

2-3-20

2DA/2DB-1

2-3-6 CCD PCB

CCDPCB Tr.AMP

CCD sensor U2 Driver U1 U3 MPCB

Figure 2-3-11 CCD PCB block diagram

The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is equipped with a CCD sensor (U2) for original scanning. The clock signals for driving the CCD sensor (U2) are sent from the main PCB (MPCB), and then input to the CCD sensor (U2) via the clock drivers (U1 and U3). Image signals are analog signals. Even- and odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals are amplified in the transistors (TR1 to 4) and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit in the main PCB (MPCB).

2-3-21

2DA/2DB-1

U2 YC1 U3 U4 U1

Figure 2-3-12 CCD PCB silk-screen diagram

Connector Pin No. YC1 Connected to the main PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Signal SGND SH SGND CP SGND RS SGND CCDCLKN SGND CCDCLK SGND +12V SGND +5V CCDEN CCDE CCDON CCDO

I/O I I I I I I I O O

Description Ground MPCB SH signal Ground MPCB CP signal Ground MPCB RS signal Ground CCDCLKN signal Ground CCDCLK signal Ground +12 V DC power supply from MPCB Ground 5 V DC power supply from MPCB Ground CCDPCB image scanning signal Ground CCDPCB image scanning signal

2-3-22

Timing chart No. 1 Paper feed from drawer, single-side mode, original size A4/11" 81/2", two sheets
Scondary feed 250 ms Primary feed 105 ms Scondary feed 250 ms

Primary feed

105 ms

PFCL 1810 ms (20 ppm model) 1900 ms (16 ppm model) 430 ms

YC8-3

430 ms

RSW 150 ms 320 ms

YC8-9 150 ms

RM

YC4-4

330 ms

Dev.BIAS

290 ms

290 ms

Separation YC9-7 charging 100 ms 10 ms 670 ms 10 ms

Transfer charging

YC9-11

2020 ms

ESW

YC15-2

2DA/2DB

2-4-1

2-4-2
Scondary feed 1100 ms Primary feed 120 ms Scondary feed 1100 ms 2510 ms (20 ppm model) 2700 ms (16 ppm model) 2700 ms 434 ms 320 ms 320 ms 330 ms 330 ms 290 ms 290 ms 100 ms 10 ms 670 ms 10 ms 670 ms 100 ms 2015 ms 1800 ms

2DA/2DB

Timing chart No. 2

Paper feed from drawer, single-side mode, original size A3/11" 17", two sheets

Primary feed

120 ms

PFCL

YC8-3

434 ms

RSW

YC8-9

RM

YC4-4

Dev.BIAS

Separation YC9-7 charging

Transfer charging

YC9-11

ESW

YC15-2

Timing chart No. 3 Paper feed from first paper feeder (optional for 16 ppm model/standard for 20 ppm model), single-side mode, original size A4/11" 81/2", two sheets
Scondary feed Scondary feed Primary feed 200 ms

Primary feed

200 ms

DPFCL1

YC8-2

DDM1

YC9-2,3, 4,5

1740 ms 1740 ms

RSW 150 ms 290 ms

YC8-9 150 ms

RM

YC4-4

290 ms

290 ms

Separation YC9-7 charging 100 ms 10 ms 670 ms 10 ms

Transfer charging

YC9-11

2220 ms

ESW

YC15-2

2DA/2DB

2-4-3

2-4-4
200 ms Scondary feed Scondary feed Primary feed 200 ms 1420 ms 1370 ms 150 ms 290 ms 150 ms 290 ms 100 ms 290 ms 10 ms 670 ms 10 ms 2220 ms

2DA/2DB

Timing chart No. 4

Paper feed from second paper feeder (optional), single-side mode, original size A4/11" 81/2", two sheets

Primary feed

DPFCL2

YC8-2

DDM2

YC9-2,3, 4,5

1420 ms

DFSW1

YC6-2

DDM1

YC9-2,3, 4,5

1370 ms

RSW

YC8-9

RM

YC4-4

Separation YC9-7 charging

Transfer charging

YC9-11

ESW

YC15-2

Chart of image adjustment procedures

Description Item No. Display POLY U053 test pattern 1-4-13 U053 Original Page Remarks Polygon motor speed adjustment Maintenance mode

Adjusting order

Item

Image

Adjusting the magnification in the main scanning direction (printing adjustment)

Adjusting the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (printing adjustment) Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN U053 test pattern 1-4-13

Adjusting the center line of the bypass tray (printing adjustment) Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU BYP U034 test pattern 1-6-18

Adjusting the center line of the drawers (printing adjustment) Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU OUT U034 test pattern

1-6-18

First paper feeder: select LSU T1 Second paper feeder: select LSU T2 Third paper feeder: select LSU T3 Duplex copying: select LSU DUP 1-6-16

Adjusting the leading edge registration of the bypass tray (printing adjustment) Registration motor turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034 RCL BYP

U034 test pattern

Adjusting the leading edge registration of the drawer (printing adjustment) Registration motor turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034

RCL ON

U034 test pattern

1-6-16

First paper feeder: select RCL T1 Second paper feeder: select RCL T2 Third paper feeder: select RCL T3 Duplex copying: select RCL DUP U402 LEAD U402 test pattern 1-6-20

Adjusting the leading edge margin (printing adjustment) LSU illumination start timing

Adjusting the trailing edge margin (printing adjustment)

LSU illumination end timing

U402

TRAIL

U402 test pattern

1-6-20

2DA/2DB

2-4-5

2-4-6
Description Item No. Display AC U402 test pattern 1-6-20 U402 Original Page Remarks LSU illumination start/end timing Maintenance mode Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN ADJ Test chart 1-6-33 No adjustment for copying using the DP. Original scanning speed U065 U070 SUB SCAN ADJ Test chart 1-6-34 1-4-16 U065: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U070: For copying originals from the DP. Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U067 U072 Test chart 1-6-36 1-4-18 U067: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U072: For copying originals from the DP. 1-6-35 1-4-17 Original scan start timing U066 U071 Test chart U066: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U071: For copying originals from the DP. Test chart 1-6-37 1-4-44 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 B MARGIN B MARGIN U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U404: For copying originals from the DP. Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 D MARGIN D MARGIN Test chart 1-6-37 1-4-44 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U404: For copying originals from the DP. U403 U404 A/C MARGIN A/C MARGIN Test chart 1-6-37 1-4-44 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U404: For copying originals from the DP.

2DA/2DB

Adjusting order

Item

Image

Adjusting the left and right margins (printing adjustment)

Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction (scanning adjustment)

Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (scanning adjustment)

Adjusting the center line (scanning adjustment)

Adjusting the leading edge registration (scanning adjustment)

Adjusting the leading edge margin (scanning adjustment)

Adjusting the trailing edge margin (scanning adjustment)

Adjusting the left and right margins (scanning adjustment)

When maintenance item U092 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2A068020), the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Adjusting the scanner magnification in the main scanning direction (U065) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (U065) When maintenance item U076 (Adjusting the DP automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2AC68241), the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072)

Image quality

Item 100% magnification

Enlargement/reduction

Lateral squareness

Margins

Leading edge registration

Skewed paper feed (left-right difference)

Lateral image shifting

Specifications Copier: 0.8% Using DP: 1.5% Copier: 1.0% Using DP: 1.5% Copier: 1.5 mm/375 mm Using DP: 3.0 mm/375 mm A: 3.0 2.5 mm B: 3.0 2.5 mm C: 3.0 2.5 mm D: 3.0 2.5mm Drawer: 2.5 mm Bypass: 2.5 mm Duplex copying: 2.5 mm Drawer: 1.5 mm or less Bypass: 1.5 mm or less Duplex copying: 2.0 mm or less Drawer: 2.0 mm Bypass: 2.0 mm Duplex copying: 3.0 mm

2DA/2DB

2-4-7

2DA/2DB

Maintenance parts list

Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley Drawer paper feed pulley Drawer separation pulley Drawer forwarding pulley Bypass paper feed pulley Bypass separation pad Left registration roller Right registration roller Registration cleaner Trans guide film Feed roller Feed pulley Slit glass Contact glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Lens Reflector Exposure lamp Front scanner rail Rear scanner rail Original size detection sensor Transfer roller Separation electrode Developing unit Drum unit Fixing unit Fixing unit Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation claw Exit roller Exit pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Name used in parts list PULLEY, PAPER FEED PULLEY, SEPARATION PULLEY, LEADING FEED PULLEY, PAPER FEED PULLEY, SEPARATION PULLEY, LEADING FEED PARTS, BYPASS PULLEY, SP PARTS, BYPASS PAD, SP ROLLER REGIST LEFT RIGHT ROLL REGIST PARTS, REGIST CLEANER, ASSY FILM RIGHT TRANS A ROLLER FEED PULLEY FEED CONTACT GLASS ADF CONTACT GLASS MIRROR A MIRROR B LENS REFLECTOR SCANNER LAMP SCANNER YG FRONT RAIL SCANNER REAR RAIL SCANNER SENSOR ORIGINAL ROLLER TRANSFER PLATE STA ELIMINATION PARTS, DV-410, SP SET, MK-410 PARTS, FK-410(A), SP PARTS, FK-410(E), SP ROLLER HEAT ROLLER PRESS SEPARATOR ASSY ROLLER EXIT INNER PULLEY EJECT ROLLER FEED SHIFT PULLEY FEED SHIFT Part No. 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 2C993130 2C993140 2C916020 2C907180 2C993210 2C917220 3HW06020 2BL16080 2C912280 2C912250 2C912390 2AV12160 2C912500 2C912110 2C912090 2C912070 2C912080 2C912090 2C917010 2C917080 2C993030 2C982010 2C993051 2C993061 2C920050 2C920060 2BR20240 2C921010 2C921360 2C921020 2C921040 Fig. No. 7 7 7 4 4 4 8 8 6 7 7 7 4 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 9 9 9 9 Ref. No. 39 40 41 16 17 18 19 15 1 9 27 28 3 24 27 24 37 4 12 10 55 21 28 1 5 5 6 24 17 46 18 19

2-4-8

2DA/2DB

Periodic maintenance procedures

Section Test copy and test print Maintenance part/location Perform at the maximum copy size Method Test copy Maintenance cycle Every service Points and cautions Page

Section Paper feed section

Maintenance part/location Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley Drawer paper feed pulley Drawer separation pulley Drawer forwarding pulley Bypass paper feed pulley Bypass separation pad Left registration roller Right registration roller Registration cleaner Trans guide film Feed roller Feed pulley

Method Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean or replace Clean Clean or replace Check or replace Clean or replace Check or replace -

Maintenance cycle

Points and cautions Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Vacuum. Clean with the alcohol. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Page 1-6-5 1-6-3 1-6-5 1-6-9 1-6-8 1-6-9 1-6-13 1-6-13 1-6-15 1-6-15 1-6-7

Every 150,000 counts Every 150,000 counts Every 150,000 counts -

Section Optical section

Maintenance part/location Slit glass Contact glass Mirror 1

Method Clean Clean Clean

Maintenance cycle Every 150,000 counts Every 150,000 counts -

Points and cautions Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image. Replace if an image problem occurs or after the exposure lamp does not turn on. Check noise and shifting and then apply scanner rail grease EM-50E. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Page

Mirror 2 and mirror 3

Clean

Lens

Clean

Reflector

Clean

Exposure lamp

Clean or replace

1-6-22

Optical rail

Grease

Original size detection sensor

Clean

2-4-9

2DA/2DB-1

Section Transfer and separation

Maintenance part/location Transfer roller Separation electrode section

Method Clean Check or clean -

Maintenance cycle

Points and cautions

Page

Vaccum or clean with a dry cloth. 1-6-42 Clean with the equipped brush.

Section Developing section

Maintenance part/location Developing unit

Method Check or replace -

Maintenance cycle

Points and cautions Replace if the problem occurs.

Page 1-6-41

Section Drum section

Maintenance part/location Drum unit

Method Check or replace

Maintenance cycle Every 150,000 counts

Points and cautions Replace if the problem occurs.

Page 1-6-38

Section Fixing section

Maintenance part/location Fixing unit Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation

Method Check or replace Clean Clean Clean or replace claw -

Maintenance cycle

Points and cautions Replace if the problem occurs. Clean with alcohol. Clean with alcohol. Clean with alcohol. Replace if it is being lacking, deformed or rubbing.

Page 1-6-43 1-6-48 1-6-45 1-6-47

Every 150,000 counts Every 150,000 counts Every 150,000 counts

Section Exit section

Maintenance part/location Exit roller Exit pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley

Method Check or clean Check or clean Check or clean Check or clean -

Maintenance cycle

Points and cautions Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Page

Section Covers

Maintenance part/location Covers

Method Clean

Maintenance cycle Every 150,000 counts

Points and cautions Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Page

Section Other

Maintenance part/location Image quality

Method Check and adjust

Maintenance cycle Every service

Points and cautions

Page

2-4-10

1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18

1 LCDGND SGND 2 LCDV0 3 LCDLP 4 5 LCDENB 6 LCDFLM LCDCP 7 8 LCDVD0 9 LCDVD1 10 LCDVD2 11 LCDVD3 -12V 12 13 +5VSLEEP

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1/2 3/4 5/6

8
LCDPCB CCDPCB CFM3 SM OPTION KMAS (ONLY JAPAN) INPCB EL 1 2 3 LAMP N.C. LAMP

General wiring diagram

1 2

2 1

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

6/5 4/3 2/1

YC12

YC16

YC8

YC7 SGND/SH SGND/CP SGND/RS SGND/CCDCLKN SGND/CCDCLK SGND/+12V SGND/+5V CCDEN/CCDE CCDON/CCDO YC2 BK YC5

18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1

YC13

YC17

ISMDA ISMDNB ISMDNA ISMDB

KMDET 1 NC 2 KMDREQ 3 KMACK 4 KMRXD 5 SGND 6 KMTXD 7 SGND 8 SGND 9 SGND 10 +5V 11 +5V 12

+24V1 FAN3DRN

YC11 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1

YC10 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1

MPCB

LAMPN/PGND +24V1/+24V1 PGND/LAMPN

YC2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+5V3 VDOP VDON SAMPLEN OUTPEN SGND PDN

OE LB YW PK GN BE GY

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

YC1

+5V3 PDN SGND

3 2 1

YC2

3 2 1

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 NC 3 NC 4

1 2 NC 3 NC 4

YC8

YC7

YC9

1 +24V1 2 PGND

BPPE SW C1PDSWN FCLTN +24V1 BPSOLN ICLTN IPPSWN BPWSW REGSWN TONEPY SGND +5V2 C1PWSWN HUMIDC HMCLK2 HMCLK1 TEMP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

WE WE WE WE

WE WE WE WE WE WE WE

YC1

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 NC 2 NC 3 4 5 6

DH (OPTION)

BK BE RD WE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 1 2 3 4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

1 2 3

BYPPCSW

A
YC19 SGND 3 ORGLSWN 2 +5V2 1 YC6 +5V4 SGND 8 4 8 4 1 2 3 WE WE WE WE WE WE 3 2 1 3 2 1

OSDS

B
YC8 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 YC7 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 OPCB YC1 GY EPCB KUIO (OPTION) YC6 YC1 YC6 YC12 YC1 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 POWER KEYN/LED0 LED1/LED2 LED3/LED4 KEY9N/KEY8N KEY7N/KEY6N KEY5N/KEY4N KEY3N/KEY2N KEY1N/KEY0N PRNPCB 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 Hard Disk (OPTION) YC5 Ether net

11/10 9/8 7/6 5/4 3/2 1 SCAN7N/SCAN6N SCAN5N/SCAN4N SCAN3N/SCAN2N SCAN1N/SCAN0N BUZERDRN/+5V SGND DOPSDI DOPSDO DOPCLK DOPSEL DOPRDY ORGTIMN

1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11

6 7 5 3 2 1 PGND 9 PGND 10 +24V1 11 +24V1 12

6 7 5 3 2 1 9 10 11 12

WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE

8 15 7 14 6 13 5 12 4 11 3 10 2 9 1 S YC18 GND OPSWN +5V2 6 5 4 1 2 3 GY GY GY 3 2 1 3 2 1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Document Processor (OPTION)

C
YC4 USB YC3 Parallel I/F PDPCB APCPCB YC3

22/21 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 22/21 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 +24V/PGND +5V3/SGND SGND/SGND +5V/+5V +5V/OUTEPN SGND/PLGCLK EGSO/SCKN EGSI/PDMASKN SBSY/SDIR EGRN/RSTN OVSYNC/+12V

ODSW

GND HPSWN +5V2

3 2 1

4 5 6

GY GY GY

3 2 1

3 2 1 YC1 YC4

SHPSW

YC2

D
LSU WE WE WE PM 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 3R CL 1G RD BK GN WE WE WE WE WE 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 CFM1 1 2

+5V RMLOW RMCLK RMENB SGND

1 2 3 4 5 YC24 +24V4 PGND 3 2 1 2 1 GY GY GY 6 7 8 ERASE+24V4 ERASE2N ERASE1N 1 2

5 4 3 2 1

GY GY GY GY GY

1 2 3 4 5

7 6 5 4 3

_B _A COM B A 5 4 3 2 1 GY GY GY GY GY 1 2 3 4 5 PLGCLKN PLGRDYN PLGDRN PLGGND PLG+24V4 2 1 GY 6 GY 7 2 1 RMPCB

1 2 3 4 5

5 4 3 2 1

RM

YC15 +5V2 4 SEPSWN 3 EXTSWN 2 GND 1 GY GY GY GY 9 10 11 12 FAN1DRN +24V1 THERMA+5V THERMA YC14

BK BK BK BK

1 2 3 4

+5V OUT1 OUT2 GND

ESW FSSW

E
1 2 2 1 OFS B W R BK WE RDWE KEY COUNTER OR KEY CARD (OPTION) YC2

1 2 3

3 2 1

GY GY GY

13 14 15 YC13 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

TONEGND TONEFUL TONE+5V2

COMDA COMDNB COMDNA COMDA

4 3 2 1

EM

YC7 +24V1 KEYCN SGND KEYENBN YC21

DM

F
FCSSW OE FTH FH-S WE WE FH-M BK FTS 3 2 1 WE WE BK OE YC5 1 2 3 +5V1 NC +5V3 YC6 3 SH.OUT 2 1 MH.OUT PSPCB H.LIVE

+24V4 PGND SGND +5V REM RDY CLK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC11 +24V1 1 FAN2DRN 2 YC5 2 1

GY GY GY GY GY GY GY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CFM2

+24V +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND COUNTN MHEATN SHEATN SLEPN ZCROSSC SGND +24V2 SGND +5V3

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1

GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

+24V +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND COUNTN MHEATN SHEATN SLEPN ZCROSSC SGND +24V2 SGND +5V3

13 +24V4 +24V4/PGND 12/11 PGND/+5V4 10/9 8/7 SGND/UOPSEL 6/5 UOPRDY/UOPSD0 4/3 UOPSD1/SCLK 2/1 SLSOLN/RLSOLN YC9

Finisher or Job Separator (OPTION)

G
AC IN

YC1

POWSW

OR BE BE RD RD LIVE FGND COM +5V SGND PGND +24V4 +24V2 NC +24V1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RD LCSSW

YC20 1 +5V 2 SGND 3 PGND 4 +24V4 YC10

+24V4/RCLTN 16/15 +24V4/THVADJ 14/13 +24V4/THVDRN 12/11 PGND/MHVADJC 10/9 PGND/SHVDRN 8/7 PGND/MHVDRN 6/5 PGND/SHVISELN 4/3 +5V/HVCLKC 2/1 YC22 YC8

1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16

+24V4/RCLTN +24V4/THVADJ +24V4/THVDRN PGND/MHVADJC PGND/SHVDRN PGND/MHVDRN PGND/HVISELN HVTPCB +5V/HVCLKC

C1PLSW3N C1PLSW2N SGND C1PLSW1N

1 2 3 4

BK BK BK BK

4 3 2 1

PLSW

ZENER PCB

H I J 8 7

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+5V2 SGND +5V2 SGND LOPSDO LOPSDI LOPSCLK LOPSEL0 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL2 LOPSRDY

TCONDET 5 SGND 6

BK BK

2 1

TCDSW

YC5

DUPLEX UNIT (OPTION)

DUPFCL FIRST PAPER FEEDER (16 ppm: OPTION/20 ppm: STANDARD)

+5V2 BPSWN SGND +5V2 IPPSWN SGND +24V4 ICLTN SECOND PAPER FEEDER (OPTION) DPCB THIRD PAPER FEEDER (OPTION)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

KR 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

KR XR CT 1 3 1 1 BYP 2 2 2 2 PSW 31 3 3 KR GY 1 GY 2 GY 3 GY 4 GY 5

5 4 3 2 1

1 2

1 2

BPWSW 9 +5V2 10 YC6 PSW

5 4

GY GY

1 2

2 1

BYPPWSW

+5V2 11 REGSWN 12 SGND 13 1 2 3 1 2 3 WE WE WE 3 2 1 YC2 3 +5V2 2 C1PDSWN 1 SGND YC4 TCS B W R BK WE RDWE 1 2 3 3 2 1 SGND TONEPY +5V2

3 2 1

GY GY GY

1 2 3

1 2 3

RSW

PFCL

FCLTN 1 +24V1 2 YC3 +24V1 1 BSOLN 2

BYPPFSOL

2DA/2DB-1

2-4-11

CS-1650/2050
Includes: DP-410 PF-410 JS-410 DF-410

PARTS LIST
Published in Sept.04 2DA70951 Revision 1

NOTE
1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order. eg. Parts Number 2DA57010 2DB57010 Parts Name FRONT RIGHT COVER FRONT RIGHT COVER Machine Model 2050 1650 Cycle 60Hz 60Hz Quantity 1 1

2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately. 3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied. Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. eg. Parts Number 2C993030 Parts Name PARTS,DV-410,SP Parts Number 2BZ22230 2C914080 eg. Parts Number 2C993020 Parts Name PARTS,MC-410,SP Parts Number 2BZ02300 2CK10060 Parts Name BUSH GEAR Z26H49515M0001A4 REAR COVER DLP Parts Name SPRING WIRE CORONA WIRE MCH

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations. 5.Items indicated by shaded areas ( ) are supply parts and should be ordered through your Regional Office.

Parts List
2050 1650

CONTENTS
FIG. 1 FIG. 2 FIG. 3 FIG. 4 FIG. 5 FIG. 6 FIG. 7 FIG. 8 FIG. 9 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................. 2 FRAMES..................................................................... 4 EXTERIOR COVERS (2050)...................................... 6 PAPER FEED SECTION (2050)................................. 8 CASSETTE............................................................... 10 CONVEYING SECTION ........................................... 12 PAPER FEED SECTION .......................................... 14 BYPASS SECTION .................................................. 16 EXIT SECTION......................................................... 18 INDEX ...................................................................36 FIG. 10 SCANNER SECTION................................................20 FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT .........................................................22 FIG. 12 FUSER UNIT.............................................................24 FIG. 13 DRIVING & COOLING SECTION .............................26 FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .................................28 FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT ....................................................30 FIG. 16 OPTION I (ORIGINAL HOLDER) ..............................32 FIG. 17 OPTION II & TOOL ...................................................34

-1-

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

2DA/2DB

HCJ

HCA

12

10

4 19
HCA

11 9
AZE

41 26
BHA

BHA HDK BHA

23 16
HDK

42
AZE

36 20 18

15
HCA

17 38 39

6
HDK

24
HDK

22 25 21
BHI

28 27 40

32

BHI

7 33 8 31

30 35 29

BBG BUA

37

3 13
HDK

HDK BBG

34
ZAH

14

HCA

-2-

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

SP Ref.No. 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Part.No. Alternative. Description HINGE FRONT COVER FRONT RIGHT COVER (2050) FRONT RIGHT COVER (1650) FRONT LEFT COVER(K) TRAY EXIT (1/2) RIGHT COVER LEFT LOW COVER UPPER FRONT COVER FRONT SIDE COVER UP FRONT TOP COVER RIGHT TOP COVER LEFT TOP COVER REAR TOP COVER FRONT SIDE COVER MID FRONT SIDE COVER LOW INNER REAR COVER INNER LEFT COVER REAR COVER LEFT FRONT COVER LEFT REAR COVER LEFT MIDDLE COVER PLATE FRONT COVER INNER FRONT COVER COVER DSUB LABEL CONVEYING JAM LABEL RADIATION LID KMAS SHIELD RIGHT COVER MAGNET CATCH LABEL SEP CLEANING BRUSH CLEANER TANK DISPOSAL CAP TANK DISPOSAL LABEL,TONER DISPOSAL TANK HK LID MAIN SW FILM FRONT COVER LABEL LEFT COVER SPONGE COVER COVER SHIELD SHIELD GASKET Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref.No.    40 41 42 Part.No. Alternative. Description

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

                         

    

2C902140 2DA57010 2DB57010 2C957020 2C904031 302C904031 2C904041 2C904060 2C904070 2C904080 2C904090 2C904100 2C904110 2C904120 2C904130 2C904140 2C904150 2C904160 2DA04040 2C904180 2C904190 2C904200 2C904290 2C904372 302C904372 2C904410 2C905080 2C905100 2C912430 2C926130 60804120 2BL05070 2BL16220 2C918150 2C918170 2AV73580 2DA04020 2C904480 2C905220 2C904510 2DA04030 ZG000470 7ZGSTG15C050H01

ZG000490 7ZGSTG55C025H01 SHIELD GASKET 2DA04090 302DA04090 LID FINISHER 2DA04100 302DA04100 LID REAR COVER

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-3-

FIG. 2 FRAMES

2DA/2DB

37

BUC

30 36 33
BUA

BHA

31

BUA

35 34 11

27

BUA

BHA

19 15
BUC BUA

BUA

7 4 13

6 1

22

38
BUA

3 16 39 16 39 17
BUA

14 26

25 32 29

28

20

21 12
BUA

HCJ

24

10

5
HDK

23 9 18 5 5 2

-4-

FIG. 2 FRAMES
SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Part.No. 2C901180 2C902230 2C927790 2C926150 2C902070 2C902080 2C902590 2C902100 2C902110 2C902120 2C902130 2C902151 2C902160 2C902170 2C902180 2C902280 2C902200 2C902240 2C902260 2C902520 2C902540 2C902510 2C902560 2C902270 2C905071 2C905110 2DA25360 2C926010 2C926020 2C926030 2C926040 2C926050 2C926060 2C926080 2C926100 2C926111 2C926120 2C926140 2C927140 2A118370 Alternative. Description CONT SENSOR ASSY FILM BASE L WIRE UPPER LEFT SHIELD UPPER LEFT B BASE RUBBER SPRING DEV PUSH SPRING DEV PUSH F MOUNT REAR COVER MOUNT FRONT COVER PANEL FRONT MOUNT CONT PCB MOUNT CONT LEVER RAIL DLP LEVER DEV PUSH FILM BASE HOLDER PULLEY RAIL CLEANING FILM BASE B GROUND PLATE FRAME COLLAR LEVER CONT. LEVER LOCK CONT. GUIDE A CONT. GUIDE B CONT. SPACER BASE LABEL CONT SET LABEL DRUM CAUTION SHEET OPERATION PCB BASE TERMINAL TRANSFER BASE TERMINAL MAIN TERMINAL DLP TERMINAL TRANSFER TERMINAL SEPARATION TERMINAL MAIN GROUND PLATE CONVEYING TERMINAL FUSER GROUND PLATE EXIT GROUND PLATE FUSER SHIELD UPPER LEFT SWITCH CONTAINER PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

2DA/2DB

302C926111

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-5-

FIG. 3 EXTERIOR COVERS (2050)

2DA/2DB

BHA

BHA BHA HDB

31 4
BHA BHA HCL

7 29

6 19

8 14

12

16 11 17 24
BHA

15 9 18 5

24 23 4

BHA

30 3

11

HDB

4 10 13 26 22 21

10 20 25

HDB

27

28

-6-

FIG. 3 EXTERIOR COVERS (2050)

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Part.No. 3HW00010 3HW01010 3HW01020 3HW02050 3HW02040 3HW02090 3HW02110 3HW02120 3HW02130 3HW02140 3HW02150 3HW04010 3HW04020 3HW04030 3HW04040 3HW06040 3HW06060 3HW26010 3HW27040 3HW27050 3HW27060 2A806250 2BL06211 2BL16080 2C907060 2C907100 2C907270 2C907350 3A504020 SP000360 2BL04410 Alternative. Description REINFORCEMENT FEED ASSY MAIN PCB ASS'Y HEATER BRANCH PCB ASS'Y JUNCTION PLATE MFP UPPER REAR COVER GROUND PLATE CASSETTE GROUND PLATE PF GROUND PLATE PF2 GROUND PLATE PF3 BASE LEG HOOK COVER COVER PAPER FEED LEFT FRONT COVER LEFT REAR COVER REAR COVER GUIDE CONVEYING SPRING FEED SUPPORT PLATE PCB CONN CORD ASSY UPPER IF CONN CORD ASSY LOWER IF CONN CORD ASSY PCB-INTERF RING STOPPER SHAFT FEED PULLEY PULLEY FEED PLATE SIZE DETECTION STOPPER CASSETTE LEVER PICK UP SPRING LEVER COUPLER,RELEASE PUSH SWITCH 03 SN PIN COVER Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2DA/2DB

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-7-

FIG. 4 PAPER FEED SECTION (2050)

2DA/2DB

KAN

43

39

BHA

11 20 3 19
BHA KAL HDB

20 8 40 41 9
BHA

34

44

20

5 19 31 31 24

41 37 38 42 2

10 39

20 12

20

BHA

15

13

34 32 33

36 16 36 18 23 42

22 6 29 30 28 17 27 1
HDG

37 26 38 25 21 14 35

26

-8-

FIG. 4 PAPER FEED SECTION (2050)

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 3HW02020 3HW02080 3HW06020 3HW06030 3HW06050 3HW06070 3HW22010 3HW22020 3HW22030 3HW22040 3HW27010 3HW27020 3HW27070 3HW27080 3HW27090 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 2A806030 2A806250 2C907120 2C907170 2C907230 2C907240 2C907250 2C907260 2C907280 2C907300 2C907310 2C907320 2C907340 2C907400 2C907410 2C907430 2C907480 29807100 2C927140 2C927210 3CY07080 3HL07250 Alternative. Description LEFT RAIL CASSETTE MOUNT SW ROLLER FEED SHAFT PAPER FEED HOLDER FEED SHAFT GUIDE SHEET PAPER FEED GEAR 26/90 GEAR 25 MOUNT MOTOR MOUNT DRIVE MOTOR PAPER FEED CLUTCH PAPER FEED CONN CORD ASSY SIZE SW CONN CORD ASSY PE SENSOR CONN CORD ASSY FEED SW PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION PULLEY,LEADING FEED BUSH FEED RING STOPPER ACTUATOR EMPTY ACTUATOR REGIST SHAFT PICK UP B PLATE PICK UP B HOLDER RETARD SLIDER RAIL TORQUE LIMITER 340 SHAFT RETARD SPRING REGIST SPRING RETARD SPRING PICK UP HOLDER PULLEY A PULLEY GUIDE A BUSH PAPER FEED C HOLDER SENSOR GEAR 16,BYPASS SWITCH CONTAINER SENSOR 248NL1 BUSHING 6 GEAR 20 PF FEED Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 Part.No. M2104260 M2109180 2BC06990 M2107120 Alternative. Description EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA) WIRE SADDLE,LWS-1S STOPPER 5,RING BINDING BAND SG-130

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 2 5 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 5 1 1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-9-

FIG. 5 CASSETTE

2DA/2DB

11 1 4 24 5 6 18 28 15 12 29 25 2 22 23 30 21 27 26 20 13

3 31 14 10 16

8 9 7

17

There is a two-step cassette in 2050

19

- 10 -

FIG. 5 CASSETTE
SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 Part.No. 2C993010 19507050 2C907010 2C907020 2C907030 2C907040 2C907050 2C907070 2C907090 2C907110 2C907140 2C907150 2C907190 2C907200 2C907360 2C907370 2C907380 2C907390 2C907490 2C907500 2C907550 2C907560 2C907570 34907141 2C907590 2C907600 2A806250 2C907620 76508130 2C905200 2C905230 2C905240 Alternative. Description PARTS,CT-410,SP LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE CASSETTE BOTTOM CASSETTE REAR CURSOR C FRONT CURSOR C PLATE SIDE SW LEVER INDICATOR SPRING SIDE SW MARKER INDICATOR PAD CASSETTE SPRING BOTTOM RIGHT CURSOR A STOPPER ARM SPRING CURSOR R MARKER CASSETTE TURN PLATE CASSETTE LEVER CURSOR C STOPPER INDICATOR GROUND PLATE BOTTOM LID CASSETTE A LID CASSETTE B LID CASSETTE C GEAR 18,CASSETTE HOLDER RIGHT CURSOR PIN CURSOR C RING STOPPER SPRING LEVER F SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER LABEL CASSETTE LGR SHEET CASSETTE SIZE(C) SHEET CASSETTE SIZE(I) Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2DA/2DB

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 11 -

FIG. 6 CONVEYING SECTION

2DA/2DB

11 17
BHI

10

18 16

5 7 44 19

29 24 32 21 30 35 45 23 31

BBB

16

22 40

BBB

3 33 9 44 2 26 45

33
BHA

38 4 43

12 37 28 27 42 41 8 20 39 40 31

36

34

25 20 15 39 6 1 14

6 13

BHI

- 12 -

FIG. 6 CONVEYING SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 2C916020 2C916031 2C916040 2C916060 2C916070 2C916080 2C916090 2C916100 2C916120 2C916130 2C916140 2C916160 2C916170 2C916180 2C916190 2C916200 2C916220 2C916230 2C916240 2C916250 2C917010 2C917020 2C917030 2C917040 2C917050 2C917060 2C917070 2C917080 2C917090 2C917100 2C917110 2C917120 2C917150 2C917160 2C917170 2C917180 2BC06910 2BC06980 2C916260 2BL17030 Alternative. Description ROLLER REGIST LEFT BASE CONVEYING FILM REGIST GUIDE LEVER CONVEYING FRONT LEVER CONVEYING REAR STOPPER BUSH REG GUIDE CONVEYING SPRING REGIST F SPRING CONVEYING BASE GROUND PLATE REG GROUND PLATE CONVEYING SHAFT CONVEYING GUIDE FEED A GEAR Z15 REGIST SPRING REGIST R LEVER TRANS GUIDE REINFORCEMENT CONVEYING SHAFT CONVEYING LEVER FILM REGIST GUIDE R COLLAR REGIST ROLLER TRANSFER GEAR TRANSFER GUIDE LEFT TRANS FRONT TERMINAL PLATE TRANS REINFORCEMENT TRANS GUIDE SPRING TRANS F HOUSING STA ELIMINATION PLATE STA ELIMINATION TERMINAL STA ELIMINATION BUSH TRANSFER COLLAR TRANS SPRING TRANS R SPRING GUIDE TRANS BUSH TRANS GUIDE F BUSH TRANS GUIDE R BUSH TRANS ROLL F STOPPER 6 STOPPER 5 BUSH REGIST COLLAR TRANS ROLLER Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 45 Part.No. 2C916270 2C916280 2C916290 2C917200 2C917210 Alternative. Description SPACER REG F SPACER REG T0.5 FILM CONV BASE SPACER TRANS ROLL SPACER GUIDE LEFT TRANS

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 4 1 4 4 1 4 1 4 4 1 4 1 4 4

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 13 -

FIG. 7 PAPER FEED SECTION

2DA/2DB

43 42 6

33 42 32
BHA

18 28

BHA

47

44 BHI 36 1
BHA

34

31 37

48 45 7

KAL BHA

24 20 20 12

27 47 44
BHA

44 25

10
BHA

4 29 49

14 30

50 26 15 16 17 40
BHI

21

35

38

25 46 22 23 39 41 46

11

19

13

BUC

14

- 14 -

FIG. 7 PAPER FEED SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 2C901100 2C907060 2C907080 2C907100 2C907120 2C907130 2C907160 2C907170 2C907180 2C907210 2C907230 2C907240 2C907250 2C907260 2C907270 2C907280 2C907300 2C907290 2C907320 2C907340 2C907350 2C907400 2C907410 2C907420 2C907430 2C907440 2C993210 2C917220 2C907470 2C907480 2C907510 2C907530 2C907540 2C917140 2C927210 2C927520 2C927670 2C927750 2AR07220 2AR07230 Alternative. Description PCB CASSETTE ASSY PLATE SIZE DETECTION LEFT RAIL CASSETTE STOPPER CASSETTE ACTUATOR EMPTY GEAR Z15 REGIST RIGHT GUIDE REGIST ACTUATOR REGIST RIGHT ROLL REGIST SHAFT PAPER FEED SHAFT PICK UP B PLATE PICK UP B HOLDER RETARD SLIDER RAIL LEVER PICK UP TORQUE LIMITER 340 SHAFT RETARD SPRING REGIST B SPRING RETARD SPRING PICK UP SPRING LEVER HOLDER PULLEY A PULLEY GUIDE A HOLDER FEED SHAFT BUSH PAPER FEED C RIGHT MOUNT REGIST PARTS,REGIST CLEANER,ASSY FILM RIGHT TRANS A GROUND PLATE REG R HOLDER SENSOR GROUND PLATE CASS FILM REGIST R GROUND PLATE REG F GUIDE TRANS RIGHT SENSOR 248NL1 WIRE CASSETTE PCB WIRE CASSETTE SW WIRE CASSETTE PE PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Part.No. 2AR07240 2BC06510 2BC06910 2BC06980 SP000360 29807100 3CY07080 2C907610 2C907580 2C907640 Alternative. Description PULLEY,LEADING FEED BUSHING 8 STOPPER 6 STOPPER 5 PUSH SWITCH 03 SN GEAR 16,BYPASS BUSHING 6 SHEET TONER TANK FILM BASE RIB STOPPER PLATE SIZE

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 15 -

FIG. 8 BYPASS SECTION

2DA/2DB

16

20

14 18 13
BUA

23 19 10 1 5 9 6 4 34 32

11

32 25 27 27

29

22 2

28

BHI 21

33

35 36 24 15 12 30 31

17

3 7 26 17 16

- 16 -

FIG. 8 BYPASS SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Part.No. 2C901050 2C904360 2C906010 2C906020 2C906030 2C906040 2C906050 2C906060 2C906080 2C906090 2C906101 2C906110 2C906120 2C906130 2C993140 2BC06910 2BC06510 2C906171 2C993130 2C906190 2C906200 2C906210 2C906220 2DA27531 2C906241 2C906250 2C927210 2C927050 2C906280 2C906290 2C906300 2C906310 2BC06980 2C904490 2DA06010 2DA27580 Alternative. Description PCB MPF SIZE ASSY STRAP LEFT COVER C COVER BYPASS TABLE BYPASS FRONT CURSOR BYPASS REAR CURSOR BYPASS BYPASS SUB TABLE A BYPASS SUB TABLE B GEAR 18 BYPASS TERMINAL PAPER SIZE LIFT PLATE BYPASS SPRING BYPASS LIFT SHEET BYPASS LIFT STOPPER BYPASS PARTS,BYPASS PAD,SP STOPPER 6 BUSHING 8 SHAFT BYPASS PARTS,BYPASS PULLEY,SP CAM BYPASS CLUTCH BYPASS FEED BYPASS PAPER GUIDE F BYPASS PAPER GUIDE R WIRE MPF MOUNT LIFT PLATE GROUND PLATE BYPASS SENSOR 248NL1 SOLENOID BYPASS GROUND PLATE LIFT SHEET BYPASS GUIDE SEAL BYPASS GUIDE SEAL BYPASS LIFT STOPPER 5 PLATE FRONT STRAP ACTUATOR BYPASS WIRE MPF SW Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

2DA/2DB

302DA27531

302DA27580

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 17 -

FIG. 9 EXIT SECTION

2DA/2DB

50 21

38 39

59

10

50

29

48

13 57

13

5 9
BHI

BHI BUA

11 12 41 48 2 15 17
BHI BHI BBB

47 7

54 33

34

18

51 36

55 27 51

56

14 33 4 3

49
BHI

26 22 53 48

51 45 51 45 52 44 42
BUA

30 1

37 28 19 32

20 46 23

35

40 24 16 16

25 31 43 58

- 18 -

FIG. 9 EXIT SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 2C901060 2C904050 2C904210 2C904220 2C904231 2C904241 2C904250 2C904260 2C904270 2C904280 2C904350 2C904390 2C904550 2C904430 2C905090 2C921400 2C921010 2C921020 2C921040 2C921050 2C921061 2C921071 2C921080 2C921091 2C921100 2C921110 2C921120 2C921150 2C921160 2C921180 2C921190 2C921200 2C921221 2C921231 2C921240 2C921390 2C921260 2C921270 2C921280 2C921290 Alternative. Description PCB EJECT SW ASSY LEFT COVER STOPPER LEFT COVER F STOPPER LEFT COVER R STRAP LEFT COVER A STRAP LEFT COVER B SHAFT HOOK HOOK LEFT COVER F HOOK LEFT COVER R JUNCTION PLATE HOOK SPRING LEFT HOOK PLATE LEFT SW CUT WASHER 5 PLATE LEFT HOOK LABEL HIGH TEMP SHOULDER SCREW EXIT ROLLER EXIT INNER ROLLER FEED SHIFT PULLEY FEED SHIFT GUIDE SHIFT GUIDE SEPARATE HOUSING EXIT UPPER HOUSING EXIT LOWER GUIDE EXIT LOWER ACTUATOR EXIT INNER ACTUATOR EXIT LEFT GEAR 23 EXIT ARM SHIFT ARM SEPARATE ARM LINK SPRING PULLEY INNER SPRING PULLEY FEED SHIFT SPRING GUIDE DU GUIDE DU ARM SHIFT B PLATE EXIT HOLDER PLATE EARTH EXIT 2 ARM SEPARATE B SPRING SEPARATE SPRING LINK Quantity Quantity 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Part.No. Alternative. Description

2DA/2DB
Quantity Quantity 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 2 4 1 3 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 1 3 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 1 3 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

2C921301 302C921301 BRACKET EXIT 2C921310 PLATE EARTH EXIT B 2C921330 SPRING ACTUATOR INNER 2C921340 BELT EXIT 2C921350 PULLEY EXIT 2C921360 PULLEY EJECT 2C921370 STOPPER SE 2BC06980 STOPPER 5 2BL21260 SPRING ACTUATOR L 2BT11070 5MVX111DN007 STOPPER 3 3CY07080 BUSHING 6 34821210 STATIC ELIMINATOR B,EJECT 2C927530 WIRE EJECT 2C904440 SPRING LEFT COVER 2C904500 PIN LEFT COVER 2C904460 COVER FRONT STRAP 2C905170 LABEL BYPASS TABLE 2C921380 SPRING PULLEY EJECT 2C905270 LABEL BYPASS JAM

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 19 -

FIG. 10 SCANNER SECTION

2DA/2DB

8
BHA

27 40 19

22 20 21 18

65

64 28 10
BHA BHA BHA

23 28 35 38 41 2 7 59 59 52 69 33

24

55 48
BHA

63
BHA BHA

68
BHA

12 9
BHA

7 16 11 60 34 58 3 33
BHA

53

49 56 50
BHA

44 39 42
BHA

67
BHA

32 61

43 15 51 BHA 39 46 15 54
BHI

BHA

1 68 36 66

47
BHA ZAI

16 57 BHA 37

59

53

60 58

BHA

2 17 53 7 52

29 25 31 5

62 38

59

60 4 53
BHA

70

39

BHA BHA

30 7 6

13 14 58

60

BHA

71
BHA

7 60

4 58

6 26

45

- 20 -

FIG. 10 SCANNER SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 21 22 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Part.No. 2C927540 18512340 2AV12080 2AV12160 2C905160 2BC06510 2BC06980 2C912700 2C912180 2C912090 2C912100 2C912110 2C912120 2C912130 2C912141 2C912150 2C912160 2C993170 2C993180 2C912190 2C912200 2C912210 2C912460 2C912440 2C912450 2C912600 2C912250 2C912260 2C912270 2C912280 2C912290 2C912300 2C912310 2C912320 2C912330 2C912340 2C912350 2C912360 2C912380 2C912390 Alternative. Description WIRE DP GUIDE,SCANNER WIRE GUIDE FFC1 MIRROR B LABEL GLASS CAUTION BUSHING 8 STOPPER 5 SPONGE ORIGINAL SIZE FILM FRAME A LAMP SCANNER YG MIRROR FRAME A REFLECTOR SCANNER MIRROR FRAME B ADJUSTING PLATE B MOUNT BASE DF HINGE LEFT RETAINER WIRE GUIDE FFC B PARTS,CONTACT GLASS,M(SP) PARTS,CONTACT GLASS,I(SP) STANDARD PLATE SHADING LEFT SIZE INDICATOR REAR SIZE INDICATOR(M) REAR SIZE INDICATOR(I) LABEL SIZE (METRIC) LABEL SIZE (INCH) FRONT SIZE INDICATOR CONTACT GLASS BELT SCANNER LOWER SEAL SCANNER CONTACT GLASS ADF SPRING SCANNER TENSION MOTOR PLATE SCANNER GEAR Z18/39 GEAR Z36 SHAFT MOTOR DRIVE DRUM PULLEY FRONT WIRE SCANNER REAR WIRE SCANNER MOTOR SCANNER MIRROR A Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 2 1 2 1 2 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref.No. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 Part.No. 2C912400 2C912410 2C912420 2C912220 2C912470 2C912480 2C912490 2C912580 2C912230 2C912610 2C912620 2C912640 2C912650 2C912660 2C912670 2C912680 2C912690 2C927090 2C927210 2C928040 2DC12230 29812291 2BC12190 2C912710 2C912720 2C927550 2C927560 2C927580 2DA27510 M0208010 M2109000 2DC27180 2C912730 2DA93010 Alternative. Description PIN SCANNER RETAINING GROUND PLATE SCANNER HOLDER GLASS DF MOUNT PI PLATE DSUB HOLDER CCD WIRE MOUNT DSUB COVER ISU HOLDER FFC A MOUNT RELEASE SWITCH GUIDE RELEASE SWITCH SHAFT RELEASE SWITCH SPRING RELEASE SWITCH GUIDE CCD WIRE SHIELD SCANNER FRAME PULLEY SCANNER GROUND PLATE SCANNER B SENSOR ORIGINAL SENSOR 248NL1 PCB LAMP INVERTER SLIDER SCANNER CUSHION,CONTACT GLASS SPRING,MIRROR HOLDER SHIELD SCANNER FRAME B SHIELD BASE WIRE SCANNER PI WIRE ORIGINAL SIZE FFC INVERTER FFC CCD SPACER,SFS-2.6S-B1WM(JST) WIRE SADDLE,WS-1NS SWITCH PI SHIELD WIRE PANEL PART,ISU ASS'Y,SP

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 6 1 1 1 1 8 9 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 6 1 1 1 1 8 9 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 6 1 1 1 1 8 9 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1

302DA93010

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 21 -

FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT

2DA/2DB

5 11 7
BBE

9 8

6 12

BHI

13 10 16 15 17 14 4 1

3 2

BHI

- 22 -

FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part.No. 2C993030 2BZ22230 2C914080 2C914280 2C982010 2AR18280 2A118370 2C918010 2C918040 2C918050 2C918340 2C918370 2C993020 2BZ02300 2CK10060 2C910040 33910230 Alternative. Description PARTS,DV-410,SP BUSH GEAR Z26H49515M0001A4 REAR COVER DLP GEAR Z20H B SET MK-410 (OPTION) SPRING,CLAW SEPARATION PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION BLADE CLEANING LOWER SEAL CLEANING FRONT COVER CLEANING HOLDER CLAW CLAW SEPARATION PARTS,MC-410,SP SPRING WIRE CORONA WIRE MCH GRID PIN CHARGER Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1

2DA/2DB

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 23 -

FIG. 12 FUSER UNIT

2DA/2DB

9 16 8 9 7
BHI

2 6

21

17

18

20

13 4 3 5
BBB BBB

12

BUA

21

10 24 15

25 14

BHU

19 11 25
BBB

23

22

BUA

25

BUA

26 27
BUA

- 24 -

FIG. 12 FUSER UNIT

SP Ref.No. Part.No. 2C993051 2C993061 2C920010 2C920020 2C920030 2C920040 2C920050 2C920060 2C920110 2C920120 2C920130 2C920140 2C920150 2C920160 2C920170 2C920180 2C920190 2C920200 2C920230 2C920250 2C920240 2C920260 2C920310 2C920320 2C920330 2C920340 2C927690 2BR20240 2BY20050 2DA20010 2DA20020 Alternative. 302C993051 302C993061 Description PARTS,FK-410(A),SP PARTS,FK-410(E),SP RIGHT FRAME FUSER LEFT FRAME FUSER REAR GUIDE FUSER FRONT GUIDE FUSER ROLLER HEAT ROLLER PRESS FRONT PRESSING PLATE REAR PRESSING PLATE SPRING PRESSURE PLATE HEATER FUSER FRONT BUSH HEAT ROLLER REAR BUSH HEAT ROLLER GEAR Z38 HEAT ROLLER GEAR FUSER Z28 SPRING SEPARATOR GROUND PLATE PRESS HEATER M120 FUSER HEATER M230 FUSER HEATER S120 FUSER HEATER S230 FUSER THERMISTOR FUSER SEAL DISCHAGER BEARING PRESSURE THERMOCUT 180 FUSER WIRE FUSER UNIT SEPARATOR ASSY NUT FUSER A SPACER FUSER UNIT STOPPER FUSER SPACER Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1

2DA/2DB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

302DA20010 302DA20020

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 25 -

FIG. 13 DRIVING & COOLING SECTION

2DA/2DB

41
BHA

45 4

BHA

44

BHA

39 34 9 43 14 39 35 38 10 20 19 7
XBB BHA

43 33 28 11 26

BHA

BHA

31 40

12 13 30 29

25 16 5 32

BHA

27

24 15

8
BHA

36

18

42

BHA

1 6 22 21 5 3 23 2 5 5 37

17

- 26 -

FIG. 13 DRIVING & COOLING SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 2C922010 2C922020 2C922030 2C922040 2C922050 2C922060 2C922070 2C922080 2C922100 2C922110 2C922130 2C922140 2C922150 2C922160 2C922170 2C922180 2C922190 2C922200 2C922210 2C922220 2C922230 2C922240 2C922250 2C922260 2C922270 2C922280 2C922290 2C922300 2C922330 2C922340 2C922350 2C922360 2C922370 2C923010 2C923020 2C923030 2C927010 2C927020 2C927070 2C927190 Alternative. Description MOUNT DRIVE UNIT GEAR 122 GEAR 88/34 GEAR 50 GEAR 40 POSITIONING BUSH DRUM GEAR 30/23 GEAR 60 GEAR 25 DPX GEAR 32 DPX MOUNT CONT DRIVE GEAR 25 DEV GEAR 26 DEV SHAFT DPX DRIVE COUPLING CONT P COUPLING CONT S COUPLING DRUM GEAR 43/20 GEAR 20 GEAR 25 GEAR 29 FIX JOINT SPRING FIX JOINT SPRING DRUM COUPLING SPRING CONT P SPRING CONT S MOUNT HV PCB HOLDER GEAR GEAR 40 FIXJOINT GEAR 30 PF GEAR 31 GEAR 51 REG GEAR 25 PF MOUNT REG MOTOR UPPER DUCT LOWER DUCT FILM COOLING MOTOR MAIN MOTOR EJECT FAN COOLING 80-25 CLUTCH FEED Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 45 Part.No. 2C927220 2C927760 3CY07080 2C901190 2A806250 Alternative. Description MOTOR REGISTRATION WIRE MAIN MOTOR BUSHING 6 PCB REGISTRATION ASSY RING STOPPER

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 27 -

FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2DA/2DB

BUC

36
ZAI

51 13
BUC

1 44 6 20 4 14 35 28 29 16 5 24

BHA

ZAI

17

34

30

46

45

47

BHA

ZAI

23 37 16 18 58
BHA

30
ZAI

49
ZAI

47 50

40
GEA ZAI

39 41
ZAI

ZAI

22 54 53 52
ZAI

41 11

42 38

10
BHA

22 7 15
BHI BHA

32 31

59

19 22 60 35

27 21

26 27

43 48 25 56

TGB

28 9 3 2 33

19

BHA

8
BUA

12

55

57

- 28 -

FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Part.No. 2C993090 2C901170 2C918400 2C904300 2C904310 2C904340 2C916150 2C918350 2C918360 2C926070 2DA26500 2C926510 2DA27020 2C927170 2C927180 2C927510 M2109330 2C927600 2C927610 2C927710 2C927660 2C927680 2C927740 2DA93020 2DB93010 2DA93030 2C927230 2A627940 M2105740 M2108130 M2109000 M2109020 M7005030 M70A5020 2C928051 2BL14480 2C926160 2DA26510 2DA26520 M2108800 Alternative. Description PARTS,LSU ASS'Y,SP DISPOSAL SENSOR ASSY HOLDER SENSOR B ARM INTERLOCK SW MOUNT INTERLOCK SW SPRING LEFT INTERLOCK PIN CONVEYING HOOK DETECTION PLATE SPRING DETECTION HOLDER INTERLOCK SW SHIELD MAIN MOUNT POWER SOURCE FAN COOLING 50-10 SWITCH INTERLOCK L SWITCH INTERLOCK F WIRE ENGINE WIRE SADLE,YMC-10-0 WIRE FUSER WIRE DESK POWER WIRE PD WIRE DESK WIRE FRONT SW FFC HVU PARTS,PCB ENGINE ASS'Y,SP (2050) PARTS,PCB ENGINE ASS'Y,SP (1650) PARTS,PCB MAIN ASS'Y,SP CORE SFT-72SNB-026K CORE 10-20X10 MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05S-2 SPACER,KGPS-4S WIRE SADDLE,WS-1NS WIRE SADDLE,WS-2WS CLAMP,EMT-5N(TAKEUCHI) CLAMP,FCC-125EM513(TAKEUCHI) PCB HIGH VOLTAGE SEAL WIRE SHIELD CCD WIRE RAIL SHIELD GUIDE CF SPACER,KGPS-3.5S(KITAGAWA) Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 SP Ref.No. 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 52 53 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Part.No. 2DA01070 2DA27560 2BJ26120 2DA26550 2AV27440 2DA26540 2DD26070 3BH26030 YB000510 ZG000470 ZG000480 ZG000500 2DA28070 2DA28080 M5561000 M1658030 M6056000 2DA27050 2DA27060 29927231 2A627930 2C927250 2A627940 Alternative. 302DA01070 Description PCB PRINTER ASSY FFC MAIN LID MODULAR LABEL INTERFACE CORE 15-26X13 LID NETWORK PLATE OPTION PIN,OPTION FERRITE CORE SHIELD GASKET SHIELD GASKET SHIELD GASKET PCB LVU 100 PCB LVU 200 FUSE,CES6-N1(SOC) FUSE,215008(LITTEL-FUSE) FUSE,19181-T6.3H(WICKMANN) POWER CORD(120) POWER CORD(230) POWER CODE AS(240) CORE 11-25X14 GASKET SHIELD 8X10X45 CORE 10-20X10

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1

7YBFP007C001H01 7ZGSTG15C050H01 7ZGSTG15C180H01 7ZGSTG710050H01

302DA27050 302DA27060

302DA93020 302DB93010 302DA93030

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 29 -

FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT

2DA/2DB

30

29 31 28 32 16 15 13 11 9 11 19 20 38 22 2 21 18 17 4 34 36 3 5 14 12 10 7 6 37 8 33 1 35

23 39 40
ZAM

AZE

24 25
ZAH ZAN ZAM ZAM

26
ZAM

25

27
ZAH ZAH

- 30 -

FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT

SP Ref.No.                 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 30 31 31 32 33 34 35 Part.No. 2DA25010 2DA01011 2DA25350 2DC25052 2DC25060 2DC25070 2DA25290 2DA25030 2DA25220 2DA25050 2DA25270 2DA25280 2DA25040 2DA25260 2DA25060 2DA25250 2DA25110 2DA25130 2DA25120 2DA25340 2DA28100 2DA25510 2DA25330 2C925210 2DA25300 2DA25320 2C925201 2DA25380 2DA25390 2DA25400 2DA25410 2DA25420 2DA25020 2DA25230 2DA25440 2DA25450 2DA25490 2DA25470 2DA27520 2C925180 Alternative. Description COVER OPERATION J PCB OPERATION ASSY KEY OPERATION 10 KEY PRINT KEY STOP KEY RESET KEY MANAGEMENT KEY SAVER KEY EXPOSURE KEY DECISION KEY SELECT KEY ZOOM KEY FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION B KEY STATUS KEY LANGUAGE RIGHT DUST SHIELD CENTER DUST SHIELD LEFT DUST SHIELD LEFT DUST SHIELD B PCB LCD PCB DUST SHIELD SPACER OPE PCB B SPACER OPE PCB STOPPER LCD GROUND PLATE LCD MOUNT OPERATION R CENTER OPE SHEET E CENTER OPE SHEET G CENTER OPE SHEET F CENTER OPE SHEET I CENTER OPE SHEET S CENTER OPE COVER LID FAX KEY LEFT OPE SHEET E LEFT OPE SHEET SHEET SAVER E SHEET KEYBOARD E WIRE PANEL RETAINER OPERATION Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 SP Ref.No. 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 2A627940 2C927230 2DA25520 2DA25530 2DA25500 Alternative. Description CORE 10-20X10 CORE SFT-72SNB-026K FG PLATE A FG PLATE B SHEET SET

2DA/2DB
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

302DA01011

302DA25520 302DA25530 302DA25500

302DA25510

          

302DA25390 302DA25400 302DA25410 302DA25420

1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 31 -

FIG. 16 OPTION I (ORIGINAL HOLDER)

2DA/2DB

6 7 3

5 2

- 32 -

FIG. 16 OPTION I (ORIGINAL HOLDER)

SP Ref.No. Part.No. 2CX82010 2A612800 2A612810 2A612820 60904280 B8014160 2C912630 B1A64100 Alternative. Description SET,PLATEN COVER TYPE D (OPTION) COVER,PLATEN MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER HINGE,ORIGINAL HOLDER ORIGINAL POCKET BINDING TAP-TITE P SCREW M4X16 STOPPER RELEASE SWITCH BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M4 X 10 CRFREE P-T Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 2 1 6 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 6 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 6 1 2

2DA/2DB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 33 -

FIG. 17 OPTION II & TOOL

2DA/2DB

KEY COUNTER

HEATER

(1650 CASSETTE) (2050 UPPER CASSETTE)

Scan System (F)

14 1 23 4 17 15 5 2 3 16

7 6 10

10

11 12

13

CASSETTE HEATER (2050 LOWER CASSETTE)

BHA

TOOL

10 18

19

22

9 21 20

- 34 -

FIG. 17 OPTION II & TOOL

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 Part.No. 2C960110 29236240 J0220040 25055010 2C960100 66060030 66060040 B2303060 B0004350 B4304060 C2303000 2A360010 82142540 2C993190 2C993200 2C927780 2C907520 2AV60100 2AV60110 2A727480 2A727490 3BG02060 3HW02030 2C905120 35968110 3JR01010 Alternative. Description WIRE KEY COUNTER SOCKET ASS'Y,KEY COUNTER PLUG EL 4P,ELP-04V SOCKET,KEY COUNTER MOUNT KEY COUNTER RETAINER,KEY COUNTER MOUNT,KEY COUNTER COUNTER-SUNK HEAD SCREW BFHM3X6 (B ROUND HEAD SCREW M4X35 TRIPLE SCREW M4X6 (BLACK) NUT BNM3 (BLACK) COVER,KEY COUNTER KEY COUNTER PARTS,DEH.ASSY120,SP PARTS,DEH.ASSY240,SP WIRE DEHUMIDIFIER PLATE HEATER J HEATER,CASSETTE(120) HEATER,CASSETTE(240) HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(120) (2050) HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(240) (2050) PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER (2050) MOUNT HEATER (2050) LABEL CASSETTE TEMP (2050) STOPPER WIRE ASS'Y SP SCANNER NIC ASS'Y Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2DA/2DB

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

- 35 -

INDEX
SP Part.No. 18512340 19507050 25055010 29236240 29807100 29812291 29927231 2A118370 2A360010 2A612800 2A612810 2A612820 2A627930 2A627940 2A727480 2A727490 2A806030 2A806250 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 2AR18280 2AV12080 2AV12160 2AV27440 2AV60100 2AV60110 2AV73580 2BC06510 2BC06910 2BC06980 2BC06990 2BC12190 2BJ26120 2BL04410 2BL05070 2BL06211 2BL14480 2BL16080 2BL16220 Alternative. Description GUIDE,SCANNER WIRE LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE SOCKET,KEY COUNTER SOCKET ASS'Y,KEY COUNTER GEAR 16,BYPASS CUSHION,CONTACT GLASS POWER CODE AS(240) PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION COVER,KEY COUNTER COVER,PLATEN MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER HINGE,ORIGINAL HOLDER CORE 11-25X14 CORE 10-20X10 HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(120) (2050) HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(240) (2050) BUSH FEED RING STOPPER PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION PULLEY,LEADING FEED SPRING,CLAW SEPARATION GUIDE FFC1 MIRROR B CORE 15-26X13 HEATER,CASSETTE(120) HEATER,CASSETTE(240) LABEL,TONER DISPOSAL TANK HK BUSHING 8 STOPPER 6 STOPPER 5 STOPPER 5,RING SPRING,MIRROR HOLDER LID MODULAR PIN COVER LABEL SEP CLEANING SHAFT FEED PULLEY SEAL WIRE PULLEY FEED BRUSH CLEANER Fig.No. 10 5 17 17 4,7 10 14 2,11 17 16 16 16 14 14,15 17 17 4 3,4,5,13 4,7 4,7 4,7 11 10 10 14 17 17 1 7,8,10 6,7,8 6,7,8,9,10 4 10 14 3 1 3 14 3 1 SP Part.No. Alternative. Description COLLAR TRANS ROLLER SPRING ACTUATOR L SEPARATOR ASSY STOPPER 3 NUT FUSER A SPRING WIRE BUSH GEAR Z26H49515M0001A4 PCB MPF SIZE ASSY PCB EJECT SW ASSY PCB CASSETTE ASSY DISPOSAL SENSOR ASSY CONT SENSOR ASSY PCB REGISTRATION ASSY BASE RUBBER SPRING DEV PUSH MOUNT REAR COVER MOUNT FRONT COVER PANEL FRONT MOUNT CONT PCB HINGE FRONT COVER MOUNT CONT LEVER RAIL DLP LEVER DEV PUSH FILM BASE RAIL CLEANING FILM BASE L FILM BASE B GROUND PLATE FRAME SPACER BASE HOLDER PULLEY GUIDE A CONT. COLLAR LEVER CONT. LEVER LOCK CONT. GUIDE B CONT. SPRING DEV PUSH F TRAY EXIT (1/2) RIGHT COVER LEFT COVER LEFT LOW COVER UPPER FRONT COVER

2DA/2DB
Fig.No. 6 9 12 9 12 11 11 8 9 7 14 2 13 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 9 1 1

2BL17030 2BL21260 2BR20240 2BT11070 5MVX111DN007 2BY20050 2BZ02300 2BZ22230 2C901050 2C901060 2C901100 2C901170 2C901180 2C901190 2C902070 2C902080 2C902100 2C902110 2C902120 2C902130 2C902140 2C902151 2C902160 2C902170 2C902180 2C902200 2C902230 2C902240 2C902260 2C902270 2C902280 2C902510 2C902520 2C902540 2C902560 2C902590 2C904031 302C904031 2C904041 2C904050 2C904060 2C904070

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 36 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2C904080 2C904090 2C904100 2C904110 2C904120 2C904130 2C904140 2C904150 2C904160 2C904180 2C904190 2C904200 2C904210 2C904220 2C904231 2C904241 2C904250 2C904260 2C904270 2C904280 2C904290 2C904300 2C904310 2C904340 2C904350 2C904360 2C904372 2C904390 2C904410 2C904430 2C904440 2C904460 2C957020 2C904480 2C904490 2C904500 2C904510 2C904550 2C905071 2C905080 Alternative. Description FRONT SIDE COVER UP FRONT TOP COVER RIGHT TOP COVER LEFT TOP COVER REAR TOP COVER FRONT SIDE COVER MID FRONT SIDE COVER LOW INNER REAR COVER INNER LEFT COVER LEFT FRONT COVER LEFT REAR COVER LEFT MIDDLE COVER STOPPER LEFT COVER F STOPPER LEFT COVER R STRAP LEFT COVER A STRAP LEFT COVER B SHAFT HOOK HOOK LEFT COVER F HOOK LEFT COVER R JUNCTION PLATE HOOK PLATE FRONT COVER ARM INTERLOCK SW MOUNT INTERLOCK SW SPRING LEFT INTERLOCK SPRING LEFT HOOK STRAP LEFT COVER C INNER FRONT COVER PLATE LEFT SW COVER DSUB PLATE LEFT HOOK SPRING LEFT COVER COVER FRONT STRAP FRONT LEFT COVER(K) FILM FRONT COVER PLATE FRONT STRAP PIN LEFT COVER SPONGE COVER CUT WASHER 5 LABEL CONT SET LABEL CONVEYING JAM Fig.No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 14 14 14 9 8 1 9 1 9 9 9 1 1 8 9 1 9 2 1 SP Part.No. 2C905090 2C905100 2C905110 2C905120 2C905160 2C905170 2C905200 2C905220 2C905230 2C905240 2C905270 2C906010 2C906020 2C906030 2C906040 2C906050 2C906060 2C906080 2C906090 2C906101 2C906110 2C906120 2C906130 2C906171 2C906190 2C906200 2C906210 2C906220 2C906241 2C906250 2C906280 2C906290 2C906300 2C906310 2C907010 2C907020 2C907030 2C907040 2C907050 2C907060 Alternative. Description LABEL HIGH TEMP LABEL RADIATION LABEL DRUM CAUTION LABEL CASSETTE TEMP (2050) LABEL GLASS CAUTION LABEL BYPASS TABLE LABEL CASSETTE LGR LABEL LEFT COVER SHEET CASSETTE SIZE(C) SHEET CASSETTE SIZE(I) LABEL BYPASS JAM COVER BYPASS TABLE BYPASS FRONT CURSOR BYPASS REAR CURSOR BYPASS BYPASS SUB TABLE A BYPASS SUB TABLE B GEAR 18 BYPASS TERMINAL PAPER SIZE LIFT PLATE BYPASS SPRING BYPASS LIFT SHEET BYPASS LIFT STOPPER BYPASS SHAFT BYPASS CAM BYPASS CLUTCH BYPASS FEED BYPASS PAPER GUIDE F BYPASS PAPER GUIDE R MOUNT LIFT PLATE GROUND PLATE BYPASS GROUND PLATE LIFT SHEET BYPASS GUIDE SEAL BYPASS GUIDE SEAL BYPASS LIFT CASSETTE BOTTOM CASSETTE REAR CURSOR C FRONT CURSOR C PLATE SIDE SW PLATE SIZE DETECTION Fig.No. 9 1 2 17 10 9 5 1 5 5 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 5 5 5 5 5 3,7

302C904372

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 37 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2C907070 2C907080 2C907090 2C907100 2C907110 2C907120 2C907130 2C907140 2C907150 2C907160 2C907170 2C907180 2C907190 2C907200 2C907210 2C907230 2C907240 2C907250 2C907260 2C907270 2C907280 2C907290 2C907300 2C907310 2C907320 2C907340 2C907350 2C907360 2C907370 2C907380 2C907390 2C907400 2C907410 2C907420 2C907430 2C907440 2C907470 2C907480 2C907490 2C907500 Alternative. Description LEVER INDICATOR LEFT RAIL CASSETTE SPRING SIDE SW STOPPER CASSETTE MARKER INDICATOR ACTUATOR EMPTY GEAR Z15 REGIST PAD CASSETTE SPRING BOTTOM RIGHT GUIDE REGIST ACTUATOR REGIST RIGHT ROLL REGIST RIGHT CURSOR A STOPPER ARM SHAFT PAPER FEED SHAFT PICK UP B PLATE PICK UP B HOLDER RETARD SLIDER RAIL LEVER PICK UP TORQUE LIMITER 340 SPRING REGIST B SHAFT RETARD SPRING REGIST SPRING RETARD SPRING PICK UP SPRING LEVER SPRING CURSOR R MARKER CASSETTE TURN PLATE CASSETTE LEVER CURSOR C HOLDER PULLEY A PULLEY GUIDE A HOLDER FEED SHAFT BUSH PAPER FEED C RIGHT MOUNT REGIST GROUND PLATE REG R HOLDER SENSOR STOPPER INDICATOR GROUND PLATE BOTTOM Fig.No. 5 7 5 3,7 5 4,7 7 5 5 7 4,7 7 5 5 7 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 3,7 4,7 7 4,7 4 4,7 4,7 3,7 5 5 5 5 4,7 4,7 7 4,7 7 7 4,7 5 5 SP Part.No. 2C907510 2C907520 2C907530 2C907540 2C907550 2C907560 2C907570 2C907580 2C907590 2C907600 2C907610 2C907620 2C907640 2C910040 2C912090 2C912100 2C912110 2C912120 2C912130 2C912141 2C912150 2C912160 2C912180 2C912190 2C912200 2C912210 2C912220 2C912230 2C912250 2C912260 2C912270 2C912280 2C912290 2C912300 2C912310 2C912320 2C912330 2C912340 2C912350 2C912360 Alternative. Description GROUND PLATE CASS PLATE HEATER J FILM REGIST R GROUND PLATE REG F LID CASSETTE A LID CASSETTE B LID CASSETTE C FILM BASE RIB HOLDER RIGHT CURSOR PIN CURSOR C SHEET TONER TANK SPRING LEVER F STOPPER PLATE SIZE GRID LAMP SCANNER YG MIRROR FRAME A REFLECTOR SCANNER MIRROR FRAME B ADJUSTING PLATE B MOUNT BASE DF HINGE LEFT RETAINER WIRE GUIDE FFC B FILM FRAME A STANDARD PLATE SHADING LEFT SIZE INDICATOR REAR SIZE INDICATOR(M) MOUNT PI HOLDER FFC A CONTACT GLASS BELT SCANNER LOWER SEAL SCANNER CONTACT GLASS ADF SPRING SCANNER TENSION MOTOR PLATE SCANNER GEAR Z18/39 GEAR Z36 SHAFT MOTOR DRIVE DRUM PULLEY FRONT WIRE SCANNER REAR WIRE SCANNER Fig.No. 7 17 7 7 5 5 5 7 5 5 7 5 7 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 38 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2C912380 2C912390 2C912400 2C912410 2C912420 2C912430 2C912440 2C912450 2C912460 2C912470 2C912480 2C912490 2C912580 2C912600 2C912610 2C912620 2C912630 2C912640 2C912650 2C912660 2C912670 2C912680 2C912690 2C912700 2C912710 2C912720 2C912730 2C914080 2C914280 2C916020 2C916031 2C916040 2C916060 2C916070 2C916080 2C916090 2C916100 2C916120 2C916130 2C916140 Alternative. Description MOTOR SCANNER MIRROR A PIN SCANNER RETAINING GROUND PLATE SCANNER HOLDER GLASS DF LID KMAS LABEL SIZE (METRIC) LABEL SIZE (INCH) REAR SIZE INDICATOR(I) PLATE DSUB HOLDER CCD WIRE MOUNT DSUB COVER ISU FRONT SIZE INDICATOR MOUNT RELEASE SWITCH GUIDE RELEASE SWITCH STOPPER RELEASE SWITCH SHAFT RELEASE SWITCH SPRING RELEASE SWITCH GUIDE CCD WIRE SHIELD SCANNER FRAME PULLEY SCANNER GROUND PLATE SCANNER B SPONGE ORIGINAL SIZE SHIELD SCANNER FRAME B SHIELD BASE SHIELD WIRE PANEL REAR COVER DLP GEAR Z20H B ROLLER REGIST LEFT BASE CONVEYING FILM REGIST GUIDE LEVER CONVEYING FRONT LEVER CONVEYING REAR STOPPER BUSH REG GUIDE CONVEYING SPRING REGIST F SPRING CONVEYING BASE GROUND PLATE REG GROUND PLATE CONVEYING Fig.No. 10 10 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 SP Part.No. 2C916150 2C916160 2C916170 2C916180 2C916190 2C916200 2C916220 2C916230 2C916240 2C916250 2C916260 2C916270 2C916280 2C916290 2C917010 2C917020 2C917030 2C917040 2C917050 2C917060 2C917070 2C917080 2C917090 2C917100 2C917110 2C917120 2C917140 2C917150 2C917160 2C917170 2C917180 2C917200 2C917210 2C917220 2C918010 2C918040 2C918050 2C918150 2C918170 2C918340 Alternative. Description PIN CONVEYING HOOK SHAFT CONVEYING GUIDE FEED A GEAR Z15 REGIST SPRING REGIST R LEVER TRANS GUIDE REINFORCEMENT CONVEYING SHAFT CONVEYING LEVER FILM REGIST GUIDE R COLLAR REGIST BUSH REGIST SPACER REG F SPACER REG T0.5 FILM CONV BASE ROLLER TRANSFER GEAR TRANSFER GUIDE LEFT TRANS FRONT TERMINAL PLATE TRANS REINFORCEMENT TRANS GUIDE SPRING TRANS F HOUSING STA ELIMINATION PLATE STA ELIMINATION TERMINAL STA ELIMINATION BUSH TRANSFER COLLAR TRANS SPRING TRANS R GUIDE TRANS RIGHT SPRING GUIDE TRANS BUSH TRANS GUIDE F BUSH TRANS GUIDE R BUSH TRANS ROLL F SPACER TRANS ROLL SPACER GUIDE LEFT TRANS FILM RIGHT TRANS A BLADE CLEANING LOWER SEAL CLEANING FRONT COVER CLEANING TANK DISPOSAL CAP TANK DISPOSAL HOLDER CLAW Fig.No. 14 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 11 11 11 1 1 11

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 39 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2C918350 2C918360 2C918370 2C918400 2C920010 2C920020 2C920030 2C920040 2C920050 2C920060 2C920110 2C920120 2C920130 2C920140 2C920150 2C920160 2C920170 2C920180 2C920190 2C920200 2C920230 2C920240 2C920250 2C920260 2C920310 2C920320 2C920330 2C920340 2C921010 2C921020 2C921040 2C921050 2C921061 2C921071 2C921080 2C921091 2C921100 2C921110 2C921120 2C921150 Alternative. Description DETECTION PLATE SPRING DETECTION CLAW SEPARATION HOLDER SENSOR B RIGHT FRAME FUSER LEFT FRAME FUSER REAR GUIDE FUSER FRONT GUIDE FUSER ROLLER HEAT ROLLER PRESS FRONT PRESSING PLATE REAR PRESSING PLATE SPRING PRESSURE PLATE HEATER FUSER FRONT BUSH HEAT ROLLER REAR BUSH HEAT ROLLER GEAR Z38 HEAT ROLLER GEAR FUSER Z28 SPRING SEPARATOR GROUND PLATE PRESS HEATER M120 FUSER HEATER S120 FUSER HEATER M230 FUSER HEATER S230 FUSER THERMISTOR FUSER SEAL DISCHAGER BEARING PRESSURE THERMOCUT 180 FUSER ROLLER EXIT INNER ROLLER FEED SHIFT PULLEY FEED SHIFT GUIDE SHIFT GUIDE SEPARATE HOUSING EXIT UPPER HOUSING EXIT LOWER GUIDE EXIT LOWER ACTUATOR EXIT INNER ACTUATOR EXIT LEFT GEAR 23 EXIT ARM SHIFT Fig.No. 14 14 11 14 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 SP Part.No. 2C921160 2C921180 2C921190 2C921200 2C921221 2C921231 2C921240 2C921260 2C921270 2C921280 2C921290 2C921301 2C921310 2C921330 2C921340 2C921350 2C921360 2C921370 2C921380 2C921390 2C921400 2C922010 2C922020 2C922030 2C922040 2C922050 2C922060 2C922070 2C922080 2C922100 2C922110 2C922130 2C922140 2C922150 2C922160 2C922170 2C922180 2C922190 2C922200 2C922210 Alternative. Description ARM SEPARATE ARM LINK SPRING PULLEY INNER SPRING PULLEY FEED SHIFT SPRING GUIDE DU GUIDE DU ARM SHIFT B PLATE EARTH EXIT 2 ARM SEPARATE B SPRING SEPARATE SPRING LINK BRACKET EXIT PLATE EARTH EXIT B SPRING ACTUATOR INNER BELT EXIT PULLEY EXIT PULLEY EJECT STOPPER SE SPRING PULLEY EJECT PLATE EXIT HOLDER SHOULDER SCREW EXIT MOUNT DRIVE UNIT GEAR 122 GEAR 88/34 GEAR 50 GEAR 40 POSITIONING BUSH DRUM GEAR 30/23 GEAR 60 GEAR 25 DPX GEAR 32 DPX MOUNT CONT DRIVE GEAR 25 DEV GEAR 26 DEV SHAFT DPX DRIVE COUPLING CONT P COUPLING CONT S COUPLING DRUM GEAR 43/20 GEAR 20 Fig.No. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13

302C921301

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 40 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2C922220 2C922230 2C922240 2C922250 2C922260 2C922270 2C922280 2C922290 2C922300 2C922330 2C922340 2C922350 2C922360 2C922370 2C923010 2C923020 2C923030 2C925180 2C925201 2C925210 2C926010 2C926020 2C926030 2C926040 2C926050 2C926060 2C926070 2C926080 2C926100 2C926111 2C926120 2C926130 2C926140 2C926150 2C926160 2C926510 2C927010 2C927020 2C927050 2C927070 Alternative. Description GEAR 25 GEAR 29 FIX JOINT SPRING FIX JOINT SPRING DRUM COUPLING SPRING CONT P SPRING CONT S MOUNT HV PCB HOLDER GEAR GEAR 40 FIXJOINT GEAR 30 PF GEAR 31 GEAR 51 REG GEAR 25 PF MOUNT REG MOTOR UPPER DUCT LOWER DUCT FILM COOLING RETAINER OPERATION MOUNT OPERATION R SPACER OPE PCB BASE TERMINAL TRANSFER BASE TERMINAL MAIN TERMINAL DLP TERMINAL TRANSFER TERMINAL SEPARATION TERMINAL MAIN HOLDER INTERLOCK SW GROUND PLATE CONVEYING TERMINAL FUSER GROUND PLATE EXIT GROUND PLATE FUSER SHIELD RIGHT COVER SHIELD UPPER LEFT SHIELD UPPER LEFT B SHIELD CCD WIRE MOUNT POWER SOURCE MOTOR MAIN MOTOR EJECT SOLENOID BYPASS FAN COOLING 80-25 Fig.No. 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 15 15 15 2 2 2 2 2 2 14 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 14 14 13 13 8 13 SP Part.No. 2C927090 2C927140 2C927170 2C927180 2C927190 2C927210 2C927220 2C927230 2C927250 2C927510 2C927520 2C927530 2C927540 2C927550 2C927560 2C927580 2C927600 2C927610 2C927660 2C927670 2C927680 2C927690 2C927710 2C927740 2C927750 2C927760 2C927780 2C927790 2C928040 2C928051 2C960100 2C960110 2C982010 2C993010 2C993020 2C993030 2C993051 2C993061 2C993090 2C993130 Alternative. Description SENSOR ORIGINAL SWITCH CONTAINER SWITCH INTERLOCK L SWITCH INTERLOCK F CLUTCH FEED SENSOR 248NL1 MOTOR REGISTRATION CORE SFT-72SNB-026K GASKET SHIELD 8X10X45 WIRE ENGINE WIRE CASSETTE PCB WIRE EJECT WIRE DP WIRE SCANNER PI WIRE ORIGINAL SIZE FFC INVERTER WIRE FUSER WIRE DESK POWER WIRE DESK WIRE CASSETTE SW WIRE FRONT SW WIRE FUSER UNIT WIRE PD FFC HVU WIRE CASSETTE PE WIRE MAIN MOTOR WIRE DEHUMIDIFIER WIRE UPPER LEFT PCB LAMP INVERTER PCB HIGH VOLTAGE MOUNT KEY COUNTER WIRE KEY COUNTER SET MK-410 (OPTION) PARTS,CT-410,SP PARTS,MC-410,SP PARTS,DV-410,SP PARTS,FK-410(A),SP PARTS,FK-410(E),SP PARTS,LSU ASS'Y,SP PARTS,BYPASS PULLEY,SP Fig.No. 10 2,4 14 14 13 4,7,8,10 13 14,15 14 14 7 9 10 10 10 10 14 14 14 7 14 12 14 14 7 13 17 2 10 14 17 17 11 5 11 11 12 12 14 8

302C926111

302C993051 302C993061

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 41 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2C993140 2C993170 2C993180 2C993190 2C993200 2C993210 2CK10060 2CX82010 2DA01011 2DA01070 2DA57010 2DA04020 2DA04030 2DA04040 2DA04090 2DA04100 2DA06010 2DA20010 2DA20020 2DA25010 2DA25020 2DA25030 2DA25040 2DA25050 2DA25060 2DA25110 2DA25120 2DA25130 2DA25220 2DA25230 2DA25250 2DA25260 2DA25270 2DA25280 2DA25290 2DA25300 2DA25320 2DA25330 2DA25340 2DA25350 Alternative. Description PARTS,BYPASS PAD,SP PARTS,CONTACT GLASS,M(SP) PARTS,CONTACT GLASS,I(SP) PARTS,DEH.ASSY120,SP PARTS,DEH.ASSY240,SP PARTS,REGIST CLEANER,ASSY CORONA WIRE MCH SET,PLATEN COVER TYPE D (OPTION) PCB OPERATION ASSY PCB PRINTER ASSY FRONT RIGHT COVER (2050) LID MAIN SW COVER SHIELD REAR COVER LID FINISHER LID REAR COVER ACTUATOR BYPASS SPACER FUSER UNIT STOPPER FUSER SPACER COVER OPERATION J CENTER OPE COVER KEY SAVER KEY FUNCTION KEY DECISION KEY STATUS RIGHT DUST SHIELD LEFT DUST SHIELD CENTER DUST SHIELD KEY EXPOSURE LID FAX KEY KEY LANGUAGE KEY FUNCTION B KEY SELECT KEY ZOOM KEY MANAGEMENT STOPPER LCD GROUND PLATE LCD SPACER OPE PCB B LEFT DUST SHIELD B KEY OPERATION 10 Fig.No. 8 10 10 17 17 7 11 16 15 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 12 12 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 SP Part.No. 2DA25360 2DA25380 2DA25390 2DA25400 2DA25410 2DA25420 2DA25440 2DA25450 2DA25470 2DA25490 2DA25500 2DA25510 2DA25520 2DA25530 2DA26500 2DA26510 2DA26520 2DA26540 2DA26550 2DA27020 2DA27050 2DA27060 2DA27510 2DA27520 2DA27531 2DA27560 2DA27580 2DA28070 2DA28080 2DA28100 2DA93010 2DA93020 2DA93030 2DB57010 2DB93010 2DC12230 2DC25052 2DC25060 2DC25070 2DC27180 Alternative. Description SHEET OPERATION PCB CENTER OPE SHEET E CENTER OPE SHEET G CENTER OPE SHEET F CENTER OPE SHEET I CENTER OPE SHEET S LEFT OPE SHEET E LEFT OPE SHEET SHEET KEYBOARD E SHEET SAVER E SHEET SET PCB DUST SHIELD FG PLATE A FG PLATE B SHIELD MAIN RAIL SHIELD GUIDE CF LID NETWORK LABEL INTERFACE FAN COOLING 50-10 POWER CORD(120) POWER CORD(230) FFC CCD WIRE PANEL WIRE MPF FFC MAIN WIRE MPF SW PCB LVU 100 PCB LVU 200 PCB LCD PART,ISU ASS'Y,SP PARTS,PCB ENGINE ASS'Y,SP (2050) PARTS,PCB MAIN ASS'Y,SP FRONT RIGHT COVER (1650) PARTS,PCB ENGINE ASS'Y,SP (1650) SLIDER SCANNER KEY PRINT KEY STOP KEY RESET SWITCH PI Fig.No. 2 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 10 15 8 14 8 14 14 15 10 14 14 1 14 10 15 15 15 10

302DA25390 302DA25400 302DA25410 302DA25420

302DA01011 302DA01070

302DA04090 302DA04100 302DA20010 302DA20020

302DA25500 302DA25510 302DA25520 302DA25530

302DA27050 302DA27060

302DA27531 302DA27580

302DA93010 302DA93020 302DA93030 302DB93010

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 42 -

2DA/2DB
SP Part.No. 2DD26070 33910230 34821210 34907141 35968110 3A504020 3BG02060 3BH26030 3CY07080 3HL07250 3HW00010 3HW01010 3HW01020 3HW02020 3HW02030 3HW02040 3HW02050 3HW02080 3HW02090 3HW02110 3HW02120 3HW02130 3HW02140 3HW02150 3HW04010 3HW04020 3HW04030 3HW04040 3HW06020 3HW06030 3HW06040 3HW06050 3HW06060 3HW06070 3HW22010 3HW22020 3HW22030 3HW22040 3HW26010 3HW27010 3HW27020 Alternative. Description PLATE OPTION PIN CHARGER STATIC ELIMINATOR B,EJECT GEAR 18,CASSETTE STOPPER WIRE ASS'Y SP COUPLER,RELEASE PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER (2050) PIN,OPTION BUSHING 6 GEAR 20 PF FEED REINFORCEMENT FEED ASSY MAIN PCB ASS'Y HEATER BRANCH PCB ASS'Y LEFT RAIL CASSETTE MOUNT HEATER (2050) UPPER REAR COVER JUNCTION PLATE MFP MOUNT SW GROUND PLATE CASSETTE GROUND PLATE PF GROUND PLATE PF2 GROUND PLATE PF3 BASE LEG HOOK COVER COVER PAPER FEED LEFT FRONT COVER LEFT REAR COVER REAR COVER ROLLER FEED SHAFT PAPER FEED GUIDE CONVEYING HOLDER FEED SHAFT SPRING FEED GUIDE SHEET PAPER FEED GEAR 26/90 GEAR 25 MOUNT MOTOR MOUNT DRIVE SUPPORT PLATE PCB MOTOR PAPER FEED CLUTCH PAPER FEED Fig.No. 14 11 9 5 17 3 17 14 4,7,9,13 4 3 3 3 4 17 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 SP Part.No. 3HW27040 3HW27050 3HW27060 3HW27070 3HW27080 3HW27090 3JR01010 60804120 60904280 66060030 66060040 76508130 82142540 B0004350 B1A64100 B2303060 B4304060 B8014160 C2303000 J0220040 M0208010 M1658030 M2104260 M2105740 M2107120 M2108130 M2108800 M2109000 M2109020 M2109180 M2109330 M5561000 M6056000 M7005030 M70A5020 SP000360 YB000510 ZG000470 ZG000480 ZG000490 ZG000500 Alternative. Description Fig.No. 3 3 3 4 4 4 17 1 16 17 17 5 17 17 16 17 17 16 17 17 10 14 4 14 4 14 14 10,14 14 4 14 14 14 14 14 3,7 14 1,14 14 1 14

CONN CORD ASSY UPPER IF CONN CORD ASSY LOWER IF CONN CORD ASSY PCB-INTERF CONN CORD ASSY SIZE SW CONN CORD ASSY PE SENSOR CONN CORD ASSY FEED SW SCANNER NIC ASS'Y MAGNET CATCH ORIGINAL POCKET RETAINER,KEY COUNTER MOUNT,KEY COUNTER SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER KEY COUNTER ROUND HEAD SCREW M4X35 BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M4 X 10 CRFREE P-T COUNTER-SUNK HEAD SCREW BFHM3X6 (B TRIPLE SCREW M4X6 (BLACK) BINDING TAP-TITE P SCREW M4X16 NUT BNM3 (BLACK) PLUG EL 4P,ELP-04V SPACER,SFS-2.6S-B1WM(JST) FUSE,215008(LITTEL-FUSE) EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA) MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05S-2 BINDING BAND SG-130 SPACER,KGPS-4S SPACER,KGPS-3.5S(KITAGAWA) WIRE SADDLE,WS-1NS WIRE SADDLE,WS-2WS WIRE SADDLE,LWS-1S WIRE SADLE,YMC-10-0 FUSE,CES6-N1(SOC) FUSE,19181-T6.3H(WICKMANN) CLAMP,EMT-5N(TAKEUCHI) CLAMP,FCC-125EM513(TAKEUCHI) PUSH SWITCH 03 SN 7YBFP007C001H01 FERRITE CORE 7ZGSTG15C050H01 SHIELD GASKET 7ZGSTG15C180H01 SHIELD GASKET 7ZGSTG55C025H01 SHIELD GASKET 7ZGSTG710050H01 SHIELD GASKET

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 43 -

CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION

REF. ITEM#
AZE BBB BBE BBG BBR BHA BHI BHU BUA BUC FDD GEA HCA HCJ HDB HDK KAL TGB XBB ZAH ZAI ZAM ZAN BAA64100 B1303050 B1304060 B1304100 B1303080 B3023060 B3313080 B8013120 B3314100 B3314120 B3324060 B9604080 B4104060 B4104100 B4343080 B4144100 E0020100 C4204000 C2893140 B1A63080 B1A53060 B1A63120 B1A64100

DESCRIPTION
+TP TAP-TITE P SCREW M4X10 BINDING SCREW BVM3X5 (BLACK) BINDING SCREW BVM4X6 (BLACK) BINDING SCREW BVM4X10 (BLACK) BINDING SCREW BVM3X8 (BLACK) BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M3 X 6 S-ZMC S-T BINDING TAP-TITE SCREW M3X08 BINDING TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X12 BINDING TAP-TITE P BRONZE SCREW M4X10 M4X12 +BINDING TAP-TIGHT P SCREW BINDING TAP TIGHT SCREW M4X6(BLACK) GROUNDING SCREW M4X8 (BRASS,N;) TRIPLE SCREW M4X6(CHROMIUM) TRIPLE SCREW M4X10(CHROMIUM) TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08(BLACK) +TP TAP-TITE P SCREW M4X10(CHROMIUM) SPRING PIN / M2 X 10 S-BLK OT LOCK WASHER / M4X8.5X0.4T S-ZMC SHIM 6.2X14X0.25T BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M3 X 8 CRFREE P-T BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M3 X 6 CRFREE S-T BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M3 X 12 CRFREE P-T BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M4 X 10 CRFREE P-T

DP-410

PARTS LIST
Published in Jul. 03

NOTE
1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order. eg. Parts Number 3HL04010 Parts Name FRONT COVER Machine Model DP-410 Cycle 60Hz Quantity 1

2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately. 3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied. 4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations.

Parts List
DP-410

CONTENTS
FIG. 1 FIG. 2 FIG. 3 FIG. 4 EXTERIOR COVERS..................................................2 FRAMES .....................................................................4 PAPER FEED SECTION.............................................6 PAPER CONVEYING SECTION.................................8 INDEX ...................................................................10

-1-

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

20 19 23 6 23 4 7 24

3HL

21

24 8 8 18 22 15

13 3 17 16 10 9 1 5 17

14

11
HDB

11 HDB 25

12

-2-

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Part.No. 3HL04010 3HL04020 3HL04030 3HL06010 3HL06020 3HL06030 3HL06040 3HL06050 3HL06060 3HL06070 3HL06080 3HL10010 3HL27010 3HL02280 3HL06110 2C901050 2C927210 65907210 3HL05020 3HL05030 3HL05040 3HL05050 3HL06090 3HL06120 3HL04040 Description FRONT COVER REAR COVER STOPPER EJECT ORIGINAL TABLE ORIGINAL COVER TABLE FRONT CURSOR TABLE REAR CURSOR TABLE RACK TABLE ACTUATOR SIZE DETECTION ACTUATOR LOOP SWITCH FILM TABLE PI TRAY LOOP CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-TABLE MAT ORIGINAL HOLDER TERMINAL PAPER SIZE PCB MPF SIZE ASSY SENSOR 248NL1 GEAR 20,CASSETTE LABEL,ORIGINAL SET LABEL,ORIGINAL CURSOR LABEL,HINGE CAUTION LABEL,JAM REMOVEMENT CUSHION CURSOR SPACER CURSOR PROTECTING PLATE DP Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 SP Ref. No Part.No. Description

3HL
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-3-

FIG. 2 FRAMES

3HL

33

HDB BBA BHA HDB

32 32

7
HDB

FIG.1-13 8 34 20 36 11
HDB HDB BHA

35

15 37 2

HDB

31 29

23 25 26
KAZ

37 22

1 2

4 30
BUA BUA

27 21 19 3 21 14 13
HDB HDB HDB BUA BUA

16 18 17
HDB

12 5 10
HBH

24

HBH

38 6

28 38

-4-

FIG. 2 FRAMES
SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Part.No. 3HL01010 3HL08250 3HL02020 3HL02050 3HL02060 3HL02070 3HL02090 3HL02110 3HL02120 3HL02130 3HL02140 3HL02170 3HL02190 3HL02200 3HL02220 3HL02230 3HL02240 3HL02250 3HL08040 3HL08290 3HL08180 3HL22010 3HL27050 3HL02150 3HL27120 3HL27130 3BR08040 3CY07080 3HK27020 3HW02140 M2105030 M2105720 M2107120 3HL22020 2A627940 3HL02260 3HL08320 3HL02180 Description MAIN PCB ASS'Y FILM GUIDE BASE LEFT HINGE ADJUSTING PLATE A HINGE ADJUSTING PLATE B HINGE RIGHT MOUNT BASE HINGE GROUND PLATE EJECT GROUND PLATE MOTOR GROUND PLATE CONVEYING SHAFT HINGE ACTUATOR BASE PIN ADJUSTING BASE REINFORCEMENT GROUND PLATE BASE FILM BASE MOUNT PUSH SW PUSH SW DP SPRING,PUSH SWITCH GUIDE READING FILM GUIDE BASE B SPRING,READING FRONT FRAME CONVEYING CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-SOL ADJUSTING LIMITATION SOLENOID,PRESSURE PULLEY SOLENOID,FEED SHIFT SPRING,READING BUSHING 6 CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-INTERFACE BASE LEG NYLON CLAMP 5N,NK-5N MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 BINDING BAND SG-130 REAR FRAME CONVEYING CORE 10-20X10 GROUND PLATE DRIVE GUIDE PAPER HOLD PIN DP Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 SP Ref. No Part.No. Description

3HL
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-5-

FIG. 3 PAPER FEED SECTION

15

3HL

KAK

40 20 15 48 47 49 43 44
BBK HDB

51

5 41 38 37 27 42 26
BBA HDB

34 13 45

35
HDB

12 38 50 10 23 37 53 11

19

25 1

37

30

3
HDB HDB

55 54 16 32 14 32 32 29
HDB

28 46 36 52

18

32

32 24 29 7
HDB HDB

8 31 2 22
HDB

24

33 39

21 17

25
HDB

-6-

FIG. 3 PAPER FEED SECTION

SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 3HL01020 3HL07010 3HL07020 3HL07030 3HL07040 3HL07050 3HL07060 3HL07070 3HL07080 3HL07090 3HL07100 3HL07110 3HL07120 3HL07130 3HL07140 3HL07150 3HL07160 3HL07170 3HL07180 3HL07190 3HL07200 3HL07210 3HL07220 3HL07230 3HL07240 3HL07250 3HL07290 3HL07300 3HL07310 3HL07320 3HL07340 3HL08080 3HL27020 M2105720 3HL27100 2A107060 2A806030 2A806250 2C927210 3A707110 Description RELEASE SWITCH ASS'Y FRONT FRAME PAPER FEED REAR FRAME PAPER FEED SHAFT LEADING FEED SHAFT PAPER FEED COVER PAPER FEED UPPER GUIDE PAPER FEED LOWER GUIDE PAPER FEED HOLDER LEADING FEED HOLDER SEPARATION PAD,SEPARATION SPRING,LIFT MOUNT PAPER FEED MOTOR SHAFT REGISTRATION STOPPER ORIGINAL ACTUATOR ORIGINAL SET FRONT HOOK PF COVER REAR HOOK PF COVER BOSS LIFT BELT 150S2M,PAPER FEED SHAFT JAM REMOVEMENT DIAL JAM REMOVEMENT SPRING SEPARATION SPRING REGISTRATION SPRING HOOK GEAR 20 PF FEED GUIDE PF FILM LEADING SPRING REGISTRATION B FILM GEAR COVER GROUND PLATE PI PULLEY CONVEYING CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-ORGSW MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 MOTOR,PAPER FEED FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE BUSH FEED RING STOPPER SENSOR 248NL1 GEAR 30,PAPER FEED Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 1 SP Ref. No 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Part.No. 3A707120 3A722100 3BC07130 3BR07040 3CY07080 3HL07390 36211110 36211500 68721640 3HL07400 3HL07370 3HL07380 2BC06910 3HL07410 3HL07420 Description PULLEY,LEADING FEED GEAR 42/29 ONE-WAY CLUTCH 6 PULLEY,PAPER FEED BUSHING 6 PAD FRONT SEP PULLEY,LEADING FEED ADF GEAR,LEADING FEED JOINT PULLEY 20,DUPLEX CONVEYING COLLAR FEED BRAKE PF ROLLER FILM FRONT PAD STOPPER 6 WEIGHT PAD TAPE WEIGHT

3HL
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-7-

FIG. 4 CONVEYING SECTION

HDB

3HL

HDB

49 44 10 7 6 39 30 43 41
HDB

54
HDB

44

36 40

53
HDB

11 8 1 3 11 39 9 40 38 9 55 50
BHA

5
HDB

51 50

55 38

FIG 3

14 39 21

37 46
BBA

51 42 2

KAK

28

BBK

26

34 38 48

47
BBA BHA

25 17 19

29 52 27 45 25 16

12 13

42

24 15
KAK

23 19

31 32 8 22

20 42 33 35 33

18

-8-

FIG. 4 CONVEYING SECTION

SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 3HL00010 3HL02160 3HL07130 3HL08010 3HL08020 3HL08060 3HL08070 3HL08080 3HL08090 3HL08130 3HL08140 3HL10150 3HL10160 3HL10020 3HL10030 3HL10040 3HL10050 3HL10060 3HL10070 3HL10090 3HL10100 3HL10110 3HL10120 3HL10130 3HL10140 3HL27040 3HL22030 3HL22040 3HL22050 3HL22060 3HL22080 3HL22090 3HL22100 3HL22190 3HL22120 3HL27030 3HL27100 2A806250 2BC06910 2BG22970 Description CONVEYING ROLLER ASS'Y MOUNT GUIDE SHAFT REGISTRATION GUIDE CONVEYING GUIDE B CONVEYING MOUNT PI ACTUATOR CONVEYING TIMING PULLEY CONVEYING SPRING,CONVEYING PULLEY SPRING,CONVEYING ACTUATOR BUSHING 8 SPRING ,GND SE GROUND PLATE SE GUIDE LOOP FEED SHIFT ROLLER LOOP SHAFT LOOP PULLEY HOLDER LOOP PULLEY LEVER LOOP PRESSURE SPRING,LOOP PRESSURE SPRING,LF SHIFT GUIDE ROLLER EJECT SHAFT EJECT PULLEY SPRING,EJECT PULLEY STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT PULLEY LOOP CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-MOTOR GEAR 49/13 IDLE GEAR16 LOOP ROLLER GEAR 24/30 PULLEY PULLEY 40 CONVEYING GEAR48 LOOP ROLLER GEAR 30 JAM REMOVEMENT GEAR 16 EJECT BELT 180S2M GEAR 15 IDLE CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-REGIST MOTOR,PAPER FEED RING STOPPER STOPPER 6 BUSH 6 EW Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 2 SP Ref. No 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Part.No. 2C927210 3CY07080 M2607010 3HL08270 3HL22130 3HL22140 3HL22170 3HL22160 3HL08280 3HL10170 3HL10180 3HL22180 3HL08230 3HL08240 3HL10190 Description SENSOR 248NL1 BUSHING 6 BINDING BAND,PLT1M BRAKE CONV ROLLER A SPACER BELT REAR FRAME SUPPORT TENSION PLATE DRIVE PULLEY REAR SUPPORT BRAKE CONV ROLLER B COLLAR EJECT SPONGE EJECT AUXILIARY SPRING DRIVE MOUNT BRAKE F MOUNT BRAKE R FILM EJECT

3HL
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-9-

INDEX
SP Part.No. 2A107060 2A627940 2A806030 2A806250 2BC06910 2BG22970 2C901050 2C927210 3A707110 3A707120 3A722100 3BC07130 3BR07040 3BR08040 3CY07080 3HK27020 3HL00010 3HL01010 3HL01020 3HL02020 3HL02050 3HL02060 3HL02070 3HL02090 3HL02110 3HL02120 3HL02130 3HL02140 3HL02150 3HL02160 3HL02170 3HL02180 3HL02190 3HL02200 3HL02220 3HL02230 3HL02240 3HL02250 3HL02260 3HL02280 Description FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE CORE 10-20X10 BUSH FEED RING STOPPER STOPPER 6 BUSH 6 EW PCB MPF SIZE ASSY SENSOR 248NL1 GEAR 30,PAPER FEED PULLEY,LEADING FEED GEAR 42/29 ONE-WAY CLUTCH 6 PULLEY,PAPER FEED SPRING,READING BUSHING 6 CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-INTERFACE CONVEYING ROLLER ASS'Y MAIN PCB ASS'Y RELEASE SWITCH ASS'Y LEFT HINGE ADJUSTING PLATE A HINGE ADJUSTING PLATE B HINGE RIGHT MOUNT BASE HINGE GROUND PLATE EJECT GROUND PLATE MOTOR GROUND PLATE CONVEYING SHAFT HINGE ACTUATOR BASE ADJUSTING LIMITATION MOUNT GUIDE PIN ADJUSTING PIN DP BASE REINFORCEMENT GROUND PLATE BASE FILM BASE MOUNT PUSH SW PUSH SW DP SPRING,PUSH SWITCH GROUND PLATE DRIVE MAT ORIGINAL HOLDER Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 3 5 4 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 5 4 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 5 4 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 5 4 2 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fig.No. 3 2 3 3,4 3,4 4 1 1,3,4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2,3,4 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 SP Part.No. 3HL04010 3HL04020 3HL04030 3HL04040 3HL05020 3HL05030 3HL05040 3HL05050 3HL06010 3HL06020 3HL06030 3HL06040 3HL06050 3HL06060 3HL06070 3HL06080 3HL06090 3HL06110 3HL06120 3HL07010 3HL07020 3HL07030 3HL07040 3HL07050 3HL07060 3HL07070 3HL07080 3HL07090 3HL07100 3HL07110 3HL07120 3HL07130 3HL07140 3HL07150 3HL07160 3HL07170 3HL07180 3HL07190 3HL07200 3HL07210 Description FRONT COVER REAR COVER STOPPER EJECT ORIGINAL PROTECTING PLATE DP LABEL,ORIGINAL SET LABEL,ORIGINAL CURSOR LABEL,HINGE CAUTION LABEL,JAM REMOVEMENT TABLE ORIGINAL COVER TABLE FRONT CURSOR TABLE REAR CURSOR TABLE RACK TABLE ACTUATOR SIZE DETECTION ACTUATOR LOOP SWITCH FILM TABLE PI CUSHION CURSOR TERMINAL PAPER SIZE SPACER CURSOR FRONT FRAME PAPER FEED REAR FRAME PAPER FEED SHAFT LEADING FEED SHAFT PAPER FEED COVER PAPER FEED UPPER GUIDE PAPER FEED LOWER GUIDE PAPER FEED HOLDER LEADING FEED HOLDER SEPARATION PAD,SEPARATION SPRING,LIFT MOUNT PAPER FEED MOTOR SHAFT REGISTRATION STOPPER ORIGINAL ACTUATOR ORIGINAL SET FRONT HOOK PF COVER REAR HOOK PF COVER BOSS LIFT BELT 150S2M,PAPER FEED SHAFT JAM REMOVEMENT DIAL JAM REMOVEMENT Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3HL
Fig.No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 10 -

3HL
SP Part.No. 3HL07220 3HL07230 3HL07240 3HL07250 3HL07290 3HL07300 3HL07310 3HL07320 3HL07340 3HL07370 3HL07380 3HL07390 3HL07400 3HL07410 3HL07420 3HL08010 3HL08020 3HL08040 3HL08060 3HL08070 3HL08080 3HL08090 3HL08130 3HL08140 3HL08180 3HL08230 3HL08240 3HL08250 3HL08270 3HL08280 3HL08290 3HL08320 3HL10010 3HL10020 3HL10030 3HL10040 3HL10050 3HL10060 3HL10070 3HL10090 Description SPRING SEPARATION SPRING REGISTRATION SPRING HOOK GEAR 20 PF FEED GUIDE PF FILM LEADING SPRING REGISTRATION B FILM GEAR COVER GROUND PLATE PI BRAKE PF ROLLER FILM FRONT PAD PAD FRONT SEP COLLAR FEED WEIGHT PAD TAPE WEIGHT GUIDE CONVEYING GUIDE B CONVEYING GUIDE READING MOUNT PI ACTUATOR CONVEYING TIMING PULLEY CONVEYING SPRING,CONVEYING PULLEY SPRING,CONVEYING ACTUATOR BUSHING 8 SPRING,READING MOUNT BRAKE F MOUNT BRAKE R FILM GUIDE BASE BRAKE CONV ROLLER A BRAKE CONV ROLLER B FILM GUIDE BASE B GUIDE PAPER HOLD TRAY LOOP GUIDE LOOP FEED SHIFT ROLLER LOOP SHAFT LOOP PULLEY HOLDER LOOP PULLEY LEVER LOOP PRESSURE SPRING,LOOP PRESSURE SPRING,LF SHIFT GUIDE Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 Fig.No. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 2 4 4 3,4 4 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 2 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 SP Part.No. 3HL10100 3HL10110 3HL10120 3HL10130 3HL10140 3HL10150 3HL10160 3HL10170 3HL10180 3HL10190 3HL22010 3HL22020 3HL22030 3HL22040 3HL22050 3HL22060 3HL22080 3HL22090 3HL22100 3HL22120 3HL22130 3HL22140 3HL22160 3HL22170 3HL22180 3HL22190 3HL27010 3HL27020 3HL27030 3HL27040 3HL27050 3HL27100 3HL27120 3HL27130 3HW02140 36211110 36211500 65907210 68721640 M2105030 Description ROLLER EJECT SHAFT EJECT PULLEY SPRING,EJECT PULLEY STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT PULLEY LOOP SPRING ,GND SE GROUND PLATE SE COLLAR EJECT SPONGE EJECT AUXILIARY FILM EJECT FRONT FRAME CONVEYING REAR FRAME CONVEYING GEAR 49/13 IDLE GEAR16 LOOP ROLLER GEAR 24/30 PULLEY PULLEY 40 CONVEYING GEAR48 LOOP ROLLER GEAR 30 JAM REMOVEMENT GEAR 16 EJECT GEAR 15 IDLE SPACER BELT REAR FRAME SUPPORT PULLEY REAR SUPPORT TENSION PLATE DRIVE SPRING DRIVE BELT 180S2M CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-TABLE CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-ORGSW CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-REGIST CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-MOTOR CONN.CORD ASSY PCB-SOL MOTOR,PAPER FEED SOLENOID,PRESSURE PULLEY SOLENOID,FEED SHIFT BASE LEG PULLEY,LEADING FEED ADF GEAR,LEADING FEED JOINT GEAR 20,CASSETTE PULLEY 20,DUPLEX CONVEYING NYLON CLAMP 5N,NK-5N Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fig.No. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 3 4 4 2 3,4 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 11 -

3HL
SP Part.No. Description Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 Fig.No. 2,3 2 4 SP Part.No. Description Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V Fig.No.

M2105720 MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 M2107120 BINDING BAND SG-130 M2607010 BINDING BAND,PLT1M

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 12 -

CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION

REF. ITEM #
BBA BBK BHA BUA HAY HBH HDB KAK KAZ B1303040 B1303060 B3023060 B3314100 B4053060 B4303060 B4343080 E0020080 E0030200

DESCRIPTION
BINDING SCREW BVM3X4 (BLACK) BINDING SCREW BVM3X6 (BLACK) BINDING TAP TITE S SCREW M3X6 BINDING TAP-TITE P BRONZE SCREW M4X10 TRIPLE TAP-TITE S SCREW M3X06 TRIPLE SCREW M3X6 (BLACK) TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08(BLACK) SPRING PIN 2X8 SPRING PIN 3X20

PF-410

PARTS LIST
Published in Jul. 03

NOTE
1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order. eg. Parts Number 3HW04010 Parts Name COVER PAPER FEED Machine Model PF-410 Cycle 60Hz Quantity 1

2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately. 3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied. Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. eg. Parts Number 2C993010 Parts Name PARTS, CT-410, SP Parts Number 2C907010 2C907020 Parts Name CASSETTE BOTTOM CASSETTE

4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations.

Parts List
PF-410

CONTENTS
FIG. 1 FIG. 2 FIG. 3 FIG. 4 EXTERIOR COVERS..................................................2 PAPER FEED SECTION.............................................4 CASSETTE .................................................................6 OPTION ......................................................................8 INDEX ...................................................................10

-1-

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

BHA BHA

3HW

31

7
HDB BHA BHA HCL

29 8 14

6 19

12

16 11 17 24 23 24 18
BHA

15 9 5

30 3

11

22 10 13 26

21

10 20

25 1
HDB

27

28

-2-

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Part.No. 3HW00010 3HW01010 3HW01020 3HW27100 3HW02040 3HW02090 3HW02110 3HW02120 3HW02130 3HW02140 3HW02150 3HW04010 3HW04020 3HW04030 3HW04040 3HW06040 3HW06060 3HW26010 3HW27040 3HW27050 3HW27060 2A806250 2BL06211 2BL16080 2C907060 2C907100 2C907270 2C907350 3A504020 SP000360 2BL04410 Description REINFORCEMENT FEED ASSY MAIN PCB ASS'Y HEATER BRANCH PCB ASS'Y SHIELD GASKET UPPER REAR COVER GROUND PLATE CASSETTE GROUND PLATE PF GROUND PLATE PF2 GROUND PLATE PF3 BASE LEG HOOK COVER COVER PAPER FEED LEFT FRONT COVER LEFT REAR COVER REAR COVER GUIDE CONVEYING SPRING FEED SUPPORT PLATE PCB CONN CORD ASSY UPPER IF CONN CORD ASSY LOWER IF CONN CORD ASSY PCB-INTERF RING STOPPER SHAFT FEED PULLEY PULLEY FEED PLATE SIZE DETECTION STOPPER CASSETTE LEVER PICK UP SPRING LEVER COUPLER,RELEASE PUSH SWITCH 03 SN PIN COVER Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref. No Part.No. Description

3HW
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-3-

FIG. 2 PAPER FEED SECTION

KAN

3HW

43

39

BHA

11
HDB

20 3 19
KAL BHA

20 8 40 9 41
BHA

34

44

20

5 19 20 31 31

4 41 37
BHA

10 39

20 12

2 38 42 13

24 15

34 32 33

36 16 36 18 23 42

22 6 29 30 28 26 38 17 27 1
HDG

37 35

25

21

14

26

-4-

FIG. 2 PAPER FEED SECTION

SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. 3HW02020 3HW02080 3HW06020 3HW06030 3HW06050 3HW06070 3HW22010 3HW22020 3HW22030 3HW22040 3HW27010 3HW27020 3HW27070 3HW27080 3HW27090 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 2A806030 2A806250 2C907120 2C907170 2C907230 2C907240 2C907250 2C907260 2C907280 2C907300 2C907310 2C907320 2C907340 2C907400 2C907410 2C907430 2C907480 29807100 2C927140 2C927210 3CY07080 3HL07250 Description LEFT RAIL CASSETTE MOUNT SW ROLLER FEED SHAFT PAPER FEED HOLDER FEED SHAFT GUIDE SHEET PAPER FEED GEAR 26/90 GEAR 25 MOUNT MOTOR MOUNT DRIVE MOTOR PAPER FEED CLUTCH PAPER FEED CONN CORD ASSY SIZE SW CONN CORD ASSY PE SENSOR CONN CORD ASSY FEED SW PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION PULLEY,LEADING FEED BUSH FEED RING STOPPER ACTUATOR EMPTY ACTUATOR REGIST SHAFT PICK UP B PLATE PICK UP B HOLDER RETARD SLIDER RAIL TORQUE LIMITER 340 SHAFT RETARD SPRING REGIST SPRING RETARD SPRING PICK UP HOLDER PULLEY A PULLEY GUIDE A BUSH PAPER FEED C HOLDER SENSOR GEAR 16,BYPASS SWITCH CONTAINER SENSOR 248NL1 BUSHING 6 GEAR 20 PF FEED Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 SP Ref. No 41 42 43 44 Part.No. M2104260 M2109180 2BC06990 M2107120 Description EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA) WIRE SADDLE,LWS-1S STOPPER 5,RING BINDING BAND SG-130

3HW
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 2 5 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 5 1 1

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-5-

FIG. 3 CASSETTE

3HW

11 1 4 24 5 6 18 28 15 12 29 25 2 22 23 21 27 26 20 13

3 30 14 10 16 19

8 9 7 17

-6-

FIG. 3 CASSETTE
SP Ref. No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 Part.No. 2C993010 19507050 2C907010 2C907020 2C907030 2C907040 2C907050 2C907070 2C907090 2C907110 2C907140 2C907150 2C907190 2C907200 2C907360 2C907370 2C907380 2C907390 2C907490 2C907500 2C907550 2C907560 2C907570 34907141 2C907590 2C907600 2A806250 68802070 76508130 2AV05090 2AV05100 Description PARTS,CT-410,SP LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE CASSETTE BOTTOM CASSETTE REAR CURSOR C FRONT CURSOR C PLATE SIDE SW LEVER INDICATOR SPRING SIDE SW MARKER INDICATOR PAD CASSETTE SPRING BOTTOM RIGHT CURSOR A STOPPER ARM SPRING CURSOR R MARKER CASSETTE TURN PLATE CASSETTE LEVER CURSOR C STOPPER INDICATOR GROUND PLATE BOTTOM LID CASSETTE A LID CASSETTE B LID CASSETTE C GEAR 18,CASSETTE HOLDER RIGHT CURSOR PIN CURSOR C RING STOPPER SPRING A,LIFT UP SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER SHEET,CASSETTE SIZE INDICATION(METRIC) SHEET,CASSETTE SIZE INDICATION(INCH) Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref. No Part.No. Description

3HW
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-7-

FIG. 4 OPTION

3HW

CASSETTE HEATER

BHA

-8-

FIG. 4 OPTION
SP Ref. No 1 1 2 3 4 Part.No. 2A727480 2A727490 3BG02060 3HW02030 2C905120 Description HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(120) HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(240) PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER MOUNT HEATER LABEL CASSETTE TEMP Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref. No Part.No. Description

3HW
Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V

Parts with "" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them. Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

-9-

INDEX
SP Part.No. 19507050 2AR07220 2AR07230 2AR07240 2AV05090 2AV05100 2A727480 2A727490 2A806030 2A806250 2BC06990 2BL04410 2BL06211 2BL16080 2C905120 2C907010 2C907020 2C907030 2C907040 2C907050 2C907060 2C907070 2C907090 2C907100 2C907110 2C907120 2C907140 2C907150 2C907170 2C907190 2C907200 2C907230 2C907240 2C907250 2C907260 2C907270 2C907280 2C907300 2C907310 2C907320 Description LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE PULLEY,PAPER FEED PULLEY,SEPARATION PULLEY,LEADING FEED SHEET,CASSETTE SIZE INDICATION(MET SHEET,CASSETTE SIZE INDICATION(INC HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(120) HEATER,DEHUMIDIFIER(240) BUSH FEED RING STOPPER STOPPER 5,RING PIN COVER SHAFT FEED PULLEY PULLEY FEED LABEL CASSETTE TEMP CASSETTE BOTTOM CASSETTE REAR CURSOR C FRONT CURSOR C PLATE SIDE SW PLATE SIZE DETECTION LEVER INDICATOR SPRING SIDE SW STOPPER CASSETTE MARKER INDICATOR ACTUATOR EMPTY PAD CASSETTE SPRING BOTTOM ACTUATOR REGIST RIGHT CURSOR A STOPPER ARM SHAFT PICK UP B PLATE PICK UP B HOLDER RETARD SLIDER RAIL LEVER PICK UP TORQUE LIMITER 340 SHAFT RETARD SPRING REGIST SPRING RETARD Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 Fig.No. 3 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 2 1,2,3 2 1 1 1 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 SP Part.No. 2C907340 2C907350 2C907360 2C907370 2C907380 2C907390 2C907400 2C907410 2C907430 2C907480 2C907490 2C907500 2C907550 2C907560 2C907570 2C907590 2C907600 2C927140 2C927210 2C993010 29807100 3A504020 3BG02060 3CY07080 3HL07250 3HW00010 3HW01010 3HW01020 3HW02020 3HW02030 3HW02040 3HW02080 3HW02090 3HW02110 3HW02120 3HW02130 3HW02140 3HW02150 3HW04010 3HW04020 Description SPRING PICK UP SPRING LEVER SPRING CURSOR R MARKER CASSETTE TURN PLATE CASSETTE LEVER CURSOR C HOLDER PULLEY A PULLEY GUIDE A BUSH PAPER FEED C HOLDER SENSOR STOPPER INDICATOR GROUND PLATE BOTTOM LID CASSETTE A LID CASSETTE B LID CASSETTE C HOLDER RIGHT CURSOR PIN CURSOR C SWITCH CONTAINER SENSOR 248NL1 PARTS,CT-410,SP GEAR 16,BYPASS COUPLER,RELEASE PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER BUSHING 6 GEAR 20 PF FEED REINFORCEMENT FEED ASSY MAIN PCB ASS'Y HEATER BRANCH PCB ASS'Y LEFT RAIL CASSETTE MOUNT HEATER UPPER REAR COVER MOUNT SW GROUND PLATE CASSETTE GROUND PLATE PF GROUND PLATE PF2 GROUND PLATE PF3 BASE LEG HOOK COVER COVER PAPER FEED LEFT FRONT COVER Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 1 4 2 2 1 1 1 2 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3HW
Fig.No.

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 10 -

3HW
SP Part.No. 3HW04030 3HW04040 3HW06020 3HW06030 3HW06040 3HW06050 3HW06060 3HW06070 3HW22010 3HW22020 3HW22030 3HW22040 3HW26010 3HW27010 3HW27020 3HW27040 3HW27050 3HW27060 3HW27070 3HW27080 3HW27090 3HW27100 34907141 68802070 76508130 M2104260 M2107120 M2109180 SP000360 Description LEFT REAR COVER REAR COVER ROLLER FEED SHAFT PAPER FEED GUIDE CONVEYING HOLDER FEED SHAFT SPRING FEED GUIDE SHEET PAPER FEED GEAR 26/90 GEAR 25 MOUNT MOTOR MOUNT DRIVE SUPPORT PLATE PCB MOTOR PAPER FEED CLUTCH PAPER FEED CONN CORD ASSY UPPER IF CONN CORD ASSY LOWER IF CONN CORD ASSY PCB-INTERF CONN CORD ASSY SIZE SW CONN CORD ASSY PE SENSOR CONN CORD ASSY FEED SW SHIELD GASKET GEAR 18,CASSETTE SPRING A,LIFT UP SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA) BINDING BAND SG-130 WIRE SADDLE,LWS-1S PUSH SWITCH 03 SN Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 Fig.No. SP Part.No. Description Quality 110V 120V 230V 240V Fig.No.

Parts with " '" indicates the spare parts.

- 11 -

CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION

REF. ITEM #
BHA BHC HDB HDG KAL KAN B3023060 B3024060 B4343080 B4343100 E0020100 E0020140

DESCRIPTION
BINDING TAP TITE S SCREW M3X6 BINDING TAP-TIGHT SCREW M4X6 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08(BLACK) TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X10(BLACK) SPRING PIN 2X10 SPRING PIN 2X14

JS-410

PARTS LIST
Published in Sept. 04

NOTE
1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order. eg. Parts Number 3HX16010 Parts Name BASE CONVEYING Machine Model JS-410 Cycle 60Hz Quantity 1

2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately. 3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied. 4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations.

Parts List
JS-410

CONTENTS
FIG. 1 JOB SEPARATOR.......................................................2

-1-

FIG. 1 JOB SEPARATOR

3HX

ZAU

33 33 32 30 7

29 8 6 3 28
ZAU KKH

32 31 21 5

CHJ

8 5 9
ZAU

15 14

8 11 8

12

8 8 13
ZAT

20

10 1 4

17 16

ZAU

39

ZAU

19 18 2 27 8
ZAU

38 37

22 9
ZAU

5 28

25 22 26 24 23
ZAU

34 35 36

-2-

FIG. 1 BASE SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Part.No. Alternative. Description BASE CONVEYING ROLLER EJECT SOLENOID,FEED SHIFT MOUNT DRIVE EDGING,EDS-0607M(KITAGAWA) SPRING,ADMISSION SHIFT LEVER FEED SHIFT RING STOPPER BUSHING 6 MOUNT JOINT COLLER DRIVE GEAR JOINT 20 GEAR,DEVELOPING IDLE GEAR 28 GEAR EJECT EARTH PLATE SPRING,JOINT DRIVE SHAFT CONVEYING SW SPRING,ACTUATOR ACTUATOR CONVEYING SW STOPPER 3 MOUNT SWITCH SENSOR 248NL1 LID EJECT SWITCH ACTUATOR EJECT CONN.CORD ASSY ENGINE-LED FRONT MOUNT UNIT BINDING BAND SG-130 STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT SPRING,FEED SHIFT PULLEY SHAFT EJECT PULLEY PULLEY EJECT SHEET,EJECT TRAY EJECT PIN BASE FRONT PIN UNIT LEFT FRONT COVER JS COVER,LED LED PCB ASS'Y Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 8 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 8 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 8 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

3HX

              

     

3HX16010 3HX21010 3HX27040 3HX22010 M2104350 3HX16040 3HX16030 2A806250 5MVX111DN003 3CY07080 3HX22020 3HX22030 3HX22050 19514130 19522180 3HX21080 3HP08450 3HX22040 3HX16070 3HX16080 3HX16060 2BT11070 5MVX111DN007 3HX16050 2C927210 3HX21030 3HX16090 3HX27050 3HX16100 M2107120 3HX21040 3B508440 3HX21050 3HX21060 3HX21070 3HX21020 3HP08520 3HX16110 3HX04010 3HX04020 3HX01010

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-3-

CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION

REF. ITEM#
CHJ KKH ZAT ZAU B1B00030 E0120200 B4A03060 BAA63080

DESCRIPTION
+BIND SCREW M2.6X03(TRIVARENT CHROMATING SPRING PIN 2X20(SUS) TP HEAD SCREW(+) / M3 X 6 DRFREE +TP TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08

DF-410

PARTS LIST
Published in Sept. 04

NOTE
1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order. eg. Parts Number 3HP08030 Parts Name PLATE PRESS Machine Model DF-410 Cycle 60Hz Quantity 1

2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately. 3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column. Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied. 4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations.

Parts List
DF-410

CONTENTS
FIG. 1 FIG. 2 FIG. 3 FIG. 4 BASE SECTION..........................................................2 PAPER CONVEYING SECTION.................................4 TRAY SECTION..........................................................6 ACCESSORY..............................................................8 INDEX ...................................................................10

-1-

FIG. 1 BASE SECTION

3HP

KAK

KAM

49 43 44 44 42 41
ZAI

32 51 41 40
B

33 37 47 29 31
ZAU

30 28 22 23
ZAT E05 24 25 34

36

16 50 39
A

25

38 16 39 45 46

35 8 23

50 17
ZAI

29

ZAT

ZAI

22 8 8 20
KAM

18 19 26 14 27
A

21

15

13 11 3 12 4 1 5 8 9
ZAI

52

ZAU

11 13 2 4 3

KAM

3 4

48

10
ZAI

-2-

FIG. 1 BASE SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. Alternative. Description PLATE PRESS LINK STOPPER BUSHING STOPPER PRESS STOPPER 3 SHAFT PRESS LEVER,PRESSURE STOPPER 5 BUSHING 6 MOUNT STOPPER PRESSURE PLATE STOPPER PRESSURE SPRING,STOPPER PRESSURE SHAFT PULLEY STOPPER PULLEY STOPPER PRESSURE ACTUATOR A SPRING,ACTUATOR SHEET EJECT GUIDE B FRONT FRAME STOPPER SENSOR 248NL1 ACTUATOR B ROLLER EJECT RING STOPPER BUSHING 8 GEAR 25,FEED LOOP STOPPER 6 UNDER EJECT PLATE MOUNT STAPLER B LOWER MIDDLE GUIDE LOWER FILM,ROLLER FEED SHIFT UPPER MIDDLE GUIDE SHAFT FEED SHIFT ROLLER FEED SHIFT ROLLER DECURLER GEAR,TRANSFER GEAR 22,EJECT PIN FRAME CLAW,FEED SHIFT GUIDE EJECT SHEET EJECT GUIDE SHAFT EJECT PULLEY Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 1 2 1 SP Ref.No.    41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Part.No. 63210170 3HP08580 3HP08130 3HP08190 3HP08160 3HP08170 3HP08180 3B508390 3HP05060 3HP08610 3HP08520 B1A53060 Alternative. Description PULLEY,LOOP FEED STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT COVER EJECT SPRING,EJECT PULLEY SHAFT EJECT COVER FRONT SPRING,EJECT COVER REAR SPRING,EJECT COVER SEAL,GUIDE MIDDLE TRAY LABEL B,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION SHEET EJECT PULLEY PIN BASE (ACCESSORY) BIND T.T SCREW(+)/M3 X 6 CRFREE S-T (ACCESSORY)

3HP
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1

       

      

     

3HP08030 3HP08380 3HP08490 2BT11070 5MVX111DN007 3HP08430 3BN08542 2BC06980 3CY07080 3HP08410 3HP08540 3HP08420 3HP08400 3HP08390 3HP08280 3HP08300 3HP08620 3HP08020 3HP08370 2C927210 3HP08290 3HP08120 2A806250 5MVX111DN003 2BC06510 72622050 2BC06910 3HP08040 3HP08260 3HP08070 3BN08720 3HP08060 3HP08080 3HP08090 3HP08100 2A116190 34921060 3HP08510 3BN08120 3HP08140 3HP08600 3HP08550

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-3-

FIG. 2 PAPER CONVEYING SECTION

3HP

ZAU

35 33
ZAI

40
ZAT

44 43

34 35 34 38 37 36 38
ZAI

42 16
ZAU KKH

A
ZAI

17 45 12
B

15

25 26 24

20
ZAI

CHK

KAM

13 14

31

18 8 9
CHK

11 7

10

ZAI

27

22 22

19 21

19 41
KKH

25 24 45 31 32
ZAI ZAI

14

26 5 4

3 2

ZAI ZAI ZAI

23
B
CHH

6 1
ZAI

39

28
ZAI

29

30

12

-4-

FIG. 2 PAPER CONVEYING SECTION

SP Ref.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. Alternative. Description MOUNT SOLENOID LEVER CLUTCH STOPPER 3 SOLENOID B,FEED SHIFT SPRING,REVERSE SOLENOID HOLDER,FULCRUM SHAFT CLUTCH GEAR,BYPASS LIFT CLUTCH SQUARE SPRING CLUTCH COLLER STOPPER CLUTCH BOSS STOPPER PRESSURE BINDING BAND SG-130 CAM,CLUTCH BUSHING 6 SOLENOID,FEED SHIFT SPRING,GUIDE SHIFT MOTOR,FEED SHIFT MOUNT MOTOR RING STOPPER MOUNT REAR GEAR Z32 Z16 GEAR,24 EARTH PLATE SPACER DECURLER MOUNT DECURLER BEARING,DRIVE UPPER ROLLER DECURLER MOUNT STAPLER A GUIDE STAPLER EDGING EDS-1 WIRE SADDLE,LWS-1S MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05S-2 UPPER GUIDE GUIDE,PAPER HOLDER SHAFT,GUIDE EJECT SPRING,FEED SHIFT PULLEY SHAFT SHIFT PULLEY PULLEY,BRANCH STAPLER STATIC ELIMINATOR,CONVEYING Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 45 Part.No. 3HP08460 3HP08570 3HP08310 3HP08530 3HP27010 Alternative. Description GUIDE WIRE PLATE GUIDE SHIFT LEVER GUIDE SHIFT PIN LEVER CONN.CORD ASSY JCT-CONV

3HP
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

  

          

 

  

3HP08220 3HP08480 2BT11070 5MVX111DN007 3HP27090 73226040 2BJ02121 3HP08230 66006630 3HP08630 303HP08630 3HP08240 3HP08500 M2107120 3BN08580 3CY07080 3HP27080 3HP08320 3HP27070 3HP08200 2A806250 5MVX111DN003 3HP08210 3HP08440 2AV22290 3HP08450 3HP08340 3HP08330 2AV22410 3HP08110 3HP08250 3HP08270 M2104200 M2109180 M2105740 3HP08050 3BN08460 3BN08480 3B508440 3HP08350 3BN08100 3AW27010 3HP08590

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-5-

FIG. 3 TRAY SECTION

3HP

20 20 20 18 11 20 13
ZAI

34 12

20 18 10

19 20 12

20 18 11

19 20 13 20 34 7 19 9

20 8
ZAI

36 39 37
B

10

20 12 27 23 20
KKG

8 8 20
ZAI

10
ZAI

26 23
ZAU

23 6 51 14 22

6
D

32 29 4

20 16 13
ZAU

21 25

43
ZAU

20 13 14 13 28
E
ZAU

28

41

ZAU

ZAU

29 44 28
ZAU ZAI ZAU ZAU

29 5
ZAI

33

34
ZAI

34 35
ZAI

46 15 40 1 45 15 52 17 24 48
A

30 38

31

47

2 6 50 49 34

34 6
B

-6-

FIG. 3 TRAY SECTION

SP Ref.No.  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Part.No. Alternative. Description COVER MIDDLETRAY FULCRUM PLATE TRAY EARTH PLATE A EARTH PLATE B EARTH PLATE C SENSOR 248NL1 MOUNT MOTOR SMALL MOTOR,SIDE REGISTRATION MOUNT MOTOR LARGE CONN.CORD ASSY FNS-MAIN COLLAR 21 PULLEY,DRIVE PULLEY 24,CONVEYING BELT,SIDE REGISTRATION SLIDER CURSOR A BELT,LEADING REGISTRATION SLIDER CURSOR C GEAR Z47/B20,SIDE REGISTRATION GEAR Z60 RING STOPPER SHAFT RELEASE MOUNT RELEASE BUSHING,DRUM SHAFT HANDLE RELEASE SPRING RELEASE SLIDER RELEASE LEVER RELEASE TENSION PLATE BELT SPRING TENSION PLATE LEVER PI SPRING LEVER PI MAIN PCB ASS'Y SENSOR,TRAY MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05S-2 EDGING,EDS-17L(KITAGAWA) CONN.CORD ASSY SENS-MAIN CONN.CORD ASSY ENGINE STOPPER FOOT BINDING BAND SG-130 FILM SENSOR B Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 1 1 2 3 5 2 2 1 1 3 3 16 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 1 1 2 3 5 2 2 1 1 3 3 16 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 1 1 2 3 5 2 2 1 1 3 3 16 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 SP Ref.No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Part.No. 3BN07090 18305060 3BN07100 3HP07090 3HP07320 3HP05040 3HP07360 3HP07400 3HP07370 3HP07380 3HP07420 3HP07430 Alternative. Description FRONT CURSOR,SIDE REGISTRATION LABEL,CAUTION PARTITION REAR CURSOR,SIDE REGISTRATION CURSOR LEADING REGIST TRAY SMALL LABEL,SMALL TRAY EARTH PLATE EMI FILM,SENSOR FOOT RIGHT SIDE SPRING,SUPPORT PLATE EARTH PLATE D EARTH PLATE E

3HP
Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

           

 

 

3HP07020 3HP07030 3HP07290 3HP07300 3HP07410 2C927210 3HP07330 3HP27100 3HP07310 3HP27110 3B622040 3A722090 3A722040 3HP07340 3HP07100 3HP07120 3HP07110 3BN07050 3HP07080 2A806250 5MVX111DN003 3HP07190 3HP07170 29822140 3HP07180 3HP07250 3HP07200 3HP07210 3HP07070 3HP07220 3HP07350 3HP07390 3HP01010 3HP27120 M2105740 M2104250 3HP27050 3HP27130 303HP27130 3HP07440 303HP07440 M2107120 3HP07450 303HP07450

  

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-7-

FIG. 4 ACCESSORY

3HP

ZAU

16 8

10 17 11 5 7 13 1 6 4 12 12 19 19 23

3 12 20

20

18

14 15
ZAI

21

ZAU ZAU

22

-8-

FIG. 4 ACCESSORY
SP Ref.No.                  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Part.No. 3HP04050 2C905220 3HP04030 3HP04040 3HP04010 3HP05020 3HP05030 3HP04090 3HP04020 3B505040 3HP04070 B1A53060 3HP05050 3HP07270 3HP07280 3BN04190 3BN04120 3BN04170 3BN04140 3HP04080 3B504100 3BN04181 3HP04060 Alternative. Description COVER LEFT MIDDLE LABEL LEFT COVER FRONT EJECT COVER REAR EJECT COVER COVER STAPLER LARGE LABEL,JAM REMOVEMENT LABEL,CARTRIDGE JAM MAGNET UNDERSTAPLER COVER STAPLER SMALL LABEL,CARTRIDGE DETACHING MOUNT COVER BIND T.T SCREW(+)/M3 X 6 CRFREE S-T LABEL A,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION HOOK MIDDLETRAY HOLDER FULCRUM WORK PLATE,EJECT TRAY SHAFT,EJECT TRAY TRAY,EJECT SPRING,EJECT TRAY STOPPER,TRAY PAD,EJECT TRAY TRAY B,EJECT MOUNT BASE,EJECT TRAY Quantity 120V 230V 240V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1

3HP

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

Parts with " " are component parts or sub-assembly with "" appearing immediately above them.

-9-

INDEX
SP Part.No. 18305060 29822140 2A116190 2A806250 2AV22290 2AV22410 2BC06510 2BC06910 2BC06980 2BJ02121 2BT11070 2C905220 2C927210 34921060 3A722040 3A722090 3AW27010 3B504100 3B505040 3B508390 3B508440 3B622040 3BN04120 3BN04140 3BN04170 3BN04181 3BN04190 3BN07050 3BN07090 3BN07100 3BN08100 3BN08120 3BN08460 3BN08480 3BN08542 3BN08580 3BN08720 3CY07080 3HP01010 3HP04010 Alternative. Description Fig.No. 3 3 1 1,2,3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1,2 4 1,3 1 3 3 2 4 4 1 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1,2 3 4 SP                    Part.No. 3HP04020 3HP04030 3HP04040 3HP04050 3HP04060 3HP04070 3HP04080 3HP04090 3HP05020 3HP05030 3HP05040 3HP05050 3HP05060 3HP07020 3HP07030 3HP07070 3HP07080 3HP07090 3HP07100 3HP07110 3HP07120 3HP07170 3HP07180 3HP07190 3HP07200 3HP07210 3HP07220 3HP07250 3HP07270 3HP07280 3HP07290 3HP07300 3HP07310 3HP07320 3HP07330 3HP07340 3HP07350 3HP07360 3HP07370 3HP07380 Alternative. Description COVER STAPLER SMALL FRONT EJECT COVER REAR EJECT COVER COVER LEFT MIDDLE MOUNT BASE,EJECT TRAY MOUNT COVER STOPPER,TRAY MAGNET UNDERSTAPLER LABEL,JAM REMOVEMENT LABEL,CARTRIDGE JAM LABEL,SMALL TRAY LABEL A,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION LABEL B,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION COVER MIDDLETRAY FULCRUM PLATE TRAY TENSION PLATE BELT GEAR Z60 CURSOR LEADING REGIST SLIDER CURSOR A SLIDER CURSOR C BELT,LEADING REGISTRATION MOUNT RELEASE HANDLE RELEASE SHAFT RELEASE SLIDER RELEASE LEVER RELEASE SPRING TENSION PLATE SPRING RELEASE HOOK MIDDLETRAY HOLDER FULCRUM EARTH PLATE A EARTH PLATE B MOUNT MOTOR LARGE TRAY SMALL MOUNT MOTOR SMALL BELT,SIDE REGISTRATION LEVER PI EARTH PLATE EMI FOOT RIGHT SIDE SPRING,SUPPORT PLATE

3HP
Fig.No. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

                      

    

LABEL,CAUTION PARTITION BUSHING,DRUM SHAFT GEAR,TRANSFER 5MVX111DN003 RING STOPPER GEAR,24 BEARING,DRIVE BUSHING 8 STOPPER 6 STOPPER 5 HOLDER,FULCRUM 5MVX111DN007 STOPPER 3 LABEL LEFT COVER SENSOR 248NL1 GEAR 22,EJECT PULLEY 24,CONVEYING PULLEY,DRIVE STAPLER PAD,EJECT TRAY LABEL,CARTRIDGE DETACHING SEAL,GUIDE MIDDLE TRAY SPRING,FEED SHIFT PULLEY COLLAR 21 SHAFT,EJECT TRAY SPRING,EJECT TRAY TRAY,EJECT TRAY B,EJECT WORK PLATE,EJECT TRAY GEAR Z47/B20,SIDE REGISTRATION FRONT CURSOR,SIDE REGISTRATION REAR CURSOR,SIDE REGISTRATION PULLEY,BRANCH CLAW,FEED SHIFT GUIDE,PAPER HOLDER SHAFT,GUIDE EJECT LEVER,PRESSURE CAM,CLUTCH LOWER FILM,ROLLER FEED SHIFT BUSHING 6 MAIN PCB ASS'Y COVER STAPLER LARGE

  

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

- 10 -

3HP
SP Part.No. 3HP07390 3HP07400 3HP07410 3HP07420 3HP07430 3HP07440 3HP07450 3HP08020 3HP08030 3HP08040 3HP08050 3HP08060 3HP08070 3HP08080 3HP08090 3HP08100 3HP08110 3HP08120 3HP08130 3HP08140 3HP08160 3HP08170 3HP08180 3HP08190 3HP08200 3HP08210 3HP08220 3HP08230 3HP08240 3HP08250 3HP08260 3HP08270 3HP08280 3HP08290 3HP08300 3HP08310 3HP08320 3HP08330 3HP08340 3HP08350 Alternative. Description Fig.No. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 SP Part.No. 3HP08370 3HP08380 3HP08390 3HP08400 3HP08410 3HP08420 3HP08430 3HP08440 3HP08450 3HP08460 3HP08480 3HP08490 3HP08500 3HP08510 3HP08520 3HP08530 3HP08540 3HP08550 3HP08570 3HP08580 3HP08590 3HP08600 3HP08610 3HP08620 3HP08630 3HP27010 3HP27050 3HP27070 3HP27080 3HP27090 3HP27100 3HP27110 3HP27120 3HP27130 63210170 66006630 72622050 73226040 B1A53060 M2104200 Alternative. Description Fig.No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 2 1,4 2

    

  

SPRING LEVER PI FILM,SENSOR EARTH PLATE C EARTH PLATE D EARTH PLATE E 303HP07440 STOPPER FOOT 303HP07450 FILM SENSOR B FRONT FRAME PLATE PRESS UNDER EJECT PLATE UPPER GUIDE UPPER MIDDLE GUIDE LOWER MIDDLE GUIDE SHAFT FEED SHIFT ROLLER FEED SHIFT ROLLER DECURLER UPPER ROLLER DECURLER ROLLER EJECT COVER EJECT GUIDE EJECT SHAFT EJECT COVER FRONT SPRING,EJECT COVER REAR SPRING,EJECT COVER SPRING,EJECT PULLEY MOUNT MOTOR MOUNT REAR MOUNT SOLENOID SHAFT CLUTCH COLLER STOPPER CLUTCH MOUNT STAPLER A MOUNT STAPLER B GUIDE STAPLER ACTUATOR A ACTUATOR B SPRING,ACTUATOR LEVER GUIDE SHIFT SPRING,GUIDE SHIFT MOUNT DECURLER SPACER DECURLER SHAFT SHIFT PULLEY

     

 

        

STOPPER LINK STOPPER PULLEY STOPPER PRESSURE SHAFT PULLEY STOPPER MOUNT STOPPER PRESSURE SPRING,STOPPER PRESSURE SHAFT PRESS GEAR Z32 Z16 EARTH PLATE GUIDE WIRE LEVER CLUTCH BUSHING STOPPER PRESS BOSS STOPPER PRESSURE PIN FRAME PIN BASE (ACCESSORY) PIN LEVER PLATE STOPPER PRESSURE SHAFT EJECT PULLEY PLATE GUIDE SHIFT STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT STATIC ELIMINATOR,CONVEYING SHEET EJECT GUIDE SHEET EJECT PULLEY SHEET EJECT GUIDE B 303HP08630 SQUARE SPRING CLUTCH CONN.CORD ASSY JCT-CONV CONN.CORD ASSY SENS-MAIN MOTOR,FEED SHIFT SOLENOID,FEED SHIFT SOLENOID B,FEED SHIFT MOTOR,SIDE REGISTRATION CONN.CORD ASSY FNS-MAIN SENSOR,TRAY 303HP27130 CONN.CORD ASSY ENGINE PULLEY,LOOP FEED GEAR,BYPASS LIFT CLUTCH GEAR 25,FEED LOOP SPRING,REVERSE SOLENOID BIND T.T SCREW(+)/M3 X 6 CRFREE S-T (ACCESSORY) EDGING EDS-1

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

- 11 -

3HP
SP Part.No. M2104250 M2105740 M2107120 M2109180 Alternative. Description EDGING,EDS-17L(KITAGAWA) MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05S-2 BINDING BAND SG-130 WIRE SADDLE,LWS-1S Fig.No. 3 2,3 2,3 2

Parts with "'" indicates the spare parts.

- 12 -

CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION

REF. ITEM#
CHH CHJ CHK E05 KAK KAM KKG KKH ZAI ZAT ZAU B1B03040 B1B00030 B4A03040 D1000500 E0020080 E0020120 E0030160 E0120200 B1A53060 B4A03060 BAA63080

DESCRIPTION
+BIND SCREW M3X04(TRIVALENT CHROMATING) +BIND SCREW M2.6X03(TRIVARENT CHROMATING +TP-A SCREW M3X04(TRIVALENT CHROMATING) E STOP RING /X 5 X 0.6T S-UNICR SPRING PIN 2X8 SPRING PIN / M2 X 12 S-BLK SPRING PIN 3X16 SPRING PIN 2X20(SUS) BIND T.T SCREW(+) / M3 X 6 CRFREE S-T TP HEAD SCREW(+) / M3 X 6 DRFREE +TP TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08

 2004
http://www.kyoceramita.com